Home

Lucent Technologies P550 User's Manual

1. 4 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 16 9 Monitoring the Cajun Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 16 10 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 1 Analyzing Network Performance Using RMON and Ethernet Statistics Layer 2 Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures are common to both Layer 2 and Layer 3 configuration Included in this chapter O Viewing Statistics O Setting Up a Mirror Port Viewing Statistics The switch interface provides a variety of statistics that allow you to monitor network performance and troubleshoot network problems To access network statistics 1 In the Statistics section of the Web Agent window click Modules amp Ports The Module Statistics dialog box opens Click Clear Counters to get a fresh view of the statistics being gathered This resets all of the counters to zero so that you can track the counters from a specific point forward In the Module column click the module identifier to view statistics for a specific port on this module The Port Statistics dialog box opens Click Clear Counters to get a fresh view of the statistics being gathered This resets all of the counters to zero so that you can track the counters from a particular point forward In the Name column click the port identifier to view statistics for this specific port The Ethernet Interface Stat
2. Table 17 1 Interpreting Ethernet Interface Statistics Continued half duplex links only packets have collided on the network Collisions increase as network use of shared segments increases Therefore if the collision rate increases without an increase of network use it might indicate a problem Guidelines for appropriate collision rates are e 10 percent Normal collision rate for shared Ethernet segment e 30 percent Collisions begin to interfere with performance e 70 percent Practical limit for network to remain functioning A full duplex link should not show collision activity In a switched network collisions should be rare unless your switched segments attach to multiple ends stations a perfectly legal configuration option Statistic Indicates Actions J abbers Jabbers indicate that devices on the Possible causes networks are sending improper e Bad network interface card electrical signals Because Ethernet e Repeater network with looped uses electrical signalling to traffic determine whether or not it is okay A to transmit a jabber condition can Possible actions respectively halt all traffic on a segment e Replace network interface card e Rewire network to remove the loop Collisions Counts number of times that Possible causes e Busy network e Broken adapter not listening before broadcasting e Network loop Possible actions respectively e If you
3. Type Displays the type of multicast session Options include e Learned Entry is dynamically learned e Mgmt Entry is configured statically by the user Client Ports Displays the number of client ports in the multicast session and opens the Multicast Session Client Ports dialog box Application Displays the active application s of the multicast session Applications include Mgmt e IGMP e LGMP e CGMP 5 Click DELETE to remove your selected multicast session or CANCEL to restore previous settings Note Static Mgmt sessions can only be deleted through the Static Sessions dialog box Deleting a Multicast Session Client Port To delete a multicast session client port 1 In the Intelligent Multicasting section of the Web Agent window click Session Search The Intelligent Multicast Session Search dialog box opens 2 In the Client Ports column click on the client port number for the selected multicast session The Multicast Session Client Port dialog box opens 3 Use Table 15 5 for more information on your multicast session client ports Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 15 5 Multicast Session Client Port Parameters Parameter Definition Select Select the multicast session client port Port Displays the client port number Application Displays the application s associated with this clien
4. xxi Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 1 Cajun P550 Switch Overview Switch Description The Cajun P550 switch is a family member of Gigabit Ethernet switching products from Lucent Technologies Corporation and supports O O UO UO U More bandwidth Elimination of bottlenecks Better manageability Routing Dependable multimedia support Hardware Overview The P550 s hardware features includes O O Chassis Chassis Modules The switching fabric is non blocking and provides 22 88 Gbps switching throughput 45 76 Gbps aggregate bandwidth The chassis features include Figure 1 1 O O O O Seven slots six payload slots Up to 288 10 100Base TX ports autosensing Up to 60 100Base FX ports Up to 24 gigabit speed Ethernet ports Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 1 1 Cajun P550 Switch Overview Figure 1 1 Cajun Switch e 00 2 e 00 aL e 090 0 ape a o ago a e a 2 9 e 0 Attach serial 3 port cable here Attach Ethernet cable here Modules The chassis modules include O Layer 3 Supervisor Module or Layer 2 Supervisor Module O Layer 3 and Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Modules O Layer 3 and Layer 2 Gigabit Speed Modules Layer 2 Supervisor Module The Supervisor Module features include O PowerPC 860 Reduced Instruction Set Computer RISC processor Memory 4 MB Flash
5. 0 ee ee eee 11 5 Chapter 12 Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Layer 2 and Layer 3 OVEIVIEW ii A STE OEE RNs WMA eda sealed Sa Sete es 12 1 VEAN Operation 3 6 aac GO it hen OO e aaa Ae 12 1 Ingres RUE A A A hes Ase naan UREN REA bane we aT os Rae 12 1 Forwardins Rules s 24 058 i ea ete b A He EE Bre ie ele Fares 12 2 ix Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Epress RUE o a 12 2 Port Based VEAN Si a Sates A AS Sawa Saree dy 12 2 Creating and Implementing VLANS 0 cece eee nee eee eens 12 3 VLAN Gonsiderations sesser d outaloe ant a eee ee aes 12 3 Greatin gai VLAN 4a cachs ss date deh eds a alada 12 3 Configuring VLAN Parameters cirea ccc ee eee eee ees 12 4 Creating 3Com Mapping Tables 20 0 cece eee eae 12 5 Assigning Ports To VLANS yira i A a whee ea Bee BRE 12 6 Using Spanning Tree Setup and Monitoring 0 0 cee eee eee 12 6 Spanning Tree Bridge Options seien edek ea ce eee eee a 12 7 Managing Spanning TreeS 1 0 cee ene eee eee eae 12 7 Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Ports 0 eee eee eee 12 9 Disabling Spanning Tree Mode for the Port 0 0 eee cee eee 12 11 Using Hunt Groups to Aggregate Bandwidth between Switches 0 12 11 Hunt Group Considerations 0c eee eee eens 12 12 Configuring Hunt GTOUP Sia A Deeley cond eels Dates A AE eco OE en 12 12 Viewing Hunt Group Members oo 12 13 Addin
6. 20 0 nee eee 4 11 Examining IPX Route Table Statistics 0 0 ear 4 12 Searching the IPX Service Table seters derie dimaten a eee 4 12 Examining the IPX Service Table 0 ee eee eee nee 4 13 Examining IPX Service Table Statistics 0 0 eee 4 14 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide vi Chapter 5 Configuring IPX RIP Protocol Layer 3 OVEIVIE WA A AA RAI A ARI da a delole se 5 1 Configuring IPX RIP Interfaces o o ooooor nnn ee ene ee 5 1 Creating and Modifying IPX RIP Filters 2 eee 5 2 Interpreting IPX RIP Interface Statistics ee teens 5 5 Chapter 6 Configuring IPX SAP Protocol Layer 3 OVEIVIEW o ete AS A Oe edd Me A O Seated Oe ah aes A 6 1 Configuring IPX SAP Interfaces 6 1 Creating IPX SAP Filt lS rio as dias edule a Gas A yale a a a a e a 6 2 Creating IPX SAP Name Filters omurai aN E eee nee eens 6 2 Creating IPX SAP Network Filters 2 0 a na a a eee eens 6 5 Interpreting IPX SAP Interface Statistics 0 0 een eens 6 7 Chapter 7 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 OVELVIEW os A A ee ea ile Sed A ee eee dn dee AAA eee 7 1 Configuring IP Global Routing 2 0 e n nee eee eee 7 1 Greating an JP Interlace it at Davide shee ake tee weak A es A ed Be ones 7 2 Enabling TP ROUNE aria a deh a de eh a ae Pelee gba Bat 7 4 Assigning IP Interfaces to the VLAN 2 2 0 0 ee nee nena 7 5 IP M ltinetting ba a li SoA abe lone td Whe ag 7 7 C
7. 0 0 0 cc ee ees 7 30 Displaying the IGMP Local Multicast Forwarding Cache 7 31 Displaying DVMRP Global Statistics nusu ees 7 32 Examining DVMRP Interface Statistics ee ee 7 33 vii Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Displaying DVMRP Neighbor Router s o o oocoocoooooocc eee 7 34 Displaying DVMRP Routing Table Statistics oooooooooooooo ee eee 7 35 Displaying the DVMRP Route Table 0 0 0 ce eee 7 36 Displaying the DVMRP Upstream Routers 0 0 eee eee 7 37 Displaying the DVMRP Designated Forwarder s Table 04 7 37 Displaying the DVMRP Downstream Dependent Router s 7 38 Displaying the DVMRP Multicast Forwarding Cache 00000 7 39 GONMMSUTING VRRP ise credo ee wets cacao aetna E ae Pat ae A a RAS ar dns eae ants 7 42 Enabling VRRP crias ii eee lhe is Sua AA a a ee et 7 43 Enabling VRRP on an Interface 0 0 ee ee ene ene nn eees 7 43 Creating a VRRP Virtual Router ooo 7 43 Configuring VRRP Authentication ooo 7 44 Displaying VRRP Statisties se i ee backs td Saeed ee ve Sea 7 44 COMMS UTI LRP e et road bie 7 45 Enabling IRDP on an Interface o o o oooooororrr eee teens 7 46 Adding an IRDP Interlaced tiated dees Nate sate Neen A wedge aE eel en cova 7 48 Deleting an IRDP Interlace is See de ee eh oe ee eee eee te ee 7 48 COMMUTING LDAP e an decode a a dete Manse ds At
8. The switch is delivered as a plug and play IEEE 802 1D standard bridge but supports several VLAN tagging schemes This makes the switch highly interoperable in existing networks because O Any port can be a trunk port O Ports have configurable VLAN tagging on a per port basis O Ports process a number of popular VLAN tagging schemes including major vendors proprietary schemes Figure 1 6 Open Trunk Technology 3Com LinkSwitch Lie 3Com LinkSwitch Multilayer Multilayer IEEE 802 10 ore eae elas 802 10 OpentTrunk translates VLAN tagged frames from one format to another including CoS Open Trunk Technology features include O Switch supports frame encapsulation e Identifies frame VLAN via tag e Associates frame priority O Switch supports multiple tagging formats e IEEE 802 1Q standard draft document e A major vendor s multi level tagging scheme e 3Com VLAN Tag and PACE priority signalling O Switch supports translation to and from any format A packet can enter the switch with a 3Com SuperStack II VLAN tag and exit the switch as a multi layer tagged packet Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 1 11 Cajun P550 Switch Overview Figure 1 7 Trunking Translation Trunking Translation c E 2 2 ci z Z Frame 3 Format oad L Clear E gt E IEEE 2 2 802 1Q amp Frame Format o Multilayer 2 Normal Ethernet 2 gt 3Com oO or 802 3 with valid oO fe CRC Frame
9. Hunt Group Displays the hunt group of which the port is a member for the selected module STAP Mode Displays whether the spanning tree algorithm protocol is enabled or disabled for the selected module MAC Address Displays the port s MAC address for the selected module 4 Click one of the following for more information on switch ports e Next Previous Module to view the next or previous module s switch port parameters e Modules to return to the Module Information dialog box All Module Switch Ports Configuration to open the Switch Port Configuration All Ports dialog box and configure all ports for the selected module Configuring Switch Port Parameters Switch port parameters set how each port performs switching functions for example VLAN parameters hunt group assignments trunk mode and frame tag scheme Refer to Table 3 7 for more information on individual switch port configuration parameters Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 13 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 To configure switch port parameters 1 In the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window select Modules amp Ports The Module Information dialog box opens 2 From the Model Number column locate the module for which you want to configure ports Click the Switch Ports column next to the selected module The Switch Ports dialog box opens 3 In the Name column click the name for th
10. IPX Overview The Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX protocol is a connectionless protocol that performs datagram delivery and routing in Novell NetWare networks Each IPX address consists of three parts Network Number A 32 bit 8 characters number that is normally assigned by the network administrator O Node Number A 48 bit 12 characters number that is normally the MAC layer address of the physical interface O Socket Number A number used to route packets to different processes within the same node The syntax of the IPX address is network node socket For example 000000AAh 00e03b124213h 4003h where 000000aan is the network number 00e03b124213h is the node number and 4003h is the socket number associated with a running process on the end node for example RIP NetWare Link State Protocol NLSP Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 4 1 Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 IPX Datagram Structure The IPX datagram contains an IPX header and any data to be transferred on the network The IPX header is a 30 byte header that contains 10 fields Figure 4 1 illustrates a conceptual view of an IPX datagram Figure 4 1 IPX Datagram in Detail Checksum 2 bytes Packet Length 2 bytes Transport Control 1 byte Packet Type 1 byte Destination Network 4 bytes m 30 Bytes Destination Node 6 bytes Destination Socket 2 bytes Source Network 4 bytes
11. Source Node 6 bytes Source Socket 2 bytes Table 4 1 describes each field in the IPX datagram Table 4 1 PX Datagram Fields Field Definition Checksum Provides integrity checking Note Checksum is normally not enabled in IPX networks and is usually set to OXFFFF Packet Length Length in bytes of the packet Transport Control Number of routers a packet has traversed This is used to discard a packet if the packet traverses a maximum number of routers 16 4 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 Table 4 1 IPX Datagram Fields Continued Field Definition Packet Type Indicates the type of service required or offered by the packet Types include e Sequenced Packet Exchange SPX packet e NetWare Core Protocol NCP packet e NetBIOS propagated packet Destination Network The IPX network address of the destination network Destination Node The MAC address of the destination node Destination Socket Address of the process running in the destination node Sockets route packets to different processes within the same node Source Network The network address of the source network Source Node The MAC address of the source node Source Socket Address of the process running in the source node Configuring the Cajun Switch as an IPX Router To configure IPX routing globally on your switch 1 From the IPX Conf
12. Configuring RIP for the Switch To configure the RIP routing protocol globally on your switch Note You must enable RIP globally To enable RIP refer to Configuring IP Interfaces and Configuring VRRP in Chapter 7 1 In the RIP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Global Configuration The RIP Global Configuration dialog box opens 2 Use Table 8 1 to configure the global setup Table 8 1 RIP Global Configuration Parameters Global RIP Enable or disable the RIP protocol The default is Enable Update Timer Specify the value in seconds that represents the time between RIP updates on all interfaces The default value is 30 seconds Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 8 1 Configuring the RIP Routing Protocol Layer 3 Table 8 1 RIP Global Configuration Parameters Continued Parameter Allows you to Purge TTL Specify the global Time To Live TTL in seconds that the RIP update persists The default value is 120 seconds Triggered Updates Enable or disable route updates that were triggered by a topology change in the network to be added to the routing table The default is Enable Update Pkt Delay Specify the value in seconds that represents the time delay between successive RIP update packets to the neighbor when the update requires multiple packets The default value is 0 seconds no delay 3 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previ
13. IP Address Mask Identify a subnet mask associated with this interface This parameter is not configurable from the IGMP configuration dialog box IGMP Version Specify the IGMP Version 1 0 or 2 0 to associate with the IGMP interface Maximum Groups Specify the number of IGMP Groups that can be active on this interface The default value is 32 Always be Group Version 1 0 Enable or disable this interface to be the Membership Querier designated querier Version 2 0 e Enable to force this interface to send queries e Disable to obey the designated querier election Only the designated router will query hosts on your network This is disabled by default Process Leave Packets Enable to terminate group memberships quickly IGMP Version 2 0 only The default value is Enabled Query Request Interval in Configure the time period between queries The default value sec is 125 seconds Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 17 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Query Response Interval Configure the amount of time to wait for a response from a Table 7 8 GMP Interface Parameters Continued Parameter Allows you to in sec host after sending a query If no response is received within this time the host is removed from the group table The default value is 10 seconds Neighbor Querier Timeout Enter the amount of time in seconds this interface should Interval in sec wait after hearing a nei
14. e Client Ports Removed Displays the number of remove client events generated by LGMP per VLAN e Sessions Removed Displays the number of remove session events generated by LGMP per VLAN e Router Ports Added Displays the number of add router events generated by LGMP per VLAN e Router Ports Removed Displays the number of remove router events generated by LGMP per VLAN Configuring Viewing an LGMP Client To configure an LGMP client and view its statistics 1 In the Intelligent Multicasting section of the Web Agent window click LGMP Client The LGMP Client Configuration dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 15 15 Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Note You must enable intelligent multicasting on a global basis to make your LGMP client configuration active 2 Use Table 15 11 for more information on the LGMP client parameters Table 15 11 LGMP Client Configuration Parameters Parameter Definition Enable State Select to enable or disable LGMP client The default value is Disabled LGMP Clients Displays the number of LGMP clients per VLAN and opens the LGMP Client Displays per VLAN dialog box LGMP Message Report Displays the number of LGMP report Reception Statistics messages received e Leave Displays the number of LGMP leave messages received e End Session Displays the number of LGMP end session messages received e Router Report Dis
15. ver 5 From the Automatic VLAN Creation pull down menu select Enable to automatically create a VLAN each time the port receives a frame from an unknown VLAN Note This feature does not create entries in 3Com Mapping Tables Refer to Creating 3Com Mapping Tables in Chapter 12 for more information on 3Com Mapping Tables 6 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 17 Note Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Configuring VTP Snooping VTP is a Layer 2 protocol developed by Cisco to maintain VLAN configuration consistency among its switches this protocol only runs over trunk ports that have enabled either Cisco ISL or IEEE 802 10 tagging VTP Snooping allows a Cajun switch to synchronize its VLAN configuration with that of a Cisco switch running VTP in the same network VLAN additions deletions and name changes made on the network s Cisco VTP server will be automatically updated on Cajun switches that have VTP Snooping enabled and have connectivity to the Cisco VTP server VLAN changes made on a Cajun switch are not automatically updated on any other switch Note VTP Snooping is enabled by default You would only need to change VTP Snooping port settings if you wanted to disable its ability to learn VLAN changes on the network s Cisco VTP server To configure switch port VTP Snooping parameters 1 In the System Con
16. 0 0 cece eee eee eee 3 7 Configuring Physical Port Parameters on Gigabit Ports 00 0022 ee eee 3 7 Configuring Physical Port Parameters on Fast Ethernet Ports 04 3 9 Using the All Ports Configuration Dialog Box 0 0 asseure 3 12 Viewing Switch Port Parameters sussun ee nee eee eens 3 13 Configuring Switch Port Parameters 0 cee eee eens 3 13 Configuring Port VLAN Parameters 0 cee eens 3 16 Configuring VTP SNOOPIDE i edt ated eed ewe A A AAA 3 18 Configuring Non VLAN Switch Port Parameters 0 eee ee ee eee 3 19 Examples of Switch Ports Settings for Various VLAN Connection Types 3 20 Configuring Fast Start Mode 2 0 0 nee ee eens 3 21 Using the All Ports Configuration Dialog BOX 2 20 0c ene 3 22 Setting Up SNMP Communities 0 2 ooo 3 23 Changing the Console Serial Port Settings 0 0 0 eee 3 24 Configuring the Serial Console Port as a TTY Console 002000 3 25 Connecting a M dem A A A EE EN a ata Sa eae 3 25 Configuring the Serial Console Port as a PPP Console 022000 3 26 Regaining Configuration Access to the PPP Serial Port Console 3 27 Configuring Dial Up Networking 0 0 cee cee 3 28 Using Dial Up Networking with a PPP Serial Port Console 3 29 Configuring the IP Interface for the PPP Console 0 0 e
17. 10 12 viewing 10 11 Zip Ext Reply Rx 10 13 Zip Ext Reply Tx 10 13 Zip GNI Rq Rx 10 13 Zip GNI Rq Tx 10 13 Zip GNI Rsp Rx 10 13 Zip GNI Rsp Tx 10 13 Zip Query Rx 10 13 Zip Query Tx 10 13 Zip Reply Rx 10 13 Zip Reply Tx 10 13 AppleTalk interface deleting 10 5 AppleTalk interface parameters admin starte 10 4 default zone 10 4 encapsulation type 10 3 interface 10 3 metric 10 3 network number 10 4 network range end 10 3 network range start 10 3 node 10 4 VLAN 10 3 AppleTalk interface statistics interface 10 13 network number 10 13 network range 10 13 node 10 13 seed 10 14 state 10 14 AppleTalk interface creating 10 3 AppleTalk interface editing 10 4 AppleTalk NBP filter editing 10 8 AppleTalk NBP filter parameters access list 10 8 interface 10 8 name 10 8 type 10 8 AppleTalk NBP table viewing 10 17 AppleTalk NBP table parameters index 10 17 interface 10 17 name 10 17 type 10 17 zone 10 17 AppleTalk overview 10 1 AppleTalk protocols supported 10 1 AppleTalk route table viewing 10 14 AppleTalk route table statistics current number of routes 10 15 interface 10 15 metric 10 14 network range 10 14 next hop 10 14 owner 10 14 peak number of routes 10 15 state 10 14 zones 10 15 AppleTalk route table statistics viewing 10 15 AppleTalk routing overview 10 1 AppleTalk routing configuring 10 2 AppleTalk static route creating 10 6 deleting 10 7 Index 3
18. 16 MB DRAM 128 KB NVRAM Real time clock Out of band console 10Base T amp RS 232 RMON support QO OQ QQ n Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP management agent O Dot matrix display The supervisor module is responsible for address learning address cache management and spanning tree management 1 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Cajun P550 Switch Overview Layer 3 Supervisor Module The Layer 3 supervisor module features include O PowerPC 750 RISC processor O Memory 4 MB Flash 64 MB DRAM 128 KB NVRAM 512 KB cache with multiple memory configurations Table 1 1 Multiple Memory Configuration pimwsimm Number of Total Memory Modules 32 MB l 32 MB 32 MB 2 64 MB 64 MB 1 64 MB V3 0 or higher 64 MB 2 128 MB V3 0 or higher O Real time clock O Out of band console 10 100Base T amp RS 232 O RMON support O Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP management agent O Dot matrix display The supervisor module is responsible for address learning address cache management and spanning tree management In addition the Layer 3 supervisor module O Implements system management functions and management interfaces O Uses standard routing protocols and maintains routing table and caches O Provides 1 5 million packets per second of hardware based routing for packets that arrive on Layer 2 only media modules Supplies software based routing for packets that are not
19. 3 34 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 2 In Clock Options click Summer Time Hours Algorithm The Summer Time Hours Configuration box opens 3 From the Enable State pull down menu select Enable 4 In the Offset cell of the Value column enter the reset value for the clock in minutes For example if you intend to reset the clock forward or backward by one hour retain the default value of 60 minutes 5 Click Recurring Note The Web Agent enables you to select the boxes next to both Recurring and One time Summer Time Hours However the option to set both Recurring and One time hours is not provided 6 Use Table 3 19 for information about configuring Summer Time Hours Table 3 19 Recrring Summer Time Hours Configuration Parameter Definition Recurring Select if Summer Time Hours is defined by a rule such as Daylight Savings Time DST All Start and End fields associated with Recurring Summer Time Hours provide the default values for Daylight Savings Time When you select recurring Summer Time Hours you indicate the time in hours and minutes on a specified day week and month that Summer Time Hours begin and end Start Specifies the start of Summer Time Hours End Specifies the end of Summer Time Hours Week Select the week during which you want recurring Summer Time Hours to start or end The selected week should reflect the day on w
20. A lower number indicates a lower preference for the path RIP Routes Specify RIP to use the hop count as a metric Hence to specify a preference for a RIP route you need to enter a lower number path cost Low Preference Static Routes Specify a preference value for low level static routes 3 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Assigning IP Interfaces to the VLAN After you have set up a VLAN and enabled IP Routing create the IP interface that your VLAN and your subnet use to communicate with each other After creating the IP interface you assign it to the VLAN If you need to create a new VLAN refer to Creating and Implementing VLANs in Chapter 11 To create a new IP interface and assign it toa VLAN 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Interfaces The IP Interfaces dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE The Add IP Interface dialog box opens 3 In the Interface field enter the Interface name Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 4 Use Table 7 3 to complete the configuration of your IP interface Table 7 3 P Interfaces Parameter Allows you to Select Select the interface to configure State Shows the current running condition of the switch Options include UP The interface is active DOWN The interface is inactive Interface Enter an interfa
21. AppleTalk B 5 bridge MIBs B 2 DVMRP B 4 IEEE 802 3 MAU B 2 IEEE 802 3 statistics group B 2 IGMP B 3 IP access list B 5 IP forwarding routing table B 4 IP interface B 3 IP version 4 0 B 4 OSPF v2 0 B 3 policy capability MIB for LDAP B 5 private IPX interface MIBs B 1 Prominent B 1 RIP vl and v2 B 2 RMON B 2 SNMPv2 B 2 VRRP B 3 minimum adv interval IRDP parameters 7 47 minutes one time summer time hours configuration 3 38 summer time hours configuration 3 36 mirror port configuring a mirror port 17 6 port mirroring information parameters 17 7 RMON mirror port configuration parameters 17 7 switch port configuration parameters 3 16 mirror port configuration parameters max packets per second 17 8 mirror port name port mirroring information parameters 17 7 mode forwarding cache FE parameters 11 6 IPX SAP interface parameters 6 2 RIP interface parameters 8 2 spanning tree bridge level parameters 12 8 modem connecting 3 25 modem configuration string parameters amp DO 3 27 CD follows carrier 3 27 EO 3 27 SO 1 3 27 software flow control 3 27 modifying an IP helper address 7 52 modifying DVMRP interface information 7 19 modifying IGMP interfaces 7 17 modifying OSPF areas 9 4 modifying OSPF virtual links 9 7 module optional expansion 2 1 2 2 switch port parameters 3 14 module features 1 4 module status LED definition 16 1 modules amp ports 3 7 monitoring
22. Automatic VLAN Enable Causes the switch to learn new VLAN IDs that arrive Creation at the port and then bind the port to these VLANs Configuring Fast Start Mode Fast Start mode causes ports to begin forwarding traffic without waiting for the spanning tree negotiation to complete Examples of situations where you may want to set a port to Fast Start mode are O End station ports that do not need to participate in the full spanning tree negotiation O Loop free topologies that do not need spanning tree protocol to resolve redundant connections To enable Fast Start for ports on a module associated with a selected bridge 1 In the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Modules amp Ports The Module Information dialog box opens 2 In the Switch Ports column click on the switch port number listed for the selected module The Switch Ports dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 21 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 3 To set Fast Start mode on individual ports in the Name column click the port 5 name for the selected module The Switch Port Configuration dialog box opens Or To set Fast Start mode on all ports in a module click All Module Switch Port Configuration The Switch Port Configuration on All Ports dialog box opens From the Fast Start pull down menu select Enable to enable Fast Start mode on the selected module ports Click
23. Format Clear IEEE 802 1Q Multilayer 3Com Spanning Tree Models Spanning trees are an IEEE 802 1 standard which provides distributed routing over multiple LANs connected by bridges There are three spanning tree models O Single IEEE 802 1D spanning tree O Spanning tree per VLAN O Optimized per VLAN spanning trees using a scalable two layer spanning tree approach Note All models interoperate with legacy IEEE 802 1D bridges and switches Dual layer spanning trees provide two very important capabilities O Smaller spanning tree domains means much faster convergence during spanning tree reconfiguration O Per VLAN operation enables you to use more of the available bandwidth when you have redundant links A particular link can be blocked on one VLAN but still forward packets on another 1 12 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Cajun P550 Switch Overview Figure 1 8 Spanning Tree HASTA R STP Root X Blocked Path Single 802 1D Spanning Tree Multi layer Spanning Tree One Spanning Tree Backbone terminates 802 1D STP Longer convergence Smaller STP Domains One path to and from root for all VLANs Quicker Convergence Improper configuration VLAN Load Balancing can shut down Trunk Links Interoperates w existing Bri
24. IGMP Standard MIB RFC 1850 is supported Private MIB The private MIB cjnospf mib is supported Standard MIB The current draft of the Virtual Redundancy Router Protocol VRRP MIB is supported draft ietf vrrp mib 04 mib Private MIB The private cjniplrrp mib is supported Standard MIB The current draft of the Internet Group Membership Protocol IGMP MIB is supported draft ietf idmr igmp mib 07 mib Private MIB The private cjnigmp mib is supported IP Interface The private cjhnipifmgmt mib is supported Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Supported MIB Groups IP Version 4 0 and Services Standard MIB The following standard MIBs for Internet Protocol version 4 0 and services are supported e RFC 1213 mib e RFC 2011 mib e RFC 2012 mib e RFC 2013 mib Private MIB The following private MIBs are supported for Internet Protocol version 4 0 and services e cjnipv4 mib e cjnipv4serv mib IP Forwarding Route Table Standard MIB RFC 2096 mib is supported Private MIB The private cjnipfwd mib is supported DVMRP Standard MIB The current draft of the DVMRP MIB is supported draft thaler dvmrp mib 9 mib Private MIB The private cjndvmrp mib is supported B 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Supported MIB Groups AppleTalk Standard MIB RFC 1243 mib is supported Private MIB The private cjnatalk mib is supported IP Access List The private MIB that
25. IP address 7 25 source 7 25 IP routing table statistical parameters current number of routes 7 26 peak number of routes 7 26 RIP queries 7 26 RIP route changes 7 26 total routes added 7 26 total routes deleted 7 26 IP routing table statistics examining 7 26 IP source routing IP global configuration parameters 7 4 IP static ARP parameters interface 7 15 IP address 7 15 MAC address 7 15 IP static route creating static ARP entries 7 14 IP static route parameters cost 7 14 mask 7 14 network address 7 14 next hop address 7 14 next hop VLAN 7 14 preference 7 14 IP static routes creating 7 14 IP subnet intelligent multicast session search parameters 15 7 IPX B 1 creating static routes 4 6 creating static services 4 7 datagram structure 4 2 deleting static routes 4 7 deleting static service 4 8 examining the route table 4 11 examining the service table 4 13 global statistics 4 9 interface configuration 4 4 modifying IPX RIP filters 5 2 modifying static routes 4 7 modifying static services 4 9 network number 4 1 node number 4 1 RIP interfaces 5 1 routing table statistics 4 12 searching the route table 4 10 searching the service table 4 12 socket number 4 1 IPX datagram fields checksum 4 2 destination network 4 3 destination node 4 3 destination socket 4 3 packet length 4 2 packet type 4 3 source network 4 3 source node 4 3 source socket 4 3 transp
26. IPX SAP filter parameters direction 6 3 filter suppress 6 4 hops 6 4 interface 6 3 name 6 3 precedence 6 3 type 6 3 IPX SAP filters creating 6 2 filtering all services except NDS example 6 6 suppress advertising of print servers example 6 4 IPX SAP interface parameters aging interval multiplier 6 2 get nearest server reply 6 2 get nearest server reply delay 6 2 interface 6 1 mode 6 2 network number 6 1 periodic update interval 6 2 triggered updates 6 2 use interpacket gap 6 1 use max packet size 6 2 IPX SAP interface statistical parameters bad packets received 6 8 GNS requests received 6 8 GNS responses sent 6 8 interface 6 8 network number 6 8 non triggered updates sent 6 8 requests received 6 8 state 6 8 updates received 6 8 IPX SAp interface statistical parameters triggered updates sent 6 8 IPX SAP interface statistics interpreting 6 7 IPX SAP interfaces configuring 6 1 IPX SAP network filter parameters direction 6 6 filter suppress 6 6 hops 6 6 interface 6 5 net 6 5 precedence 6 5 type 6 5 IPX SAP network filters creating 6 5 IPX service table examining 4 13 searching 4 12 IPX service table parameter hops 4 14 interface 4 14 network 4 14 next hop MAC address 4 14 node 4 14 socket 4 14 source 4 14 TTL 4 14 type 4 14 IPX service table parameters name 4 14 IPX service table search parameter service name 4 13 service type 4 13 IPX service table search
27. OSPF Enable or disable OSPF The default value is Disable Multicast Protocol Specify the multicast protocol for the interface Options include e None e DVUMRP e IGMP Proxy ARP Enable or disable Proxy ARP The default value is Disable ICMP Redirect Enable or disable ICMP Redirect IDRP The default value is Enable NetBIOS UDP Enable or disable NetBIOS UDP Rebroadcasts The default Rebroadcast value is Disable VRRP Enable or disable Virtual Redundancy Router Protocol The default value is Disable 4 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 3 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Enabling IP Routing To enable IP routing for an IP interface 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Global Configuration The IP Global Configuration dialog box opens Note IP routing is disabled by default 2 Use Table 7 2 to configure your global configuration setup Table 7 2 1P Global Configuration Parameters Parameter Allows you to IP Unicast Enable or disable IP unicast on a global basis Forwarding IP Multicast Enable or disable IP multicast on a global basis This affects all IP RIP Forwarding interfaces set up to use multicast protocols IP Source Routing Enable or disable strict source routing and loose source routing globally VRRP Enable or disable VRRP gl
28. T option OSPF neighbors parameters 9 11 TOS LSA detail 9 16 TOS 0 metric LSA detail 9 16 TOS count LSA detail 9 16 total bucket utilization 14 3 total entries forwarding cache FE parameters 11 6 total number of entries address table instance parameters 14 2 total routes added IP routing table statistical parameters 7 26 total routes deleted IP routing table statistical parameters 7 26 total system power power system statistical parameters 3 40 trace protocol event log settings 16 5 traffic analysis 2 9 traffic flooding 17 6 traffic mirror port 17 7 transit delay OSPF interface parameters 9 4 OSPF virtual link parameters 9 6 translate 7 into 5 OSPF area parameters 9 3 transport control IPX datagram fields 4 2 trap event table actions 16 9 trap receiver configuring SNMP communities 3 24 SNMP communities parameters 3 23 triggered updates IPX SAP interface parameters 6 2 RIP global configuration parameters 8 2 triggered updates sent IPX RIP interface statistical parameters 5 6 IPX SAP interface statistical parameters 6 8 RIP statistical parameters 8 4 trunk mode 3Com SuperStack parameters 3 21 Bay Networks System 5000 parameters 3 21 36 Index Cisco Catalyst 5000 parameters 3 20 switch port configuration parameters 3 15 switch port parameter 3 13 TTL AppleTalk ARP cache table statistics 10 16 IPX route table parameter 4 11 IPX service table parameter 4 14 purge 8 2 TTL expired Apple
29. Well known service types include Unknown 0 e Print Queue 3 e File Server 4 Job Server 5 e Print Server 7 e Archive Server 9 Remote Bridge Server 24 e Advertising Print Server 47 Network Network number in hex of the IPX static service Node Node address in hex of the IPX static service The format of the node value is aa bb cc dd ee ff Socket Number in hex associated with a running process on the end node for example RIP NLSP Next Hop Node MAC address of the next destination through which the service is reached The format of the node value is aa bb cc dd ee ff Interface Interface that corresponds to the next hop node Hops Number of routers hops that the packet must pass through before reaching the network number associated with the service Deleting IPX Static Service To delete an IPX static service 1 From the IPX Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Static Services The IPX Static Services dialog box opens 2 Select the IPX static service to be removed 3 Click DELETE to remove the static service or CANCEL to restore previous settings 4 8 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 Modifying IPX Static Services To modify an IPX static service 1 From the IPX Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Static Services The IPX Static Services dialog box opens 2 Selec
30. entering FS_ENG will find all service names that start with FS_ENG Service Type Based on the service type you specify For example to specify a print queue type you would enter 3 0003h in the space provided 4 Click Search to start the search If available services are found they are displayed in IPX Service Table dialog box In services are not available a message displays in the IPX Service Table dialog box Examining the IPX Service Table To examine the IPX service table 1 Perform an IPX Service table search as described in Searching the IPX Service Table earlier in this chapter If available services are found they are displayed in the IPX Service Table dialog box Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 4 13 Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 2 Use Table 4 11 to review each field in the IPX Services table Table 4 11 PX Service Table Parameters Parameter Defines the Select Parameter selected Name Name of the service in question For example FS_ENGO1 Use SLIST NetWare 3 x or NLIST NetWare 4 x to list your current server names and types from your NetWare server Type Service type that identifies the type of service the server provides Well known service types include Unknown 0 e Print Queue 3 e File Server 4 Job Server 5 e Print Server 7 e Archive Server 9 Remote Bridge Server 24 e Advertising Print Serve
31. interface 8 4 IP address 8 4 non trigger updates sent 8 4 state 8 4 triggered updates sent 8 4 updates received 8 4 RIP statistics interpreting 8 4 RISC supervisor 1 14 2 9 RMON 2 9 configuring a mirro8 2 23 0 9 8 nt TJ F5 1 Tf8 88 0 0 8 88 13 04 113 68 Tm0 013 Tc 0 02 Tw 251 1 7 2226 TJ F fiur g Index 31 Rmioiati o paramete MES Layer 3 learned overview 1 8 Layer 3 not learned overview 1 8 Layer 3 overview 1 7 Layer 3 switching 3 31 routing configuration minimum requirements 3 31 routing overview 1 7 RTMP RDR Rx AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 RTMP RDR Tx AppleTalk global statistics 10 13 RTMP Rq Rx AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 RTMP Rq Tx AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 RTMP Rsp Rx AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 RTMP Rsp Tx AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 rule number Layer 3 route cache search parameters 11 5 running configuration copying 3 49 viewing 3 46 running txt 3 45 RX frame count T2 frame forwarding statistical parameters 11 4 RX LED behavior 16 1 S sample Ethernet interface statistical parameters 17 2 sampler type port mirroring information parameters 17 7 RMON mirror port configuration parameters 17 8 sampling 17 8 SAP IPX interface 4 6 SAP 4 4 save running configuration to startup configuration configuration file management 3 48 saving your current configuration 18 2 search base LDAP configuration parameters 7
32. neighbor querier timeout interval IGMP interface parameters 7 18 neighbor received probe from this router DVMRP neighbor routers 7 35 neighbor supports generation ID function DVMRP neighbor routers 7 35 neighbor supports MTRACE requests DVMRP neighbor routers 7 35 neighbor supports prune function DVMRP neighbor routers 7 35 net IPX SAP network filter parameters 6 5 Index 25 NetBIOS date service IP helper address parameters 7 51 NetBIOS name service IP helper address parameters 7 51 NetBIOS UDP rebroadcast add IP interface parameters 7 3 IP interface parameters 7 7 network IPX route table parameter 4 11 IPX service table parameter 4 14 IPX static route 4 6 IPX static service parameter 4 8 network address add IP interface parameters 7 2 DVMRP interface statistical parameters 7 33 IP interface parameters 7 6 IP static route parameters 7 14 IPX interface 4 5 IRDP parameters 7 46 OSPF summaries parameters 9 7 RIP interface parameters 8 2 network mask LSA detail 9 16 network number AppleTalk interface parameters 10 4 AppleTalk interface statistics 10 13 AppleTalk static route 10 6 IPX RIP interface statistical parameters 5 6 IPX routing table search parameters 4 11 IPX SAP interface parameters 6 1 IPX SAP interface statistical parameters 6 8 network range AppleTalk ARP cache table statistics 10 15 AppleTalk interface statistics 10 13 AppleTalk route table statistics 10 14 AppleTalk zone table sta
33. source subnetwork DVMRP downstream link parameters 7 41 DVMRP multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 40 IGMP local multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 31 upstream prune information 7 41 spanning tree 12 8 IEEE 802 1 option 12 7 multilayer option 12 7 non VLAN switch port parameters 3 19 path cost 12 11 per VLAN option 12 7 using for setup and monitoring 12 6 spanning tree bridge level parameters bridge forward delay 12 9 bridge hello time 12 8 bridge max age 12 8 forward delay 12 9 hello time 12 9 max age 12 9 mode 12 8 priority 12 8 spanning tree bridge port blocking state 12 10 disabled 12 10 down state 12 10 forwarding state 12 10 learning state 12 10 listening state 12 10 spanning tree bridge port information top change detection 12 11 spanning tree bridge port information parameters enable 12 10 path cost 12 11 priority 12 10 spanning tree bridge port parameters bridge port 12 9 designated bridge 12 10 designated cost 12 10 designated port 12 10 designated root 12 10 forward transitions 12 10 name 12 9 port 12 9 state 12 10 spanning tree bridge ports configuring 12 9 spanning tree mode switch port configuration parameters 3 15 spanning tree mode for a port 12 11 Index 33 spanning tree per VLAN 1 12 2 7 speed mode 10 100 port parameter 3 11 Fast Ethernet module 3 10 SPF hold time OSPF global configuration parameters 9 2 SPF runs OSPF statistical parame
34. you replace the primary controller If an element fails the redundant element takes over the function of the failed element until you replace the element The following sections explain how to O Install Redundant Hardware O Replace the Primary Controller O Replace an Element Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 41 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Installing Redundant Hardware By default the switch is configured without the redundant controller or element as shown in Figure 3 8 Figure 3 8 Default Hardware Configuration 0654 032 1 f Elements 3 1 Elements Primary 6 4 Controller To install the redundant modules and enable module redundancy 1 Shut down the switch WARNING Before replacing switch controllers or elements turn off the switch 2 Install the redundant controller in the slot to the left of the primary controller Slot 1 in Figure 3 8 Note Controllers and elements are equipped with keys to ensure that a controller cannot be inserted into an element slot and an element cannot be inserted into a controller slot 3 Install the redundant element in the slot to the left of the sixth element Slot 0 in Figure 3 8 4 Restart the switch and login 5 In the System Information section of the Web Agent window click Switch Fabric The Switch Fabric Status dialog box opens If the redundant controller and element installed properly settings disp
35. 1 hops IPX RIP filter parameters 5 3 IPX route table parameter 4 12 IPX SAP filter parameters 6 4 IPX SAP network filter parameters 6 6 IPX service table parameter 4 14 IPX static route 4 6 IPX static service parameter 4 8 hour one time summer time hours configuration 3 38 summer time hours configuration 3 36 HTML 1 15 2 9 hunt group adding ports 12 14 considerations 12 12 non VLAN switch port parameters 3 19 switch port configuration parameters 3 15 switch port parameter 3 13 hunt group configuration features members 12 13 redistribute 12 13 hunt group members viewing details 12 13 hunt groups aggregate bandwidth 12 11 before configuring 12 11 configuring 12 12 overview 1 10 overview P220 2 5 14 Index j ICMP in address mask reply IP routing global statistics 7 23 ICMP in address mask requests IP routing global statistics 7 23 ICMP in destination unreachable IP routing global statistics 7 23 ICMP in echo replys IP routing global statistics 7 23 ICMP in echo requests IP routing global statistics 7 23 ICMP in errors IP routing global statistics 7 23 ICMP in messages IP routing global statistics 7 23 ICMP in parameter problems IP routing global statistics 7 23 ICMP in redirects IP routing global statistics 7 23 ICMP in source quenches IP routing global statistics 7 23 ICMP in time exceeds IP routing global statistics 7 23 ICMP in timestamp replys IP routing global stati
36. 10 15 Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 Table 10 9 AppleTalk ARP Cache Table Statistical Parameters Continued Parameter Definition Node Displays the node number for the entry MAC Address Displays the MAC address associated with the AppleTalk ARP cache table entry of the node Interface Displays the Appletalk interface associated with the AppleTalk ARP cache table entry Type Displays the type of cache entries Values include e Local Broadcast e Dynamic e Router Neighbor TTL Displays the time to live value for the selected AppleTalk ARP cache table entry Local and Broadcast entries do not time out 3 Click Delete Entries to remove selected ARP cache table entries Or Click Flush Route Table to reset the ARP cache table entries Only Dynamic and Router Neighbor entries are flushed Viewing the AppleTalk Zone Table To view the AppleTalk zone table 1 In the AppleTalk Display section of the Web Agent window click Zone Table The AppleTalk Zone Table opens 2 Use Table 10 10 for more information on AppleTalk zone table parameters Table 10 10 AppleTalk Zone Table Parameters Parameter Definition Index Displays the zone index Name Displays the zone name Network Range Displays the network range associated with the zone 10 16 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 View AppleTalk Zone Table Statistics To vie
37. 11 E option 9 11 IP address 9 11 master 9 11 MC option 9 11 N option 9 12 OPQ option 9 12 router ID 9 11 state 9 11 T option 9 11 OSPF packet tracing enabling 16 4 OSPF state OSPF statistical parameters 9 9 OSPF statistical parameters area ID 9 9 AS border Rtrs 9 9 border Rtrs 9 9 external LSA count 9 9 LSA checksum sum 9 9 LSA chksum sum 9 9 LSAs 9 9 originate LSA count 9 9 OSPF state 9 9 OSPF version 9 9 receive new LSA count 9 9 router ID 9 9 SPF runs 9 9 OSPF statistics displaying 9 8 OSPF summaries deleting 9 8 OSPF summaries parameters advertisement 9 7 area 9 7 mask 9 7 network address 9 7 OSPF version OSPF statistical parameters 9 9 OSPF virtual link parameters area 9 6 authentication 9 6 authentication key 9 6 dead interval 9 6 hello interval 9 6 28 Index MD5 key ID 9 6 retransmit interval 9 6 router ID 9 6 transit delay 9 6 OSPF virtual links deleting 9 6 modifying 9 7 overflow drops buffer management table parameters 13 4 oversize packets Ethernet interface statistical parameters 17 4 overview intelligent multicasting 15 2 Layer 2 15 3 overview of Layer 2 routing 1 7 overview of Layer 2 traffic routing 1 8 overview of Layer 3 learned traffic routing 1 8 overview of Layer 3 not learned traffic routing 1 8 overview of Layer 3 routing 1 7 owner AppleTalk route table statistics 10 14 P packet length IPX datagram fields 4 2 pa
38. 15 3 Pruning Dynamic Sessions Client Ports and Router Ports 15 3 Configuring Global Intelligent Multicasting 0 0 0 eee ee eee 15 4 Displaying Router PONTS xi A Tae Vale A a a EO OSA CALERA 15 6 Configuring Static Router Ports 2 2 0 0 ec nee ene nee ee 15 6 Searching for Intelligent Multicast Sessions 2 0 00 cee eee eee 15 7 Deleting a Multicast Session Client Port 2 2 0 0 ee ene 15 8 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide x Creating a Static Multicast Session o oooooooorrr ee nee eee nn es 15 9 Deleting Static Multicast Sessions 20 0 eee eens 15 10 Creating Static Client Ports di fut Gate dk eed tae eld a ho ok a hw ela were ete wind ails 15 11 Deleting Static Client Ponts ias a ol eae ee bse eee A se eee eee 15 11 Configuring IGMP Snooping Layer 3 only 2 2 eee eee eee 15 11 Contisurmg the LGMPServer ia das Sila Rew os ele A ee ares Fe 15 12 Modifying the LGMP Server Display per VLAN 0 0 00 cece ore 15 14 Configuring Viewing an LGMP Client 2 0 eee tee 15 15 Modifying LGMP Clients Per VLAN 0 ee eee eee eee 15 17 Configuring Viewing CGMP Snooping o o 15 18 Chapter 16 Monitoring the Cajun Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 OVETVIEW srta da adden AO A ROA E AAA eae A 16 1 Interpreting Front Panel LED Displays o o oooooocccooorr ee eee 16 1 Checking Temperature Status and Configuring Threshol
39. 2 amp Layer 3 4 7 From the Fast Start pull down menu select to Enable or Disable When enabled Fast Start mode ports begin forwarding traffic without waiting for the spanning tree negotiation to complete Fast start eliminates the waiting time of listen and learn states Ports immediately enter the forward state From the Known Mode pull down menu select to Enable or Disable Selecting Enable suppresses the packets with unknown unicast destination addresses flooded to this port For example if a known end station or file server is connected to the port there s no need to flood unknown unicasts to that port You must manually enter a static MAC address for the station actually attached to the port From the 3Com Mapping Table pull down menu select an assignment to specify how incoming tagged frames from 3Com equipment are mapped to Lucent VLANs Refer to Creating 3Com Mapping Tables in Chapter 12 for more information on 3Com Mapping Tables Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Examples of Switch Ports Settings for Various VLAN Connection Types Use Table 3 11 through Table 3 13 for recommended switch port settings for each connection type Note Automatic VLAN Creation and VTP Snooping must not be enabled at the same time Table 3 11 Example 1 Trunk to Cisco Catalyst 5000 Parameter Recommended Setting Port VLAN Default causes untagged packets to be assigned
40. 2 9 replacing the primary controller 3 43 report messages received DVMRP global statistical parameters 7 32 report messages transmitted DVMRP global statistical parameters 7 32 reporting router DVMRP route table parameters 7 36 reporting router interface DVMRP route table parameters 7 36 requests received IPX RIP interface statistical parameters 5 6 IPX SAP interface statistical parameters 6 8 resetting the switch 18 4 resource event class parameters 16 8 retransmit interval OSPF interface parameters 9 5 OSPF virtual link parameters 9 6 RIP add IP interface parameters 7 3 creating trusted RIP neighbors 8 3 event class parameters 16 9 IP interface parameters 7 6 IPX interface 4 5 RIP 4 4 trusted neighbors 8 3 RIP ext type OSPF global configuration parameters 9 2 RIP global configuration 8 1 RIP global configuration parameters global RIP 8 1 purge TTL 8 2 triggered updates 8 2 update pkt delay 8 2 update timer 8 1 RIP interface parameters auth key 8 3 auth type 8 3 default route 8 3 interface 8 2 mode 8 2 network address 8 2 receive version 8 3 split horizon 8 3 version 8 2 RIP interfaces configuring 8 2 RIP packet tracing enabling 16 4 RIP queries IP routing table statistical parameters 7 26 RIP route changes IP routing table statistical parameters 7 26 RIP routes IP global configuration parameters 7 5 RIP statistical parameters bad packets received 8 4 bad routes received 8 4
41. 7 31 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Displaying DVMRP Global Statistics To display the DVMRP global statistics 1 In the DVMRP Display section of the Web Agent window click Global Statistics The DVMRP Global Statistics dialog box opens 2 Click REFRESH to view the latest statistics Or Click CLEAR to reset all statistics to zero 3 Use Table 7 19 to review the DVMRP global statistics Table 7 19 DVMRP Global Statistical Parameters Statistic Defines the number of Probe Messages Received Probe messages received on this switch DVMRP routers exchange probes and routing updates so they each have a picture of their neighbors capabilities and the DVMRP network topology Report Messages Report messages received on this switch Received Prune Messages Received Prune messages received on this switch This indicates the number of old branches removed from the multicast distribution tree Graft Messages Received Graft messages received This indicates the number of attempts at adding a new branch to the multicast distribution tree Graft Acknowledgments Graft acknowledgments received Received Unknown Message Codes Encountered Messages received that are not graft report or probe messages Probe Messages Probe messages transmitted to the network Transmitted Report Messages Report messages transmitted on this switch Transmitted Prune Messages Prune messages tran
42. Cisco VTP switch provided both the Domain Name is Null and the VTP Snooping State is enabled on the Cajun switch Configuration Revision Number Displays the VTP snooping configuration revision number associated with the last successful VTP configuration update on the Cajun switch Updater Identity Displays the IP address of the Cisco switch that initiated the configuration update Update Timestamp Displays the date and time that the Cisco switch initiated the configuration update 9 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Configuring Non VLAN Switch Port Parameters To configure Non VLAN switch port parameters 1 In the Switch Port Configuration dialog box from the Allow Learning pull down menu select Disable to stop the port s learning of new addresses This feature can be useful for security Selecting Enable allows the port to learn new addresses For example you can set this parameter to Disable then add a static MAC address entry for this port 2 From the Hunt Group pull down menu select a hunt group for which this port will be a member Refer to Using Hunt Groups to Aggregate Bandwidth between Switches in Chapter 12 for more information on hunt groups 3 From the Spanning Tree pull down menu select to Enable or Disable spanning tree protocol on this port Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer
43. Config File Management 2 Click Save to save your running configuration as your startup configuration Or In priv mode in the CLI enter copy running config startup config Copying Files Using the Configuration File Management dialog box you can copy files to and from multiple locations For example if you modify your running configuration and you want to reinstate your startup configuration parameters you can copy your startup configuration to your running configuration in volatile RAM Also you can upload configuration and other ASCH files from the switch to a TFTP server Likewise you can download files by copying files from a TFTP server directory to the switch or to a startup or running configuration file To copy files 1 In the CLI Configuration section of the Web Agent click Config File Management The Configuration File Management dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 47 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 2 Use Table 3 22 for information about copying a source file to a TFIP server destination Table 3 22 Configuration File Management Parameters Parameter Save Running Config to Startup Config Description Saves the running configuration to the startup configuration Options N A Copy Source Specifies the source file to be copied e Unspecified Specifies an initialized value e File Specifies a source file located on the switc
44. Continued from sending more packets if the receiving port s buffers are full This helps prevent lost or dropped packets This feature is recommended for use primarily on end station connections Using this feature on trunk ports can cause unnecessary congestion on the network Port PACE Priority Determines if the port detects 3Com s copyrighted PACE format as packets pass through the port PACE allows a packet s priority higher priority packets move through the switch faster to be set at the adapter Remote Fault Proprietary mechanism to detect remote link errors on Cajun Detect gigabit ports The default value is Disabled The remote fault detection functionality should be enabled on both ends of a Cajun to Cajun link in two cases e When two Cajun gigabit ports are connected that do not support auto negotiation e When a Cajun gigabit port that does not support auto negotiation is connected to a Cajun gigabit port that does support auto negotiation Configuring Physical Port Parameters on Fast Ethernet Ports To configure ports on a Fast Ethernet module 1 2 In the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window select Modules amp Ports The Module Information dialog box opens In the Ports column click the number for the module you want to configure for example 12 for 100Base TX The Physical Port Configuration dialog box opens Click the Enable check box to enable a port or if
45. Creating an AppleTalk NBP Filter earlier in this section for more information DELETE to remove the selected NBP filter CANCEL to restore previous settings Edit If to add or delete this NBP filter to from an interface The Add Delete Interface to NBP Filter dialog box opens See Adding or Deleting Interfaces to NBP Filter later in this section for more information Adding or Deleting Interfaces to NBP Filter To add or delete interfaces to an NBP filter 1 In the AppleTalk Configuration section of the Web Agent window click NBP Filter The AppleTalk NBP Filter dialog box opens Click Edit If The Add Delete Interface to NBP Filter dialog box opens In the Add pull down menu select the interface to be added Or Click the Select for the interface to be removed Click Add to add this NBP filter to the selected interface DELETE to remove this NBP filter from the selected interface CANCEL to restore previous settings Creating an AppleTalk Zone Filter To create an AppleTalk zone filter 1 2 In the AppleTalk Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Zone Filter The AppleTalk Zone Filter dialog box opens Click CREATE The Add AppleTalk Zone Filter dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 10 9 Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 3 Use Table 10 4 to configure your zone filter Table 10 4 AppleTalk ZoneFilter Parameters Parameter Defini
46. Disabled Proxy Mode Select to enable or disable Proxy mode Proxy mode allows the server to send LGMP router report and leave messages on behalf of neighbor routers on the same VLAN Server ID Priority The priority of the LGMP server on this switch The server ID priority and the IP address associated with the VLAN determine whether the LGMP server wins LGMP distribution election The lower the number the more likely it will win the election The valid range is 0 to 255 The default value is 128 Router Report Time The time interval in seconds between router reports sent by the LGMP server in distributor state The valid range is 10 to 10 000 The default value is 125 seconds Robustness Variable The scalar value used by non distributor LGMP servers when timing out the LGMP server in the distributor state The valid range is 2 to 10 The default value is 2 LGMP Servers Displays the number of LGMP servers and opens the LGMP Server Display per VLAN dialog box Note Only VLANs that have an active IGMP interface can be LGMP servers LGMP Message Router Report Displays the number of LGMP router Reception Statistics report messages received e Invalid Displays the number of LGMP messages received with an invalid payload Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 15 13 Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 15 9 LGMP Server Configuration Parameters Continued LGMP
47. ICMP In Echo Replies Number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received ICMP In Timestamp Requests Number of ICMP Timestamp request messages received ICMP In Timestamp Replies Number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received ICMP In Address Mask Requests Number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received ICMP In Address Mask Replies Number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received ICMP Out Messages Total number of ICMP messages that this entity attempted to send Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors ICMP Out Errors Number of ICMP messages that this entity did not send due to problems discovered within ICMPd such as a lack of buffers This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram In some implementations there may be no types of error which contribute to this counter s value Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 23 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Table 7 11 P Routing Global Statistics Continued Statistic Defines the ICMP Out Destination Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent Unreachables ICMP Out Time Exceeds Number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent ICMP Out Parameter Problems Number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent ICMP Out Source Quenchs Number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent ICMP Out
48. IP subnet mask associated with the interface State Current status of the interface Possible status indications include e UP The interface is active DOWN The interface is inactive Type Type of interface configured Possible values include Broadcast All traffic is forwarded through the routers This is not a tunnel and does not require encapsulation IPIP Tunnel All multicast traffic data and protocol messages on this interface is encapsulated in IP unicast packets with the protocol set to IPIP IP in IP e Non Encapsulated Tunnel All multicast data traffic on this interface is IPIP encapsulated but the protocol messages are simple unicast Metric Interface cost IGMP Querier on Router is the IGMP querier The purpose of the IGMP querier is Interface to periodically poll hosts on your network to trigger group membership reports Next Probe Message in Time in seconds remaining until the next probe message is sec sent Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 33 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Table 7 20 DVMRP Interface Statistical Parameters Continued Parameter Defines the Unrecognized Packets Number of unknown DVMRP messages Received Invalid Routes Received Number of invalid routes received on this interface Neighbor DVMRP Number of neighbor routers that are also running DVMRP Router s Note This number is a hypertext link that provides additional infor
49. It has the function of defining a summarization point for Link State Advertisements SPF Runs Number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated using this area s link state database Border Rtrs Total number of area border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass AS Border Rtrs Total number of Autonomous System border routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF Pass LSAs Total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding AS External LSAs LSA Chksum Sum per area not globally 32 bit unsigned sum of the LS checksums of the external link state advertisements contained in the link state database This sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers 3 Click Refresh to reset the counters with the latest information Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 9 9 Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 Displaying OSPF Links The OSPF link display provides information on the currently active OSPF links To display OSPF links 1 In the OSPF Display section of the Web Agent window click Links The OSPF Links dialog box opens 2 Use Table 9 7 review the OSPF link parameters Displaying OSPF Neighbors The OSPF neighbors table summarizes the list of cur
50. Layer 3 cache configuration 11 2 aging interval multiplier IPX SAP interface parameters 6 2 alarms log size setting 16 7 system events activating 16 7 alarms event log definition 16 8 alarms shutdown log definition 16 8 all module ports configuration 3 12 all ports configuration gigabit ports 3 8 allow learning non VLAN switch port parameters 3 19 switch port configuration parameters 3 15 always be group membership querier IGMP interface parameters 7 17 AppleTalk creating an NBP filter 10 8 ethernet versions supported 10 1 event class parameters 16 9 AppleTalk ARP cache table viewing 10 15 AppleTalk ARP cache table statistics interface 10 16 MAC address 10 16 network range 10 15 node 10 16 TTL 10 16 type 10 16 AppleTalk global routing enabling 10 2 AppleTalk global statistics AARP invalid PDU 10 12 AARP reply rx 10 12 AARP reply tx 10 12 AARP req rx 10 12 AARP req tx 10 12 Bcast error 10 12 checksum error 10 12 config addr error 10 12 config zone error 10 12 DDP forward counter 10 12 DDP input counter 10 12 DDP local counter 10 12 DDP output counter 10 12 DDP output long 10 12 DDP output short 10 12 echo reply rx 10 12 echo req rx 10 12 echo req tx 10 12 no client 10 12 no route 10 12 RTMP RDR Rx 10 12 RTMP RDR Tx 10 13 RTMP Rq Rx 10 12 RTMP Rq Tx 10 12 RTMP Rsp Rx 10 12 RTMP Rsp Tx 10 12 short PDU in error 10 12 too long 10 12 too short 10 12 TTL expired
51. Links e Summary Network e Summary AS Border AS External e Multicast Group NSSA External LSID Displays the link state ID The link state ID is an LS type specific field containing either a router ID or an IP address that identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement Router ID Displays the router ID of the originator of the link state advertisement Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 9 15 Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 Table 9 11 LSA Detail Parameters Continued Parameter Definition Sequence Displays the link state sequence number The sequence number is a 32 bit signed integer Checksum Displays the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement except the age field Age Displays the time in seconds of the LSA Link ID Displays the neighboring router s interface ID Link Data Displays the interface ID of the associated router interface Type Displays the link type of Router Network LSAs Types include e Point to point Link 1 Transit Network 2 Stub Network 3 e Virtual Link 4 TOS Count Displays the type of service count TOS O Metric Displays the type of service cost of the interface Network Mask Displays the network mask for the LSA External Displays whether the route is connected to an external network This parameter is associated with AS External LSAs TOS Displays the type of s
52. Note Sampling only applies to inbound traffic Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 18 crac Downloading New Operational Code to the Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures are common to both Layer 2 and Layer 3 configuration Included in this chapter Upgrading from a Previous Version Q Downloading the Image Q Selecting the Image for Reboot Q Resetting the Switch Upgrading from a Previous Version Version 4 0 of the Cajun P550 switch handles configuration files differently from version 3 0 and 3 1 In version 4 0 all configuration information is contained in a startup txt file that is stored in NVRAM on the switch Previous versions used cfg files that contained information about multiple types of configuration data In many cases when you upgrade the embedded software of the switch from version 3 0 or 3 1 to version 4 0 the earlier version of the software is located in the APP1 memory location on the switch and you install the version 4 0 software image into APP2 If you want to retain version 3 0 or 3 1 on the switch for a potential downgrade before you decide where to install the version 4 0 software image find out which APP you booted from then load the new image into the other APP For example if you boot version 3 0 or 3 1 from APP1 download version 4 0 into APP2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 18 1 Downloading New Operational Code to the Swi
53. Port disabled with link up Flashing yellow Hardware failure Off No link Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 16 1 Monitoring the Cajun Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 16 1 FrontPanel LED Display Interpretation Continued Module LED Behavior Indicates HD FD Solid green Full duplex operation negotiated Flashing yellow Hardware failure Off No link 10 100 Port Solid green with Port enabled and sending and receiving traffic Traffic Modules yellow flash indicated by yellow flashes Flashing green Port disabled with link up Flashing yellow Hardware failure Off No link Checking Temperature Status and Configuring Thresholds To view the temperature system 1 In the System Information section of the Web Agent window click Temperature The Temperature System dialog box opens Figure 16 1 Example Temperature System Dialog Boxes Layer 2 Supervisor Layer 3 Supervisor P550 P550R Temperature System Temperature System Slot 1 Backplane CPU Sensor Sensor Sensor High Warning ls 0 o9 Temperature e Probe 1 Probe 2 High Shutdown Temperature 50 oc 50 oc Upper Warming Temperature la5 oc la5 oC Upper Warning Temperature Current Temperature 27 C 37 C Lower Warning Temperature b ee Current Temperature Lower Warning Temperature Low Shutdown Temperature 0 on DEFAULTS AP
54. Redirects Number of ICMP Redirect messages sent For a host this object will always be zero since hosts do not send redirects ICMP Out Echo Requests Number of ICMP Echo request messages sent ICMP Out Echo Replies Number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent ICMP Out Timestamp Requests Number of ICMP Timestamp request messages sent ICMP Out Timestamp Replies Number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent ICMP Out Address Mask Requests Number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent ICMP Out Address Mask Replies Number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent UDP In Datagrams Total number of UDP datagrams delivered to User Datagram Protocol UDP users UDP In No Ports Total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port UDP In Errors Number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port UDP Out Datagrams Total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity IP Multicast Forward Datagrams Number of input multicast datagrams for which this entity was not their final IP destination as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination IP Multicast In Discard Number of input IP multicast datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing but were discarded
55. System The Cooling System dialog box opens 2 Ensure that all the individual components are operational by checking the status column for each component 3 Ifa component s status is non operational power down the switch and contact a service representative to diagnose the failing unit 3 40 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Configuring Redundant Hardware In both Layer 2 and Layer 3 models the Cajun P550 switch provides a redundant backplane to ensure that if a controller or an element fails the switch will continue to route data properly The redundant components are available as separate options When the redundant controller and element are installed the backplane consists of the following parts One main controller Q One redundant controller Q Six switch elements Q One redundant element Figure 3 7 Layout of Redundant Backplane 065410321 Redundant Elements Element 3 1 Elements 6 4 Primary Controller Redundant Controller The Cajun P550 switch is equipped with diagnostics to monitor the status of switch controllers and elements When an element fails diagnostics run automatically and test the hardware In the Web Agent information about a failed controller or element displays in the Switch Fabric Status dialog box If the primary controller fails the redundant controller takes over switch operation until
56. Table To search the IPX routing table 1 In the IPX Display section of the Web Agent window click Route Table Search The IPX Route Table Search dialog box opens 2 Select the Search Criteria you want to use to find information on specific routes For example if you want to find all static routes that are presently configured on your switch search by source and specify static as your search value 4 10 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 3 Use Table 4 7 to determine the search parameters Table 4 7 PX Routing Table Search Parameters Parameter Allows you to perform a search Source In your IPX routing table use one of the following parameters e RIP RIP routing updates e Static User configuration e Local Directly connected routes Once you select one of these parameters the search attempts to find routes associated with the parameter you chose Interface Based on the interface associated with the next hop to the IPX network Network Number Based on an IPX Network address hexadecimal number you specify 4 Click Search to start the search If available routes are found they are displayed in the IPX Route Table dialog box If no routes are available a message is displayed in the IPX Route Table dialog box Examining the IPX Route Table To examine your IPX route table 1 Perform an IPX Route Table search as described in Searching the IPX
57. Table Parameters Parameter Defines the Index Index number of this address entry in the switch address forwarding table MAC MAC address associated with this entry This address is learned by the Address switch as an address to forward to the associated port Port Port associated with this MAC address table entry Use this setting to display the entries associated with that port Options include e Forward Forwards the entry e Filter Filters the entry e Cpu Stores the entry Valid Whether the port binding is valid This helps the re learn performance Group Group number associated with this MAC address Tblinst Address table instance number associated with this MAC address Priority Priority level associated with traffic forwarded to this MAC address The options are Normal High You can set this parameter on all learned entries Persistence The persistence of the entry in the table can be set on all learned entries e Permanent The address is not aged out of the table e Invalid This entry is cleared from the table each time the switch resets e Ageout Address is cleared from the address forwarding table when the timeout interval expires This is the state of all entries dynamically learned by the switch It ensures that MAC addresses that are not active on the network do not remain in the switch address forwarding table indefinitely Status The status of the address entry
58. Table to clear the entire table e Click REFRESH to receive the most up to date information on the entries in the table 3 Use Table 7 23 to review the DVMRP route table parameters Table 7 23 DVMRP Route Table Parameters Parameter Defines the Source Network Network from which a multicast flow may originate Source Network Mask Source network mask Reporting Router IP address of the router reporting this route to its neighbors Reporting Router IP interface configured which leads to th0 01 u13 ip 17 r 11 t 4r 11 e 1 a 2 4m Interface 7 36 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Table 7 23 DVMRP Route Table Parameters Continued Parameter Defines the Upstream Router s IP address of the DVMRP router that is the upstream neighbor to the local router The local DVMRP router must know which DVMRP router is its upstream neighbor to determine how packets from a given source will be transmitted to a given multicast group Opens DVMRP Upstream Router s dialog box Designated Forwarder s Network router s responsible for forwarding from the source network onto the upstream interface Opens the Designated Forwarders dialog box Downstream Dependent Number of downstream DVMRP routers that are dependent on Router s this router for this particular route Opens the DVMRP Downstream Dependent Router s dialog box Displaying the DVMRP Upstream Routers To view the D
59. VLAN name Rule Number Within the routing cache that matches the specified rule number associated with an access list PRE That match the PRE that is associated with the fabric port ID Displaying the Forwarding Cache To display the forwarding cache information 1 In the L3 Forwarding Cache section of the Web Agent window click Forwarding Cache The FE Cache dialog box opens 2 To modify your FE Cache table perform one of the following e To delete one or more entries select the entry and click Flush Entry e To flush clear the entire table click Flush Table e To refresh the contents of the table click REFRESH Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 11 5 Monitoring and Configuring the Forwarding Cache Layer 3 e To clear the statistics only but still leave the entry in the table click Clear 3 Use Figure 11 5 to review the FE Cache fields Table 11 5 FE Cache Parameters Parameter Defines PRE The Packet Routing Engine in question Type The type of packet for example IP unicast IP multicast Mode The table mode which includes e DA Only SA amp DA SA only The table mode indicates what values are used in a comparison to determine whether or not a packet is forwarded Memory Use in Bytes Memory used by each entry Total Entries The number of cumulative entries since the last time the statistics were cleared Current Entries The number of acti
60. Viewing Your Running Configuration 0 0 0 0c eee eee 3 46 Viewing Your Startup Configuration 20 0 ee eee ne 3 46 Viewing Your Script Execution Log File 2 0 0 0 ee eee 3 46 Copying Configuration Ele A heh ee dee ee tee ae 3 46 Copying Running Configuration to Startup Configuration 3 47 Copying Biles las taa A aad wate eee ala del ale a hee aS 3 47 Viewing the Status of a TFTP Transfer 0 0 0 ccc eee 3 50 Chapter 4 Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 OVEIVIEW sara A ise Mle saan ade BLS A AAA as Sade Ache sas 4 IPX OV ELVICW e ic ir Week sewer reson top GP Sse oe oy Gy desta a ita 4 1 IPX Datagram Structure ei A AI A AA a bd 4 2 Configuring the Cajun Switch as an IPX Router 0 conocer 4 3 Gonfiguring IPX INterlaces steed hee eke A A 4 4 Creating IPX Static ROULES Vota Hed a eg Riven aoe deh daca ged de ash gp alae ae ah at 4 6 Deleting IPX Static ROUTES curra SR Pa ewe eee aaa ob Malate ew bee aes 4 7 Modifying IPX Static Routes rra arenan ooo 4 7 Creating IPX Static Services pia a hae ae Ee ee ed Ae a E EEEE 4 7 Deleting IPX Static Service 2 0 enn eee eee eee 4 8 Modifying IPX Static Services o o oo eee eee ns 4 9 Monitoring Switch Performance Using IPX 0 eee eee eee 4 9 Examining IPX Global Statistics acir i iine uie i n neta 4 9 Searching the IPX Rotute Tabled 2 mi a A N ee RE EN 4 10 Examining the IPX Route Table
61. Western hemisphere Hour Enter a value to represent the hour when Summer Time Hours start or end for Recurring settings For Recurring Summer Time Hours the default value is 02 meaning 2 00 a m for both Start and End hours Minutes Enter a value to represent the number of minutes into the hour when Summer Time Hours start or end for Recurring Summer Time Hours The default value is 00 for both Start and End minutes 7 To set Summer Time Hours that recur annually according to a rule C Select Recurring Select values for the Week Day and Month when Summer Time Hours start and end Enter values for the Hour and Minutes when Summer Time Hours start and end 8 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings 3 36 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Setting One Time Summer Time Hours To set Summer Time Hours that are not based on a standard rule 1 5 In the System Information section of the Web Agent window click System Clock The System Clock dialog box opens In Clock Options click Summer Time Hours Algorithm The Summer Time Hours Configuration box opens From the Enable State pull down menu select Enable In the Offset cell of the Value column enter the reset value for the clock in minutes For example if you intend to reset the clock forward or backward by one hour retain the default value of
62. a LAA is Be SE a B 4 IP Forwarding Route Table o ooo B 4 Standard MIB A EA cias B 4 Private MIB dai A AAA a tok a AS a ie B 4 DVMRPE idas LE Atte E IEA aad ote fs B 4 Standard MIB il sata a daba Dil iii eles los B 4 Piivate MIB a a a A Beate aia ici B 4 AppleTalk a A e to dc Ab B 5 Standard MIBS rt DO EA A A E B 5 Private MIB ii A A td bc B 5 TRYACCESS Titicaca a a a ga dele ow Tala a a B 5 Policy Capability MIB for LDAP 0 0 o ooooooooorr nee nee B 5 Index Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide xii Preface This guide explains how to configure and operate the Lucent P550 P550R P220G and P220FE Cajun switches The P220 Cajun switch family contains Layer 2 functionality only while the P550 contains both Layer 2 and Layer 3 functionality Therefore all references to Layer 2 functionality apply to both the P220 Cajun switch family as well as the P550 Layer 2 switches This guide also includes information on downloading new operational code to your switch For detailed information on the command line interface refer to Cajun P550 P220 Command Line Interface Reference Guide Documentation Feedback If you have comments about the technical accuracy or general quality of this document please contact us at techpubs lucent com Please cite the document title part number and page reference if appropriate Online Documentation Lucent Technologies maintains copies of all technical documentation on the corp
63. address of the switch for which you enable SNTP 5 Click Apply SNTP is enabled for the switch Setting Summer Time Hours Summer Time Hours also referred to as Daylight Savings Time DST is the strategy of moving clocks ahead to provide greater amounts of daylight in the afternoon and to standardize time with other parts of the world In many parts of the world the Summer Time Hours algorithm is based on a standardized rule For example in the Western hemisphere the rule used by most locations in Canada Mexico and the United States is to set clocks forward by one hour at 2 00 a m on the first Sunday in April and back an hour at 2 00 a m on the first Sunday in October annually Many countries in Europe and Asia follow similar rules The offset or amount of time by which the clock is set forward or backward varies from country to country Many parts of the world follow a one time change of Summer Time Hours When you configure the switch for these locations you reset the clock by specifying a scheduled time and date Note If you upgrade the Cajun P550 or P220 switch from a previous version your local time settings are saved as Greenwich Mean Time values Ensure that you change the Summer Time Hours Algorithm before you set the clock Setting Recurring Summer Time Hours To set recurring Summer Time Hours 1 In the System Information section of the Web Agent window click System Clock The System Clock dialog box opens
64. and received on a given interface Options include e Disable Type 20 packets are neither sent nor received Inbound Type 20 packets are received e Outbound Type 20 packets are sent e Both Type 20 packets are sent and received 5 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Creating IPX Static Routes To create IPX static routes 1 From the IPX Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Static Routes The IPX Static Routes dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE The Add IPX Static Route dialog box opens 3 Use Table 4 4 to complete your configuration Table 4 4 PX Static Route Parameters Parameter Allows you to specify the Network Number of the IPX network in hex you want to assign to the IPX static route Next Hop Node MAC address of the next destination to which the packet is routed Format of the value to enter is aa bb cc dd ee ff Interface IPX Interface associated with the next hop Ticks Amount of time in ticks that the packet takes to reach the network number you specified A tick is approximately 1 18th of a second Hops Number of routers hops that the packet must pass through before reaching the network number associated with the IPX network 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings 4 6 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 Deleting IPX Sta
65. architecture scales to meet your needs The P220G crossbar supports O Nine fabric ports running at full line rate 1 76 Gbps in and out on each fabric port 31 68 Gbps total capacity Under subscribed switching fabric 000 0 Y Single copy replication When possible input frames destined for output on multiple switch ports pass through the crossbar only once and are copied by the crossbar to each destination O Hardware assisted multicast pruning The switch forwards only to appropriate destination switch ports The P220FE crossbar supports O Five fabric ports running at full line rate O 1 76 Gbps in and out on each fabric port Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 2 3 Overview of the P220 Gigabit Switch Family 17 6 Gbps total capacity Single copy replication When possible input frames destined for output on multiple switch ports pass through the crossbar only once and are copied by the crossbar to each destination Hardware assisted multicast pruning The switch forwards only to appropriate destination switch ports Virtual Bridging Functions The switch design supports O Over 24 000 Media Access Control MAC addresses in the switch address forwarding table This feature allows the switch to store forwarding information for hosts in very large networks Segmented address tables qualified by address and Virtual LAN VLAN membership This feature allows the same host to appear on diff
66. because they timed out waiting for Stale Drops service using the age timer value In the high priority queue this can help determine how efficiently the switch is processing better never than late traffic Excessive stale drops on the high priority queue may indicate the need to increase the service ratio on the high priority queue Congestion Drops Number of packets dropped because the switch controller has sensed congestion at the outbound port 6 To manage your Physical Port buffers repeat Steps 1 4 to tune Physical Port Fast Ethernet buffers Physical Port ports have additional buffers on both the input and output ports 7 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings 13 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Managing Address Forwarding Tables Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures are common to both Layer 2 and Layer 3 configuration Included in this chapter O Configuring the Address Forwarding Table O Searching the Switch Address Forwarding Table O Adding Entries to the Address Forwarding Table Manually Configuring the Address Forwarding Table You can configure the following parameters when using the address forwarding table O Address A ge Time defines the length of time addresses remain active in the address forwarding table O Super Age Time defines how long inactive addresses are stored in the address forwarding tab
67. cache information IGMP only interfaces 1 In the IGMP Display section of the Web Agent window click Local Multicast Forwarding Cache The Local Multicast Forwarding Cache dialog box opens 2 To modify your Local Multicast Forwarding Cache perform one of the following e Select the entry and click Delete Entry to delete one or more entries e Click Flush Table to clear the entire table e Click REFRESH to receive the most up to date information on the entries in the table 3 Use Table 7 18 to review the IGMP Multicast Forwarding Cache information Table 7 18 IGMP Local Multicast Forwarding Cache Parameters Parameters Defines the Destination Group Destination group address of the multicast transmission Address Source SubNetwork Subnet on which the IGMP interface s exist Source Address Mask Subnet mask associated with the IGMP source subnetwork Upstream Interface IP interface configured on the upstream interface Invalid Flows From Number of invalid flows received from the upstream neighbor Upstream Packets Forwarded Number of packets successfully forwarded in the CPU Through Cache Entry supervisor module Downstream Interface s Number of downstream interfaces and provides a link to the IGMP Downstream Interfaces dialog box Upstream Source s Number of upstream interfaces and provides a link to the IGMP Upstream Interfaces dialog box Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide
68. configuration parameters 7 44 authentication OSPF interface parameters 9 5 OSPF virtual link parameters 9 6 authentication failure event class parameters 16 8 authentication key OSPF virtual link parameters 9 6 auto increment address table instance hash table parameter 14 3 auto increment HT size VLAN configuration parameters 12 4 auto negotiation speed duplex advertisement 10 100 port 3 11 auto creation of virtual links OSPF global configuration parameters 9 2 automatic client pruning automatic client pruning 15 5 automatic router pruning automatic router pruning 15 5 automatic session pruning automatic session pruning 15 5 automatic VLAN creation 3 17 12 2 3Com SuperStack parameters 3 21 Bay Networks System 5000 parameters 3 21 Cisco Catalyst 5000 parameters 3 20 switch port configuration parameters 3 15 auto negotiation Fast Ethernet module 3 10 auto negotiation mode 10 100 port parameter 3 11 B bad advertisements received VRRP statistical parameters 7 45 bad packets received IPX RIP interface statistical parameters 5 6 IPX SAP interface statistical parameters 6 8 RIP statistical parameters 8 4 bad routes received RIP statistical parameters 8 4 baud rate console serial port settings 3 25 Bay Networks System 5000 parameters automatic VLAN creation 3 21 port VLAN 3 21 trunk mode 3 21 VLAN bindings 3 21 Bcast error AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 BDR address OS
69. control 3 25 PPP console static route configuring 3 30 PPP serial port console 3 29 regaining access to the CLI 3 27 PRE forwarding cache FE parameters 11 6 Layer 3 route cache search parameters 11 5 precedence IPX RIP filter parameters 5 3 IPX SAP filter parameters 6 3 IPX SAP network filter parameters 6 5 preference IP static route parameters 7 14 preferences IRDP parameters 7 46 primary controller replacing 3 43 primary server IP address LDAP configuration parameters 7 49 primary server port LDAP configuration parameters 7 49 priority address forwarding table parameters 14 5 spanning tree bridge level parameters 12 8 spanning tree bridge port information parameters 12 10 VRRP configuration parameters 7 44 Index 29 priority queuing definition 1 4 priority threshold buffer management table parameters 13 4 probe message received DVMRP global statistical parameters 7 32 probe messages transmitted DVMRP global statistical parameters 7 32 process leave packets IGMP interface parameters 7 17 producer signal LDAP statistics 7 50 Prominent MIBs B 1 protocol Layer 3 route cache search parameters 11 5 protocol event log configuring 16 4 protocol event log settings debug 16 5 error 16 5 fault 16 5 info 16 5 trace 16 5 warning 16 5 protocol ID IP access list parameters 7 10 proxy ARP add IP interface parameters 7 3 IP global configuration parameters 7 4 IP interface par
70. download lt APPname gt lt IP address gt lt file name gt where lt APPname gt is the location in flash memory on the switch where you will download the new image lt IP address gt is the IP address of the server from which you download the new image lt file name gt is the name of the file that contains the new image Enter one of the following file names e m2200 v4 0 0 bin to download version 4 0 for the Cajun P220 switch Layer 2 m5500 v4 0 0 bin to download version 4 0 for the Cajun P550 switch Layer 2 e m5500r v4 0 0 bin to download version 4 0 for the Cajun P550R switch Layer 3 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 18 3 Downloading New Operational Code to the Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Selecting the Image for Reboot To view and power up the downloaded image from the Web Agent 1 In the Memory Subsystems section click FEPROM Contents The FEPROM dialog box opens 2 In the Power Up Reset Image pull down menu select the APP location into which you downloaded version 4 0 and click APPLY To set the location from which you download the software through the command line enter the following command at the system prompt on version 3 0 or 3 1 fep set lt APPname gt where lt APPname gt is the APP location in flash memory on the switch that contains the new image Resetting the Switch To reset the switch through the Web Agent after downloading version 4 0 1 In the System In
71. entering this port Clear No VLAN tag This is the default setting IEEE 802 1Q The IEEE 802 1Q Ethernet VLAN tagging scheme Multi layer A widely available proprietary VLAN tagging scheme 3Com 3Com s VLAN tagging scheme 3 16 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 3 From the Frame Tags pull down menu select whether you want to Ignore or Use received Frame VLAN tags If you ignore VLAN tags on incoming frames the frames are bound to the port s default VLAN 4 From the VLAN Binding pull down menu select a VLAN binding type for this port Table 3 9 describes the VLAN Binding Options Table 3 9 VLAN Binding Options Option Definition Static Assigns VLAN membership manually using the VLAN Switch Ports page described in Creating and Implementing VLANS in Chapter 12 Bind to All Binds this port to all VLANs known to the switch This is an appropriate mode for switch to switch connections If you use 3Com Mapping Tables this setting is ignored Note When a tagged IEEE 802 1Q packet arrives on a port that is sat itot al 19 1 6 anc th V 7LsAN 06 at 25ex06 is 0 at 250n 18 n 12 th 22 e 25 c 15wt 21 itc 61 h 27 VL64 AN 25 f92 06 rs 07t 25tthatpno68rs 06 25po68rs 07evt n 12at 2 wang nn w 9 n 6eVl 13 L 248 AN 25trMa 7ff i 10 c 14 25to th64 e 7 VL64 AN 25 otD is TBhih di qaomt 4b2101 6917 4408 630 291V 1095 ANG
72. errors IPX In Delivers Total number of IPX packets delivered locally including packets from local applications IPX Forward Datagrams Number of IPX packets forwarded IPX Netbios Receives Number of NetBIOS packets received IPX In Discards Number of IPX packets received but discarded IPX In Header Errors Number of IPX packets discarded because of errors in the packet header This includes packets that are less than the minimum 30 byte length IPX In Unknown Number of IPX packets discarded because the destination socket Sockets was not open IPX In Max Hops Number of IPX packets discarded because the Transport Control Exceeds field is greater than or equal to 16 IPX In Checksum Errors Number of IPX packets received with bad checksums IPX Out Requests Number of IPX packets supplied locally for transmission not including any packets counted in IPX Forward Datagrams IPX Out Packets Total number of IPX packets transmitted IPX Out Discards Number of outgoing IPX packets discarded IPX Out No Routes Number of IPX packets which can not be transmitted because no routes are available IPX In Ping Request Number of received ping requests IPX In Ping Replies Number of received replies made to ping requests IPX Out Ping Requests Number of transmitted ping requests IPX Out Ping Replies Number of transmitted replies made to ping requests Searching the IPX Route
73. event and shutdown log entries 16 5 logging in Web Agent 3 6 logging into Web Agent 3 6 lookup hits forwarding cache FE parameters 11 6 lookup levels forwarding cache FE parameters 11 6 lookup misses forwarding cache FE parameters 11 6 low shutdown temperature temperature threshold parameter 16 3 lower warning temperature temperature threshold parameter 16 3 low preference static routes IP global configuration parameters 7 5 ES ID LSA detail 9 15 OSPF link state database parameter 9 14 LSA checksum sum OSPF statistical parameters 9 9 LSA chksum sum OSPF statistical parameters 9 9 LSA detail age 9 16 area 9 15 attached router ID 1 2 9 16 checksum 9 16 external 9 16 forward address 9 16 link data 9 16 link ID 9 16 ES ID 9 15 metric 9 16 network mask 9 16 Index 23 router ID 9 15 sequence 9 16 tag 9 16 TOS 9 16 TOS O metric 9 16 TOS count 9 16 type 9 15 type network 9 16 LSAs OSPF statistical parameters 9 9 M MAC Address search 14 4 MAC address 2 4 address forwarding table parameters 14 5 AppleTalk ARP cache table statistics 10 16 filtering 14 4 intelligent multicast session search parameters 15 7 IP static ARP parameters 7 15 multicast session parameters 15 8 static multicast session configuration parameters 15 10 static multicast session parameters 15 10 switch port parameter 3 13 MAC address value adding 14 6 MAC format add IP
74. for example for lack of buffer space Note This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re assembly IP Multicast In Receives Total number of input multicast datagrams received from interfaces including those received in error BOOTP DHCP In Requests Number of requests received by the BOOTP DHCP Relay Agent BOOTP DHCP In Responses Total number of BOOTP DHCP response datagrams received by the BOOTP DHCP Relay Agent BOOTP DHCP In Discards Number of BOOTP DHCP requests discarded BOOTP DHCP In Hops Exceeds Number of BOOTP DHCP requests not forwarded due to number of hops exceeds 7 24 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Table 7 11 P Routing Global Statistics Continued Statistic Defines the BOOTP DHCP Out Requests Total number of BOOTP DHCP requests forwarded by the BOOTP DHCP Relay Agent BOOTP DHCP Out Responses Total number of BOOTP DHCP responses forwarded by the BOOTP DHCP Relay Agent Searching the IP Routing Table To use the IP routing table 1 In the IP Display section of the Web Agent window click Route Table Search The Route Table Search dialog box opens 2 Select the search criteria you want to use to find more specific information on available routes For example if you want to find all static routes that are presently configured on your switch search by source and specify s
75. have been joined on this interface Received Group Leave Requests Number of leave requests received on this interface Received Group Reports Received Number of reports received on this interface in response to a group membership query Hosts respond to a Query by generating Host Membership Reports reporting each host group to which they belong on the network interface from which the Query was received Query Messages Received Number of query messages received from other multicast routers Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 29 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Table 7 16 GMP Interface Statistical Parameters Continued Parameter Defines the Query Messages Number of query messages sent by a multicast router These Transmitted messages are sent to discover which host groups have members on their attached local networks Queries are addressed to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 and carry an IP time to live of 1 Unknown Messages IGMP messages received with an unsupported type Received Number of Current Number of groups on each interface for which there are entries Groups in the Group Membership Table Displaying the Multicast Group Table The multicast group table provides information on interfaces that are members of an IGMP group and contains an expiry time for the entry IP address of the group and the group reporter address To display the IGMP group table 1
76. integer between 1 and 65279 Note Network Range Start must be less than or equal to Network Range End Network Range End Enter the ending network number The network number specifies the range of AppleTalk network numbers for extended networks Each number in the range must be an integer between 1 and 65279 Network Number Enter the next hop network number This number specifies the network number of the next hop router for the network range Node Enter the next hop node identification number This number must be between 1 and 253 Type Select the type of static route Options include High The static route is not superseded by a route update e Low The static route can be superseded by a route update Zone Enter an AppleTalk zone name assigned to this route Zone names may be up to 32 characters in length 4 Click CREATE to add the static route or CANCEL to restore previous settings 10 6 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 Editing AppleTalk Static Routes To edit an AppleTalk static route 1 In the AppleTalk Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Static Route The AppleTalk Static Route dialog box opens For more information on static route parameters refer to Table 10 2 2 Select the AppleTalk Static Route to be edited by clicking the Select check box 3 In the Network Range Start field enter the new network range st
77. jams the sending Ethernet channel until the port s buffers can receive more packets This prevents lost or dropped packets For full duplex links IEEE 802 3z pause control allows the port to stop a sending station from sending more packets if the receiving port s buffers are full For TX and FX ports there is an additional option for Enable with Aggressive Backoff This option limits the size of the bursts Flow Control is recommended for use primarily on end station connections Using this flow control on trunk ports can cause unnecessary congestion on the network Auto Negotiation Allows you to set the port to auto negotiate a speed and duplex Mode mode Auto negotiate works best when the connection on the other end of the link is set to auto negotiate as well If you set a port to auto negotiate and the connection is not successful set the port speed and duplex mode manually Auto Negotiation Determines what information the port advertises when it starts Speed Duplex auto negotiating In most cases 10 100 and Half Full are the Advertisement best settings but there may be cases when you want to auto negotiate one parameter while keeping the other fixed Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Parameter Definition Rate Limit Mode Prevents the switch from overwhelming the output buffer on Table 3 5 FastEthernet 10 100 Port Parameters Co
78. number of IPX routes Routes Peak Number of Lists the peak number of routes Routes Route Add Failures Indicates the number of failed attempts to add a route to the routing table Searching the IPX Service Table To search the IPX service table 1 In the IPX Display section of the Web Agent window click Service Table Search The IPX Service Table Search dialog box opens 2 Select the search criteria you want to use to find information on specific services For example if you want to find all static services that are presently configured on your switch search by source and specify static as your search value 4 12 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 3 Use Table 4 10 to determine the search parameters Table 4 10 PX Service Table Search Parameters Parameter Allows you to perform a search Source In your IPX service table use one of the following parameters e SAP Services learned via the SAP protocol e Static User configuration e Local Local services Once you select one of these parameters the search will attempt to find services associated with the parameter you chose Interface Based on the interface associated with the next hop to the service Service Name Based on a service name you specify Note that you can specify a single asterisk to indicate a wildcard character that will match all characters entered before the wildcard For example
79. parameters interface 4 13 source 4 13 IPX static route hops 4 6 interface 4 6 network 4 6 next hop node 4 6 ticks 4 6 IPX static route parameters 4 6 IPX static routes creating 4 6 deleting 4 7 modifying 4 7 IPX static service parameter hops 4 8 interface 4 8 network 4 8 next hop node 4 8 node 4 8 service name 4 8 socket 4 8 type 4 8 IPX static service parameters 4 8 IPX static services creating 4 7 IPX syntax example 4 1 IRDP 7 46 adding an interface 7 48 deleting an interface 7 48 enabling on an interface 7 46 IRDP overview 7 45 IRDP parameters adv address 7 46 advertisement life time 7 47 interface 7 46 IRDP state 7 46 max advertisement interval 7 47 minimum advertisement interval 7 47 network address 7 46 preferences 7 46 IRDP state IRDP parameters 7 46 J jabbers Ethernet interface statistical parameters 17 5 K key OSPF interface parameters 9 5 known mode non VLAN switch port parameters 3 20 switch port configuration parameters 3 16 Index 21 L L2 frame count frame forwarding statistical parameters L3 drop frames frame forwarding statistical parameters L3 frame cache hits frame forwarding statistical parameters L3 slow path frames frame forwarding statistical parameters L3 total T2 frame forwarding statistical parameters LAN router configuration 3 32 last change LDAP statistics 7 50 Layer 2 15 3 event log 16 3 shutdown log 1
80. ports e One 1000Base SX e 1000Base LX e One 1000Base SLX Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 2 1 Overview of the P220 Gigabit Switch Family The P220FE switch has the following features O 24 10 100Base TX ports O One Gigabit Ethernet port O Optional Expansion modules e Four 10 100Base TX ports autosensing e Two 100Base FX ports e One 1000Base SX e One 1000Base LX e One 1000Base SLX Switch Features This section describes the following switch features Crossbar Switch Fabric Virtual Bridging Functions VLAN Functions Hunt Groups OpenTrunk Technology Spanning Tree Buffer and Queue Management QO QQ 0 0 0 0 Web Based Management Crossbar Switch Fabric The crossbar switch matrix provides low latency high throughput packet switching using a crossbar architecture Figure 2 1 2 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Overview of the P220 Gigabit Switch Family Figure 2 1 Crossbar Architecture Port 1 Pott 4 76 Gb s 22 88 Gb s 1 76 Gb s Port 2 por 2 Crossbar Port 13 Pons gt Crossbars are more scalable than shared memory architectures Architecturally you can add more capacity simply by adding more switch elements By comparison shared memory switches have an inherent maximum upper boundary in throughput that makes high density single backplane gigabit switches impractical With a crossbar architecture you increase the number of gigabit ports in your network and the
81. previous settings Monitoring Switch Performance Using OSPF Statistics Monitoring switch performance using OSPF statistics includes Displaying OSPF Statistics Q Displaying OSPF Links Q Displaying OSPF Neighbors Q Searching the OSPF Link State Database Displaying OSPF Statistics To display the OSPF global statistics 1 In the OSPF Display section of the Web Agent window click Statistics The OSPF Statistics dialog box opens 9 8 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 2 Use Table 9 6 to review the OSPF statistics Table 9 6 OSPF Statistical Parameters Parameter Displays the OSPF State Current state of OSPF Router ID Router ID for OSPF OSPF Version Current version of OSPF The P550 with Integrated Routing supports OSPFv2 External LSA Count Number of external LS type 5 link state advertisements in the link state database Originate LSA Count Number of LSAs originated by this router Receive New LSA Count Number of new LSAs received by this router LSA Checksum Sum global OSPF system 32 bit unsigned sum of the LS checksums of the external link state advertisements contained in the link state database This sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers ArealD Area ID of the area in question
82. s default VLAN The default value is Use VLAN Binding Select the port s outgoing VLAN binding type Refer to Table 3 9 for more information on VLAN binding options Automatic VLAN Select to enable or disable the ability to Creation automatically create a VLAN each time the port receives a frame from an unknown VLAN The default value is Disable VTP Snooping Select to enable or disable VTP Snooping on this port The default value is Disable Allow Learning Select to enable or disable the port s learning of new addresses The default value is Enable Hunt Group Select a hunt group for which this port will be a member The default value is None Spanning Tree Mode Select to enable or disable spanning tree protocol on this port The default value is Enable Note For the Cajun P220 switch you will be unable to modify this feature on the CPU switch port Fast Start Select to enable or disable fast start on this port The default value is Disable Note For the Cajun P220 switch you will be unable to modify this feature on the CPU switch port Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 15 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 3 7 Switch Port Configuration Parameters Continued Parameter Known Mode Definition Select to enable or disable known mode The default value is Disable 3Com Mapping Table Select how incoming tagged f
83. sessions dynamically as if it were directly receiving the IGMP messages If more than one LGMP server is on a VLAN one server will be elected as the distributor Only the distributor disseminates intelligent multicasting information using LGMP packets Note IGMP snooping must be enabled for LGMP server availability An LGMP server is active only for VLANs that have an IGMP interface enabled Layer 2 Dynamic Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 does not support IGMP snooping to dynamically configure intelligent multicast sessions Therefore LGMP client or CGMP snooping is used to achieve dynamic intelligent multicasting LGMP Client An LGMP server disseminates multicast session information using LGMP An LGMP client creates multicast sessions adds clients to those sessions and removes sessions dynamically using the information sent from the LGMP server CGMP Snooping Cisco routers disseminate multicast session information via the CGMP protocol The switch has the ability to listen to these messages and dynamically create multicast sessions add client ports to those sessions and remove sessions Pruning Dynamic Sessions Client Ports and Router Ports Normally dynamically created multicast sessions are removed by the application for example IGMP Snooping LGMP or CGMP Snooping that created the session when the session is no longer active You can also enable Automatic Session Pruning so that if a session has not been active f
84. single point of failure inherent in the static default routed environment A Master VRRP router controls the IP addresses associated with the virtual router and forwards packets sent to these IP addresses The backup router is always on standby If the Master router fails the backup router takes over Multiple virtual routers can be created per interface VRRP can be enabled or disabled globally or on an interface basis 7 42 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Enabling VRRP To enable a VRRP virtual router 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Global Configuration The IP Global Configuration dialog box opens 2 From the VRRP pull down menu select Enable 3 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Enabling VRRP on an Interface To enable an VRRP virtual router on an interface 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Interfaces The IP Interfaces dialog box opens 2 Select the interface to be enabled 3 From the VRRP pull down menu for your interface select Enable 4 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Note You must enable VRRP globally from the IP Configuration Global Configuration dialog box Creating a VRRP Virtual Router To create a VRRP router 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click VRRP Configuration The VRRP Con
85. so they act as one high bandwidth switch port The concept used is borrowed from the world of telephony where incoming calls to a single phone number are routed to the first available line Hunt groups allow you to create multi gigabit pipes to transport traffic through the highest traffic areas of your network A hunt group provides O Shared traffic load O Destination address based traffic sorting which keeps packets in the right order O Fault tolerance If a port in a group fails the remaining ports in the group pick up the traffic load Support for any number of same speed connections in a group Faster recovery from link failure If a port in the group fails the remaining ports can carry the load Recovery not limited by spanning tree convergence time convergence time is the time the network takes to resume steady state forwarding after spanning tree reconfiguration O Up to ten hunt groups per switch OpenTrunk Technology OpenTrunk technology translates VLAN tagged frames from one format to another including CoS The P220 switch is delivered as a plug and play IEEE 802 1D standard bridge but supports several VLAN tagging schemes This makes the switch highly interoperable in existing networks because O Any port can be a trunk port O Ports have configurable VLAN tagging on a per port basis O Ports process a number of popular VLAN tagging schemes including major vendors proprietary schemes Figure 2 2
86. state change 7 45 times this VR became master 7 45 VR ID 7 45 VRRP statistics viewing 7 44 VRRP virtual router creating 7 43 VTP snooping Cisco Catalyst 5000 parameters 3 20 configuring 3 18 VTP snooping switch port configuration parameters 3 15 VTP snooping parameters configuration revision number 3 19 domain name 3 19 update timestamp 3 19 updater identity 3 19 VTP snooping state 3 19 VTP snooping state VTP snooping parameters 3 19 W warning protocol event log settings 16 5 Web Agent 1 14 2 9 logging in 3 6 logging into 3 6 setting up user accounts 3 6 Web based management 1 14 2 9 week one time summer time hours configuration 3 38 summer time hours configuration 3 35 X Xon Xoff flow control 3 25 Z Zip Ext Reply Rx AppleTalk global statistics 10 13 Zip Ext Reply Tx AppleTalk global statistics 10 13 Zip GNI Rq Rx AppleTalk global statistics 10 13 Zip GNI Rq Tx AppleTalk global statistics 10 13 Zip GNI Rsp Rx AppleTalk global statistics 10 13 Zip GNI Rsp Tx AppleTalk global statistics 10 13 Zip Query Rx AppleTalk global statistics 10 13 Zip Query Tx AppleTalk global statistics 10 13 Zip Reply Rx AppleTalk global statistics 10 13 Zip Reply Tx AppleTalk global statistics 10 13 zone AppleTalk NBP table parameters 10 17 AppleTalk static route 10 6 zone filter adding interfaces 10 11 creating 10 9 deleting interfaces 10 11 editing 10 10 zones AppleTal
87. switch performance IP routing statistics 7 21 OSPF 9 8 month one time summer time hours configuration 3 38 summer time hours configuration 3 36 multicast forwarding description 7 16 multicast forwarding cache displaying 7 39 multicast packets Ethernet interface statistical parameters 17 3 multicast protocol add IP interface parameters 7 3 IP interface parameters 7 6 multicast pruning hardware 2 3 2 4 multicast routing description 7 16 multicast session client port 15 8 multicast session client port parameters application 15 9 port 15 9 multicast session parameters application 15 8 client port 15 8 MAC address 15 8 session ID 15 8 type 15 8 VLAN 15 8 multicast statistics IP 7 27 multi gigabit connections example 12 11 multinetting 7 7 multiple tagging formats supported 1 11 N name AppleTalk NBP filter parameters 10 8 AppleTalk NBP table parameters 10 17 AppleTalk zone filter parameters 10 10 AppleTalk zone table statistics 10 16 IPX SAP filter parameters 6 3 IPX service table parameter 4 14 spanning tree bridge port parameters 12 9 switch port parameter 3 13 NBP filter adding interfaces 10 9 deleting interfaces 10 9 editing 10 8 neighbor DVMRP routers DVMRP interface statistical parameters 7 34 neighbor is SNMP manageable DVMRP neighbor routers 7 35 neighbor network address DVMRP neighbor routers 7 35 neighbor querier timeout in sec IGMP interface statistical parameters 7 29
88. table parameter 14 3 Smart Agent 1 15 2 9 SNMP 1 15 2 9 communities 3 23 security levels 3 24 SNMP access level none 3 24 read only 3 24 read write 3 24 read write with security level set to admin 3 24 SNMP communities parameters access 3 23 community string 3 23 IP address 3 23 security level 3 23 trap receiver 3 23 SNMP communities configuring 3 23 access level 3 24 community string 3 23 IP address 3 23 security level 3 24 trap receiver 3 24 SNMP security level admin 3 24 normal 3 24 snmp version supported 3 23 SNTP enabling 3 34 socket IPX service table parameter 4 14 IPX static service parameter 4 8 source IP routing table search parameters 7 25 IPX route table parameter 4 11 IPX routing table search parameters 4 11 IPX service table parameter 4 14 IPX service table search parameter 4 13 source address Layer 3 route cache search parameters 11 5 source address mask DVMRP multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 40 IGMP local multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 31 source filename configuration file management 3 48 source network DVMRP route table parameters 7 36 IPX datagram fields 4 3 source network mask DVMRP route table parameters 7 36 source node IPX datagram fields 4 3 source port Layer 3 route cache search parameters 11 5 port mirroring information parameters 17 7 source port number DVMRP upstream source parameters 7 42 source socket IPX datagram fields 4 3
89. that all networks and service types are filtered in Interface Remote Together Filter 1 and Filter 2 filter services learned on Interface Remote except for NDS advertisements It is important to note that Filter 2 had the Precedence field set to 1 and Filter 1 had the Precedence field set to 0 Any filter with a Precedence of 0 will always override a filter with a precedence of 1 or higher Interpreting IPX SAP Interface Statistics To interpret IPX SAP interface statistics 1 In the IPX SAP Display section of the Web Agent window click Interface Statistics The IPX SAP Interface Statistics dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 6 7 Configuring IPX SAP Protocol Layer 3 2 Use Table 6 4 to interpret your IPX SAP interface statistics Table 6 4 PX SAP Interface Statistical Parameters Parameter Definition Interface The IPX interface associated with this SAP interface State The current state of the SAP interface Network Number The network number of the IPX network associated with the interface Triggered Updates Sent The number of triggered updates sent from the SAP interface Non triggered Updates Sent The number of non triggered updates sent from the SAP interface GNS Responses Sent The number of GNS responses sent from the SAP interface Updates Received The number of updates received Updates may be received periodically even if no changes have occurred Req
90. that if more than one path exists between two parts of a network only one of these paths is used while the others are blocked Note You should have a good understanding of spanning tree protocol before attempting to configure these parameters Because of the number of bridges present in a switched networking environment spanning tree structures can become extremely complex This section includes a a a Spanning Tree Bridge Options Managing Spanning Trees Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Ports Disabling Spanning Tree Mode for the Port 12 6 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Layer 2 and Layer 3 Spanning Tree Bridge Options The three spanning tree options are O Tf you use the default 802 1D spanning tree option the entire switch is a bridge for which spanning tree parameters can be set Every port regardless of VLAN membership is part of the same spanning tree The implication is that after resolving the spanning tree topology only one trunk will be active and all others will be blocked O If you use the Spanning Tree per VLAN option each VLAN runs a separate spanning tree with its own BPDUs This allows different ports to blocked or unblocked on different VLANs O If you use the dual layer spanning tree option within a set of interconnected Cajun switches you can set up a separate spanning tree for each VLAN The switch then runs a second leve
91. the IPX Interface dialog box not in the Add IPX Interface dialog box Interface Enter the name of the IPX interface Admin State Select the administration state of the interface Options include Up e Down VLAN Select the VLAN that corresponds to the IPX interface Network Address Enter the number of the IPX network you want to assign to the IPX interface This number is a hexadecimal number Node Address Displays the node address on which the IPX interface resides Note This parameter is displayed in the IPX Interface dialog box not in the Add IPX Interface dialog box Frame Type Select the format of the MAC header on the IPX packets sent by the router on the interface Formats include Ethernet Il Maximum Transmission Unit MTU 1500 Ethernet 802 2 MTU 1497 Ethernet SNAP MTU 1492 Ethernet 802 3 MTU 1500 Ticks Specify the amount of time in ticks that the packet takes to reach the network number you specified A tick is approximately 1 18th of a second RIP Enable or disable IPX RIP on a selected interface Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 4 5 Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 Table 4 3 PX Interface Parameters Continued Parameter Allows you to SAP Enable or disable IPX SAP on a selected interface Type 20 Packet Specify whether or not Type 20 packets can be sent received Propagation disabled or sent
92. the LSA Detail dialog box Area ID Displays the 32 bit identifier of the area from which the LSA was received Type Displays the format and function of the LSA Types include e Router Links These packets describe the states of the router s links to the area and are only flooded within a particular area e Network Links These packets are generated by Designated Routers and describe the set of routers attached to a particular network Summary Network These summaries are generated by Area Border Routers and describe inter area routes to various networks Then can also be used for aggregating routes e Summary AS Border This describes links to Autonomous System Border Routers and are generated by Area Border Routers e AS External These packets are generated by Autonomous System Border Routers and describe routes to destination external to the Autonomous system They are flooded everywhere except stub areas e Multicast Group These packets are generated by multicast groups e NSSA External These packets are generated by Area Border Routers and describe routes within the NSSA Not So Stubby Area LSID Displays the piece of routing domain that is being described by the advertisement Depending on the advertisements LS type the LS ID displays different values Router ID Displays the 32 bit number that uniquely identifies the originating router in the Autonomous System Sequence Displays the s
93. the Members column click the highlighted number The Hunt Group Members dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 12 13 Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Layer 2 and Layer 3 Adding Ports to a Hunt Group After creating and naming a hunt group you can add as many additional ports as you would like to the group To add additional ports 1 2 9 From the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Modules and Ports The Module Information dialog box opens In the Ports column click on the port number The Physical Port Configuration dialog box opens For the selected port click Enable to disable the port The selection is deselected and the port is disabled Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Click Modules at the bottom of the page The Module Information dialog box re opens In the Switch Ports column click the number for the module whose port s you are adding to the hunt group The Switch Ports dialog box opens In the Name column click the port name you want to configure The Switch Port Configuration dialog box opens From the Trunk Mode pull down menu select the trunk group assignment of the port Click APPLY save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings 10 Repeat Steps 1 9 for any additional ports you would like to add to this hunt group 11 Repeat the same steps on the switch at the other end of
94. the check box is enabled click the Enable check box if you want to disable the port Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings In the Name field click the port name to set additional parameters The Detailed Physical Port Configuration dialog box opens Refer to Table 3 5 for more information on the Fast Ethernet 10 100 parameters In the Name field enter a port name If this is an end station port from the Category pull down menu select User Port For trunk ports select Service Port Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 9 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 8 From the Speed Mode pull down menu select a speed 10 Mb s or 100 Mb s if you want to set the port speed manually If you set the port to auto negotiate this setting is ignored This feature is only available for 10 10 TX From the Duplex Mode pull down menu select a mode Half duplex or Full duplex if you want to set the port s duplex mode manually If you set the port to auto negotiate this setting is ignored 10 From the Flow Control Mode pull down menu select Enable if you want this port to use Flow Control to prevent buffer overflows Disable this feature only when flow control is causing congestion in other areas of the network 11 From the Auto Negotiation Mode pull down menu select Enable This feature is only available for 10 10 TX Note This feature works best when the p
95. the remaining 80 205K These values can be modified using either the Web Agent or SNMP Note When you change these values you must reboot the switch before they can take effect Less buffer memory gets assigned to the high priority queue because the high priority queue gets serviced more frequently than the normal priority queue Since a frame spends less time on the high priority queue less buffer space is required for the queue The Service Ratio can be chosen to match traffic patterns and performance requirements using a weighted round robin scheduling algorithm The available service ratios of the algorithm are defined in Managing Buffers and Queues The factory default service ratio for fabric ports is 999 1 The factory default service ratio for physical ports is 1023 to 1 If there is traffic to be serviced from both the high and normal priority queues 999 packets of high priority traffic will be processed for each normal priority packet Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 13 1 Tuning Your Switch Performance Layer 2 amp Layer 3 When the high priority queue fills up incoming frames are dropped The philosophy is if a high priority frame is going to be late it is not worth sending it at all The normal priority queue uses either IEEE 802 3X PAUSE variable timed XOFF flow control or Half Duplex collisions to shut off incoming frames before the queue overflows The switch implements two flow control discipli
96. to create a new OSPF summary Note This window will only appear with configured OSPF summaries if you have previously configured one or more OSPF summaries 3 Use Table 9 5 to configure your OSPF summaries Table 9 5 OSPF Summaries Parameters Parameter Definition Area Select the area ID of the area from which the routes are aggregated summary IP address Network Address Enter the IP address of the network to be advertised Mask Enter the subnet mask of the network to be advertised Advertisement Select the ability to suppress disable or enable advertisements of this summary When suppressing advertisements of IP routes in this range are also suppressed 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 9 7 Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 Deleting OSPF Summaries To delete an OSPF summary 1 In the OSPF Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Summaries The OSPF Summaries dialog box opens 2 Select the OSPF summary to be removed 3 Click DELETE The OSPF summary is removed Modifying OSPF Summaries To modify an OSPF summary 1 In the OSPF Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Summaries The OSPF Summaries dialog box opens 2 Select the OSPF summary to be modified 3 Use Table 9 5 to configure your parameters 4 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore
97. to restore previous settings 10 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 Creating an AppleTalk Routing Interface To create an AppleTalk interface 1 Enable AppleTalk routing globally Refer to Enabling AppleTalk Global Routing earlier in this section 2 In the AppleTalk Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Interfaces The AppleTalk Interfaces dialog box opens 3 Click CREATE The Add AppleTalk Interfaces dialog box opens 4 Use Table 10 1 to configure your AppleTalk interface Table 10 1 AppleTalk Interface Parameters Parameter Definition Interface Enter the name of the AppleTalk interface to be created VLAN Select the VLAN to be associated with the AppleTalk interface Options include Default e Discard All created VLANs Metric Enter the metric associated with the AppleTalk interface Encapsulation Type Select the encapsulation type to be associated with the AppleTalk interface Options include e Ethernet Il MTU 1500 e Ethernet SNAP MTU 1492 Network Range Start Enter the starting network number The network number specifies the range of AppleTalk network numbers for extended networks Each number in the range must be an integer between 0 and 65279 Note The Network Range Start value must be less than or equal to the Network Range End value Network Range End Enter the ending network number The netw
98. you want recurring Summer Time Hours to start or end Options are based on a seven day week and include e Sunday The default Start and End values In the Western hemisphere DST starts on the first Sunday in April and ends on the last Sunday in October e Monday e Tuesday e Wednesday e Thursday e Friday e Saturday Month Select the month when one time Summer Time Hours start or end The twelve months of the Gregorian calendar are provided For a one time setting of Summer Time Hours the default value for start and end months is January Hour Enter a value to represent the hour when Summer Time Hours start or end for One time settings The default value is 00 Minutes Enter a value to represent the number of minutes into the hour when Summer Time Hours start or end for One time Summer Time Hours The default value is 00 for both Start and End minutes 7 To set Summer Time Hours on a one time basis a Select One Time 3 38 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 b Set the date on which Summer Time Hours start and end by selecting the Month Day and Year on which Summer Time Hours start and end C Enter values for the Hour and Minutes when Summer Time Hours start and end 8 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Setting the System Clock The system clock is used for setting traps alarm
99. 0 Switch Overview Figure 1 5 flooding Domain St Virtual Bridging Function Frame Classification Function Hunt Groups Hunt groups also known as link aggregation aggregate bandwidth from multiple ports so they act as one high bandwidth switch port The concept used is borrowed from the world of telephony where incoming calls to a single phone number are routed to the first available line Hunt groups allow you to create multi gigabit pipes to transport traffic through the highest traffic areas of your network A hunt group provides O Inter operation with other vendor s equipment for example Cisco s Etherchannel and Sun s Quad Adapter Shared traffic load Destination address based traffic sorting which keeps packets in the right order Fault tolerance If a port in a group fails the remaining ports in the group pick up the traffic load Support for any number of same speed connections in a group Faster recovery from link failure If a port in the group fails the remaining ports can carry the load Recovery not limited by spanning tree convergence time convergence time is the time the network takes to resume steady state forwarding after spanning tree reconfiguration Up to ten groups per switch 1 10 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Cajun P550 Switch Overview OpenTrunk Technology OpenTrunk technology translates VLAN tagged frames from one format to another including CoS
100. 220 Switch Operation Guide 12 1 Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Layer 2 and Layer 3 Note The switch supports a feature called Automatic VLAN Creation for tagged frames When this feature is enabled the switch creates new VLANs when it receives packets from previously unknown VLANs Forwarding Rules These rules determine the set of ports on the switch through which members of the VLAN can be reached This is called binding a port to a VLAN A port may be bound to a VLAN using four methods O Setting the Port VLAN attribute in the Switch Port Configuration dialog box of the port form This identifies the VLAN to which all untagged frames received on the port are forwarded Note A port has one Port VLAN Changing this to a new VLAN removes the port from the old VLAN O Setting the VLAN Binding attribute in the Switch Port Configuration dialog box to Bind to All This causes the port to be bound to all VLANs known to the switch for example all current VLANs and all VLANs added in the future O Setting the VLAN Binding attribute in the Switch Port Configuration dialog box to Bind to Received This causes the port to be bound to all VLANs as identified by the VLAN tag in tagged frames received on this port Consequently ports are bound to those VLANs that actually have members that are reachable through the port O Manually creating a VLAN Switch Port in the VLAN Switch Ports dialog box Egress Rules For a give
101. 3 21 configuring flow control mode gigabit module 3 8 configuring hunt groups 12 12 configuring IGMP 7 16 configuring IGMP interfaces 7 17 configuring IGMP snooping 15 11 configuring IP 7 1 configuring IP global routing 7 4 configuring IP interface access lists 7 8 configuring IP interfaces 7 5 configuring IPX SAP interfaces 6 1 configuring multiple interfaces on a VLAN 7 7 configuring physical port parameters gigabit ports 3 8 configuring port name Fast Ethernet module 3 9 configuring port VLAN parameters 3 16 configuring RIP global configuration 8 1 configuring RMON mirror port 17 6 configuring service port gigabit module 3 8 configuring the address table age timer 14 1 configuring the address table super age timer 14 1 configuring the LGMP server 15 12 15 14 configuring the PPP console static route 3 30 configuring the serial port console PPP console 3 26 configuring the supervisor module using the CLI 3 2 configuring the temperature system 3 39 configuring thresholds 16 2 configuring user port gigabit module 3 8 configuring VRRP 7 42 configuring VRRP authentication 7 44 configuring VTP snooping 3 18 congestion drops buffer management table parameters 13 4 connecting a modem 3 25 overview 3 25 console event table actions 16 9 console serial port changing 3 24 console serial port configuration PPP Layer 3 only 3 24 TTY Layer 3 and Layer 2 3 24 console serial port settings cha
102. 4 5 In the Switching Parameters section of the Web Agent window click 3Com Mapping Table The 3Com Mapping Table dialog box opens Click CREATE The Create 3Com Map Table dialog box opens In the Name field enter a name for this entry Click APPLY save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings In the Switching Parameters section of the Web Agent window click 3Com Mapping Table The 3Com Mapping Table dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 12 5 Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Layer 2 and Layer 3 Use the corresponding pull down menus to assign a Lucent VLAN ID association to each of the 16 available 3Com VLAN IDs In the Name column click on VLAN Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Note The mapping instructions in the table called Default are fixed and cannot be changed To actually map VLAN IDs you must create new 3Com Mapping tables Setting a port to use a 3Com mapping table causes it to ignore other VLAN tagging parameters The switch assumes that only 3Com VLAN tags will be received on the selected port Assigning Ports To VLANs Refer to Configuring Switch Port Parameters in Chapter 3 for instructions on assigning ports to VLANs Using Spanning Tree Setup and Monitoring Spanning trees are used to prevent loops from forming in your network The spanning tree algorithm creates a single path through the network by ensuring
103. 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Configuring the Serial Console Port as a TTY Console To configure the console serial port as a TTY Console 1 In the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window select Console Configuration The Console Configuration dialog box opens 2 Click TTY for your console type and click SELECT The Console Port Configuration dialog box opens 3 Use Table 3 17 to set your console serial port settings Table 3 17 Console Serial Port Options Option Default Available Settings Baud Rate 9600 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Flow Control Xon Xoff TTY None Xon Xoff TTY Data Bits 8 7 or 8 Parity None Odd Even or None Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 4 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Connecting a Modem In order to use the serial console port as a PPP console you must connect a modem to the switch When you use the specified serial cable and connectors the switch will convert the normal DCE interface to a DTE interface that is used by modems When the switch is configured for PPP mode it will periodically send the modem config string from the serial console port This will synchronize the baud rates between the modem and the console port and configure the modem to operate with the switch s DTE interface The switch does not use any out
104. 49 secondary server IP address LDAP configuration parameters 7 49 secondary server port LDAP configuration parameters 7 49 security level configuring SNMP communities 3 24 SNMP communities parameters 3 23 security levels SNMP 3 24 seed AppleTalk interface statistics 10 14 segmented address tables 2 4 sequence LSA detail 9 16 OSPF link state database parameter 9 14 serial line connection 3 1 server ID priority LGMP server configuration parameters 15 13 service name IPX service table search parameter 4 13 IPX static service parameter 4 8 service port Fast Ethernet module 3 9 service port status event class parameters 16 8 service ratio queues 13 1 service type IPX service table search parameter 4 13 session ID multicast session parameters 15 8 session pruning timer session pruning timer 15 5 session search intelligent multicast 15 7 session type intelligent multicast session search parameters 15 7 sessions destroyed IGMP snooping 15 12 set recurring summer time hours 3 34 setting all ports in a module 3 12 setting summer time hours 3 34 one time 3 37 setting switch ports on all modules 3 22 setting the system clock 3 33 setting up user accounts 3 6 severity event and shutdown log entries 16 6 short PDU in error AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 shutdown log definition 16 8 shutdown log switch event definition 16 4 single copy replication 2 3 2 4 size address table instance hash
105. 6 NetBIOS UDP rebroadcast 7 7 network address 7 6 OSPF 7 6 proxy ARP 7 6 RIP 7 6 state 7 6 VLAN 7 6 VRRP 7 7 IP interfaces configuring 7 5 IP multicast overview 7 15 IP multicast forward datagrams IP routing global statistics 7 24 IP multicast forwarding IP global configuration parameters 7 4 IP multicast in discard IP routing global statistics 7 24 IP multicast in receives IP routing global statistics 7 24 IP multinetting 7 7 IP out discards 7 22 IP out no routes IP routing global statistics 7 22 IP out requests IP routing global statistics 7 22 IP reassembly failures IP routing global statistics 7 23 IP reassembly OKs IP routing global statistics 7 23 IP reassembly required IP routing global statistics 7 22 IP reassembly timeout IP routing global statistics 7 22 IP routing add IP interface parameters 7 3 creating a BOOTP DHCP server entry 7 15 IP global configuration parameters 7 4 IP interface parameters 7 6 statistics 7 21 IP routing discards IP routing global statistics 7 23 18 Index IP routing global statistics BOOTP DHCP in discards 7 24 BOOTP DHCP in hops exceeded 7 24 BOOTP DHCP in requests 7 24 BOOTP DHCP in responses 7 24 BOOTP DHCP out requests 7 25 BOOTP DHCP out responses 7 25 ICMP in address mask reply 7 23 ICMP in address mask requests 7 23 ICMP in destination unreachable 7 23 ICMP in echo replys 7 23 ICMP in echo requests 7 23 ICMP i
106. 6 4 Layer 2 Fast Ethernet modules 20 port 10 100Base TX 1 4 Layer 2 Gigabit ethernet modules 1 5 Layer 2 overview 15 3 Layer 2 routing overview 1 7 1 8 Layer 2 supervisor temperature system example 16 2 layer 2 supervisor module features 1 2 layer 2 switch compatibility 1 7 Layer 2 switching 1 7 Layer 2 switching bridging 3 31 Layer 2 3 routing example 1 8 Layer 3 forwarding cache 11 1 Layer 3 learned traffic routing overview 1 8 Layer 3 not learned traffic routing overview 1 8 Layer 3 cache configuration age interval 11 2 aging 11 2 current system entries 11 3 hash depth 11 2 hash mode 11 2 maximum entries 11 2 maximum system entries 11 3 system entries failures 11 3 11 4 11 4 11 4 11 4 11 4 Layer 3 dynamic intelligent multicasting 15 2 Layer 3 Fast Ethernet modules 20 port 10 100Base TX 1 4 Layer 3 forwarding cache displaying 11 5 searching the routing cache 11 4 22 Index Layer 3 forwarding cache FE parameters aged entries 11 6 current entries 11 6 duplicate add attempts 11 6 entries removed due to route changes 11 6 entries removed due to route deletes 11 6 failed add attempts 11 6 lookup hits 11 6 lookup levels 11 6 lookup misses 11 6 memory use in bytes 11 6 mode 11 6 PRE 11 6 total entries 11 6 type 11 6 Layer 3 Gigabit ethernet modules 1 5 Layer 3 intelligent multicasting intelligent multicasting 15 2 Layer 3 overview 15 2 Lay
107. 6 G 3 WG 1 WO 4 B 4 B 5 WB 5 WB 6 G 2 O 7 WBr 7 WBr 8 Br 8 Br After your switch is connected to the network using an out of band connection log in to the switch using a Web browser as described in Logging In to the Web Agent later in this chapter Configuring the Switch Using the Web Agent The switch includes an embedded HTTP server that allows you to set all the switch s parameters Use this interface for quick and simple configuration changes Refer to the Cajun P550 Manager User Guide for information on monitoring and configuring the Cajun switch using the Cajun P550 Manager interface Figure 3 3 Cajun P550 Switch Web Agent Application System Information Lucent Technologies Cajun Switch Agent V4 0 0 Mans fsson tocmemation O Location tLocation Not Bet Contact system Administrator Active Alarms 24 APPLY CANCEL Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 5 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Logging In to the Web Agent Although the Web Agent supports any frames capable browser the system has been qualified with the following browsers O O Netscape Navigator 4 5 or later Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 0 or later To log in to the Web Agent 1 2 ao py Start your browser In the Location field enter the URL of the switch you want to manage for example http 127 255 255 0 Remember that each interface to the supervisor
108. 60 minutes Click One Time Note The Web Agent enables you to select the boxes next to both Recurring and One time Summer Time Hours However the option to set both Recurring and One time hours is not provided 6 Use Table 3 20 to configure Summer Time Hours on a one time basis Table 3 20 OneTime Summer Time H ours Configuration Parameter Definition One time Select if Summer Time Hours change one time such as on a specified date When you select one time Summer Time Hours you indicate the time and date on which Summer Time Hours begin and end Start Specifies the start of Summer Time Hours End Specifies the end of Summer Time Hours Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 37 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 3 20 One TimeSummer Time Hours Configuration Continued Parameter Definition Week Select the week of the month during which you want recurring Summer Time Hours to start or end Options include e First First week of the month the default Start value when Daylight Savings Time starts in the Western hemisphere e Second Second week of the month e Third Third week of the month Fourth Fourth week of the month e Last The final days of a month such as the 29th 30th and 31st days of a month Last is specified as the default End value denoting when Daylight Savings Time ends in the Western hemisphere Day Select the day of the week when
109. 7 In the Dest Address field enter the destination address 10 1 1 0 and the destination address wildcard 0 0 0 255 respectively 8 In the TCP UDP Destination Port field Enter a Min of 80 HTTP e Enter a Max of 80 HTTP 9 In the TCP UDP Source Port field e Enter a Min of 80 HTTP e Enter a Max of 80 HTTP 10 Select TCP Established A check mark displays in the check box 11 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Once you complete the creation of both access rules all traffic between subnet 10 1 1 0 and 10 1 2 0 is filtered Note that traffic between subnet 10 1 1 0 and 10 1 3 0 and 10 1 2 0 and 10 1 3 0 is not filtered This is because your access rules only filter traffic between 10 1 1 0 and 10 1 2 0 Note To filter traffic to a specific address and not to an entire subnet you must specify the destination address of the network node and use a subnet wildcard of 255 255 255 255 To filter all traffic you must specify a destination address of 0 0 0 0 and a subnet wildcard of 0 0 0 0 This filters out all traffic This is useful if you want to filter all traffic except traffic that matches a previous rule Ensure that you do not make this your first rule since that overrides all subsequent rules a Activating Access Lists You can specify which access lists to activate on the switch by selecting Access Control in the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent Note Before you
110. 95 to 1 8191 to 1 16383 to 1 32767 to 1 4 To manage your Fabric Port buffers click on the Fabric Port Buffer number whose associated buffers you want to manage The selected fabric port s Detailed Buffer Configuration dialog box opens 5 Use Table 13 2 to manage your port s input and output buffer Table 13 2 Buffer Detailed Configuration Parameters Parameter Definition Memory The amount of physical memory associated with this buffer Age Timer The amount of time a packet remains in the queue before being discarded as a stale packet You may want to increase the timer value for ports connected to 10 MB s ports particularly 10 MB s shared media because you may want to queue packets longer before discarding them Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 13 3 Tuning Your Switch Performance Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 13 2 Buffer Detailed Configuration Parameters Continued Parameter Definition High Priority Percent of the buffer s queueing space allotted to high priority Allocation traffic Because the high priority queue is serviced more frequently than the normal priority queue raising this value may not necessarily provide better service In fact if you are using the high priority queue for delay sensitive traffic you may want to reduce the amount of memory devoted to the high priority queue This ensures that packets that cannot be delivered in a timely manner are discarded If you want t
111. APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to clear your selection Using the All Ports Configuration Dialog Box The All Ports Configuration dialog box allows you to apply the same parameter settings to all switch ports in a module using a single command To set all switch ports in a module using a single command 1 2 In the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window select Modules amp Ports The Module Information dialog box opens In the Ports column click the number of ports listed for the module you want to configure for example 10 for 100Base FX The Physical Port Configuration dialog box opens Click All Module Ports Configuration at the bottom of the dialog box The All Ports Configuration dialog box opens Select the port on which you want your changes to occur Set port parameters for the selected ports as described in Viewing Switch Port Parameters earlier in this chapter Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings 3 22 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Setting Up SNMP Communities SNMP communities are the SNMP values that an SNMP manager uses to manage the switch SNMP Version 2c is supported Table 3 14 SNMP Communities Parameters Parameter Definition Community String This string serves as a password that you enter at the network management station It provides the level of acces
112. Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Version 4 0 tHe her Sr Hh 55H Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Version 4 0 Copyright LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES 1999 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Produced in USA November 1999 The products specifications and other technical information regarding the products contained in this document are subject to change without notice All information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable but is presented without warranty of any kind express or implied and users must take full responsibility for their application of any products specified in this document Lucent disclaims responsibility for errors which may appear in this document and it reserves the right in its sole discretion and without notice to make substitutions and modifications in the products and practices described in this document Lucent Cajun CajunDocs OpenTrunk P550 P220 and Cajun View are trademarks of Lucent Technologies Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows 95 Windows 98 and Internet Explorer are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries OpenView is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Netscape and Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries 3Com is a registered trademark and PACE is a trademark of 3Com or its subsidiaries Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Sys
113. Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 2 5 Overview of the P220 Gigabit Switch Family Figure 2 2 Tagging Schemes 3Com LinkSwitch P220FE Multilayer P220G OpenTrunk translates VLAN tagged IEEE 802 1Q frames from one format to another including CoS OpenTrunk technology has the following features O Switch supports frame encapsulation e Identifies frame VLAN via tag e Associates frame priority O Switch supports multiple tagging formats 3Com LinkSwitch Multilayer IEEE 802 1Q e IEEE pre standard format based on 802 1Q draft document e A major vendor s multi layer tagging scheme e 3Com VLAN Tag and PACE priority signalling O Switch supports translation to and from any format A packet can enter the switch with a 3Com SuperStack II VLAN tag and exit the switch as a multi layer tagged packet Figure 2 3 2 6 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Overview of the P220 Gigabit Switch Family Figure 2 3 Trunking Translation Trunking Translation 3Com or 802 3 with valid CRC T a 2 2 3 is saan Format fig E Clear IEEE o o 802 10 w Frame Format Multilayer OD Normal Ethernet frp gt a ou ou Multilayer 3Com Dual Layer Spanning Trees Spanning trees are an IEEE 802 1 standard which provides distributed routing over multiple LANs connected by bridges There are three spanning t
114. Cajun P550 Switch Modules The Layer 2 and Layer 3 supervisor and media modules implement wire speed routing and bridging in Application Specific Integrated Circuits ASICs One set of ASICs supports a gigabit per second s worth of traffic any combination of Layer 2 and Layer 3 The routing and bridging ASICs can process 1 5 million packets per second which is just slightly more than a gigabit s worth of minimum sized Ethernet frames Note All Layer 3 modules interoperate with the Layer 2 modules Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 1 15 Cajun P550 Switch Overview 1 16 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 2 Overview of the P220 Gigabit Switch Family The information in this chapter applies to both the P220G and P220FE switches unless specified otherwise Overview The P220 switch family supports the requirements of the next wave of networking O O O O More bandwidth Elimination of bottlenecks Better manageability Dependable multimedia support The P220 switch family offers an unrivaled combination of capacity and Class of Service Quality of Service CoS QoS features The system satisfies the demanding requirements of the bandwidth starved campus backbone and high performance workgroup environments The P220G switch has the following features O O Seven fixed gigabit speed Ethernet ports Optional Expander module e Four 10 100BaseBase TX ports autosensing e Two 100Base FX
115. Click CREATE The Add OSPF Area dialog box opens 3 Use Table 9 2 to configure your new OSPF area Table 9 2 OSPF Area Parameters Parameter Allows you to Select Select the OSPF area to be configured Note This parameter is displayed in the OSPF Area dialog box not in the Add OSPF Area dialog box Area ID Specify the Area ID 32 bit character for the new area This must be a unique ID within AS Note Do not use 0 0 0 0 as an area ID Area Type Select the type of area Types include e Non Stub Non edge device router e Stub An edge device router that does not leak external advertisements e Not so stubby This is still a stub area however this device router can leak some external advertisements Translate 7 into 5 Select to enable or disable the translation of the NSSA ASE Type 7 into an AS External LSA Type 5 Stub Metric Specify the stub area default summary cost metric Default is 1 Type 3 ASE Filter Select to enable or disable the Type 3 summary LSA filter for Stub and NSSA only 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Deleting OSPF Areas To delete an OSPF area 1 In the OSFP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Areas The OSPF Areas dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 9 3 Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 2 Select the OSPF area to be removed 3 Click DELETE The OS
116. E For entities that are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address IP Forward Datagrams Number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final IP destination as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination In entities which do not act as IP Gateways this counter will include only those packets which were Source Routed via this entity and the Source Route option processing was successful Note This is routed by the supervisor in the software IP In Unknown Protocols Number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers Such errors may include bad checksums version number mismatches other format errors time to live exceeded errors discovered in processing their IP options IP In Discards Number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing but which were discarded for example for lack of buffer space Note This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re assembly IP In Delivers Total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user protocols including Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP IP Out Requests Total number of IP datagrams that local IP user protocols including ICMP supplied to IP in requests for trans
117. GMP Servers column click the number The LGMP Server Display per VLAN opens 15 14 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 3 Use Table 15 10 to configure the LGMP server display per VLAN Table 15 10 LGMP Server Display per VLAN Parameters Parameter Definition Select Select the LGMP server to modify VLAN Displays the VLAN associated with the LGMP server State Displays the current state of the LGMP server Distributor The LGMP server serves LGMP messages to LGMP clients Non Distributor The LGMP server monitors the current distributor LGMP Message e Router Report Displays the number of LGMP router Reception Statistics report messages received per VLAN e Invalid Displays the number of LGMP messages received with an invalid payload per VLAN LGMP Messages e Report Displays the number of LGMP report Transmission Statistics messages transmitted per VLAN e Leave Displays the number of LGMP leave messages transmitted per VLAN e End Session Displays the number of LGMP end session messages transmitted per VLAN e Router Report Displays the number of LGMP router report messages transmitted per VLAN e Router Leave Displays the number of LGMP router leave messages transmitted per VLAN Intelligent Multicast Client Ports Added Displays the number of add Session Statistics client events generated by LGMP per VLAN
118. H to update your system configuration Or Click CLEAR to reset all configuration parameters to zero Monitoring the Forwarding Cache Statistics Monitoring the forwarding cache statistics includes O Displaying Frame Fowarding Statistics O Searching the Routing Cache for an Entry Displaying Frame Fowarding Statistics The frame forwarding statistics indicate the performance of each of the multilayer media modules in respect to Layer 3 routing and forwarding To display the frame forwarding statistics 1 In the L3 Forwarding Cache section of the Web Agent window click Forwarding Statistics The Frame Forwarding Statistics dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 11 3 Monitoring and Configuring the Forwarding Cache Layer 3 2 Use Table 11 3 to review the forwarding statistics Table 11 3 Forwarding Statistical Parameters Parameter FIRE Fabric Port Defines the Fabric port associated with the Layer 3 module The switch has 13 fabric ports Each module slot uses two fabric ports with the exception of the supervisor module slot which uses one fabric port Hence the supervisor module slot uses fabric port 1 the next media module slot uses fabric ports 2 and 3 and so on L3 Total T2 Total number of frames received on the fabric port L3 Frame Cache Hits Number of packets received on the fabric port that were successfully matched against existing forwarding entries in t
119. In the IGMP Display section of the Web Agent window click Group Membership Table The IGMP Group Membership Table dialog box opens 2 To modify your IGMP group membership table perform one of the following e Select the entry and click Delete Entry to delete one or more entries e Click Flush Table to clear the entire table e Click REFRESH to receive the most up to date information on the entries in the table 3 Use Table 7 17 to review the IGMP Group Membership information Table 7 17 IGMP Group Membership Table Parameters Parameter Defines the Group Member Interface Interface that is connected to a member of IGMP group Group Address Group address that has members on this interface Group Created On Time at which the group was created on the router Group Multicast Protocol Routing protocol being used for the group If no routing protocol is being used on the interface a group is on this column displays IGMP 7 30 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Table 7 17 IGMP Group Membership Table Parameters Continued Parameter Defines the Group Reporter Address IP address of the host that sent the most recent host membership report for this group Entry Expiration Period Expiration time in seconds of the group that is being in sec displayed Displaying the IGMP Local Multicast Forwarding Cache To display the multicast forwarding
120. LAN in Chapter 7 Specify how the router will communicate with other routers Refer to Assigning IP Interfaces to the VLAN in Chapter 7 to configure OSPF and RIP parameters Configuring System Information The System Information section of the Web Agent allows you to configure general system information and settings such as O n 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 Entering General System Information Enabling SNTP Setting Summer Time Hours Displaying the Power System Statistics Displaying Cooling System Statistics Configuring Redundant Hardware Performing a System Reset Viewing Your Running Configuration Viewing Your Startup Configuration Viewing Your Script Execution Log File Copying Configuration Files Copying Files 3 32 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Entering General System Information The system allows you to enter general system identification information from the Web Agent Use these fields to uniquely identify each switch O Switch name O Device location O Device contact To change these values 1 In the System Information section of the Web Agent window click General The System Information dialog box opens Figure 3 6 Figure 3 6 General System Information Dialog Box System Information Lucent Technologies Cajun Switch Agent Y 4 0 0 Name cajun Location Location Not Set Contact system Administrator Ac
121. Layer 3 Table 10 7 AppleTalk Route Table Parameters Continued Parameter Definition Interface Displays the Appletalk interface associated with the route table entry Zones Displays the zones associated with the selected AppleTalk route 3 Click Delete Entries to remove selected route table entries Or Click Flush Route Table to empty the route table of all dynamic entries Static and Local entries are not flushed Viewing AppleTalk Route Table Statistics To view AppleTalk route table statistics 1 In the AppleTalk Display section of the Web Agent window click Route Table Statistics The AppleTalk Route Table Statistics dialog box opens 2 Use Table 10 8 for more information on AppleTalk route table statistics Table 10 8 AppleTalk Route Table Statistical Parameters Current Number of Routes Displays the current number of AppleTalk routes Peak Number of Routes Displays the peak number of AppleTalk routes Viewing the AppleTalk ARP Cache Table To view the AppleTalk ARP cache table 1 In the AppleTalk Display section of the Web Agent window click ARP Table The AppleTalk ARP Cache Table dialog box opens 2 Use Table 10 9 for more information on AppleTalk ARP cache table statistics Table 10 9 AppleTalk ARP Cache Table Statistical Parameters Select Select the table entry to be acted upon Network Range Displays the network range Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide
122. MP querier interface DVMRP interface statistical parameters 7 33 IGMP snooping 15 2 configuring 15 11 IGMP snooping parameters enable state 15 12 intelligent multicast session statistics 15 12 new client ports added 15 12 new router ports added 15 12 new sessions created 15 12 router ports removed 15 12 sessions destroyed 15 12 IGMP version IGMP interface parameters 7 17 IGMP interface statistical parameters 7 29 in max hops exceeded IPX global parameters 4 10 inbound traffic 17 8 index address forwarding table parameters 14 5 AppleTalk NBP table parameters 10 17 AppleTalk zone table statistics 10 16 info protocol event log settings 16 5 ingress rules VLAN operation 12 1 initial hash table size VLAN configuration parameters 12 4 installing redundant controllers 3 42 instance IDs configuring 14 2 Index 15 intelligent multicast 15 3 15 10 15 12 15 14 15 15 15 17 15 18 session search 15 7 intelligent multicast global configuration parameters 15 5 intelligent multicast session search parameters client port 15 7 IP subnet 15 7 MAC address 15 7 session type 15 7 VLAN 15 7 intelligent multicast session statistics CGMP snooping parameters 15 18 IGMP snooping 15 12 LGMP client configuration parameters 15 16 LGMP client display per VLAN parameters 15 17 LGMP server configuration parameters 15 14 LGMP server display per VLAN parameters 15 15 intelligent multicasting 15 1 15 3 15 4 15 6 i
123. Max Advertisement Interval sec field for the selected interface delete the default value and enter the maximum time interval that passes before the host contacts the switch In the Advertisement Life Time sec field delete the default value and enter the duration in seconds of the IRDP advertisement Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings 10 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Global Configuration The IP Global Configuration dialog box opens 11 From the IP Multicast Forwarding pull down menu select Enable 12 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 47 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Adding an IRDP Interface To add an IRDP interface 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click IRDP The ICMP Router Discovery Protocol dialog box opens Click Add The Add IRDP dialog box opens From the Interface pull down menu select the interface In the Router Address field enter the IP address of the router for which you create an IRDP interface In the Preference field enter a value that indicates the preference of the address as a default router address The default is 0 Click CREATE to create the new IRDP interface or CANCEL to restore previous settings Deleting an IRDP Interface To delete an IRDP interface 1 In the IP Configuration sec
124. Message Transmission Statistics Definition Parameter e Report Displays the number of LGMP report messages transmitted e Leave Displays the number of LGMP leave messages transmitted e End Session Displays the number of LGMP end session messages transmitted e Router Report Displays the number of LGMP router report messages transmitted e Router Leave Displays the number of LGMP router leave messages transmitted Intelligent Multicast Session Statistics 3 Click e Client Ports Added Displays the number of add client events generated by LGMP e Client Ports Removed Displays the number of remove client events generated by LGMP e Sessions Removed Displays the number of remove session events generated by LGMP e Router Ports Added Displays the number of add router events generated by LGMP e Router Ports Removed Displays the number of remove router events generated by LGMP e APPLY to save your changes e CANCEL to restore previous settings e CLEAR to clear the statistics e REFRESH to refresh the contents of the table Modifying the LGMP Server Display per VLAN To modify the LGMP server display per VLAN 1 In the Intelligent Multicasting section of the Web Agent window click LGMP Server The LGMP Server Configuration dialog box opens Note You must enable intelligent multicasting on a global basis to make your LGMP server per VLAN configuration active 2 In the L
125. Modules in Chapter 1 Minimum IP Routing Configuration Requirements The configuration process for the Cajun P550 Switch with integrated routing has the following minimum requirements for using IP routing O IP routing must be globally enabled O Atleast one routing protocol must be enabled RIP OSPF if communication between routers is necessary Determine which interfaces need to have IP routing enabled If you plan to expand your current network create VLANs subnets to address your network configuration O Assign an IP address subnet mask routing protocol and multicast routing protocol to each IP interface you configure Routing Configuration Quickstart This section provides an overview of the LAN router configuration operation For more information on these configuration steps see the sections referenced after each step Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 31 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 To configure the switch as a LAN router 1 2 Create a IP interface for each subnet Refer to Creating and Implementing VLANs in Chapter 12 Create or assign a VLAN to the IP interface Refer to Assigning IP Interfaces to the VLAN in Chapter 7 Bind ports to the VLANs assigned to the IP interfaces Refer to Viewing Switch Port Parameters earlier in this chapter Assign an IP address and subnet mask to the VLAN Refer to Assigning IP Interfaces to the V
126. Options include e Learned Management Self e Multicast Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Managing Address Forwarding Tables Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Adding Entries to the Address Forwarding Table Manually Adding entries manually is useful when you want to ensure the address forwarding table entries remain permanently To add an address manually 1 au fF Ww 8 Permanent The address is saved in nonvolatile memory and is In the Address Forwarding Table section of the Web Agent window click Entry Configuration The Static Address Configuration dialog box opens In the MAC Address Value field enter the MAC address that you want to add to the table From the VLAN pull down menu select a VLAN for this entry From the Port Binding pull down menu select to forward or filter this port In the Port Binding field enter the port that you want associated with this entry From the Priority pull down menu select a priority level for packets forward to this MAC address High priority addresses move to the front of the switch packet buffers automatically Use Table 14 3 for configuring the persistence parameter Table 14 3 Entry Persistence Parameter Definition not aged out of the table Ageout Address is cleared from the address forwarding table when the timeout interval expires This is the state of all entries dynamically learned by the switch It ensures that MAC addresses that are not act
127. P DHCP relay agent 7 4 high preference static routes 7 5 intra area routes 7 5 IP multicast forwarding 7 4 IP routing 7 4 IP source routing 7 4 limit proxy ARP to same network 7 4 local routes 7 5 low preference static routes 7 5 maximum number of ARP cache entries 7 4 maximum number of routes 7 4 OSPF external routes 7 5 OSPF inter area routes 7 5 RIP routes 7 5 route preference by protocol 7 5 use default route for proxy ARP 7 4 VRRP 7 4 IP global routing configuring 7 4 IP global routing statistics displaying 7 21 IP helper address 7 51 deleting 7 52 modifying 7 52 IP helper address parameters BOOTP client 7 51 BOOTP server 7 51 DNS 7 51 helper address 7 51 interface 7 51 NETBIOS date service 7 51 TACACS 7 51 TFTP 7 51 TIME 7 51 IP helper address parametersNETBIOS name service 7 51 IP in address errors IP routing global statistics 7 22 IP in delivers IP routing global statistics 7 22 IP in discards IP routing global statistics 7 22 IP in header errors IP routing global statistics 7 21 IP in receives IP routing global statistics 7 21 IP in unknown protocols IP routing global statistics 7 22 IP interface creating 7 2 IP interface access list rules creating 7 9 Index 17 IP interface access lists configuring 7 8 IP interface parameters admin state 7 6 ICMP redirect 7 6 interface 7 6 IP routing 7 6 MAC format 7 6 mask 7 6 multicast protocol 7
128. P Routing Table O Examining the IP Routing Table Statistics O Searching the IP ARP Cache Displaying Global IP Routing Statistics Note IP routing global statistics only represent traffic processed by the supervisor module software To display the global IP routing statistics 1 In the IP Display section of the Web Agent window click Global Statistics The IP Routing Global Statistics dialog box opens 2 Click Refresh to update all statistics Or Click Clear to set all statistics to zero 3 Use Table 7 11 to review the definition of each statistic Table 7 11 P Routing Global Statistics Statistic Defines the IP In Receives Total number of input datagrams received from interfaces including those received in error IP In Header Errors Number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers including bad checksums version number mismatch other format errors time to live exceeded errors discovered in processing their IP options Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 21 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Table 7 11 P Routing Global Statistics Continued Statistic IP In Address Errors Defines the Number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity This count includes invalid addresses for example 0 0 0 0 and addresses of unsupported Classes for example Class
129. P downstream interface 7 41 interface is pruned 7 42 interface type 7 41 prune expiration 7 42 source subnetwork 7 41 DVMRP downstream links 7 41 DVMRP downstream routers viewing 7 38 DVMRP global statistical parameters graft acknowledgments received 7 32 graft acknowledgments transmitted 7 32 graft messages received 7 32 graft messages transmitted 7 32 probe message received 7 32 probe messages transmitted 7 32 prune messages received 7 32 prune messages transmitted 7 32 report messages received 7 32 report messages transmitted 7 32 unknown messages codes encountered 7 32 DVMRP interface modifying 7 19 DVMRP interface parameters interface 7 20 interface metric 7 20 interface scope 7 20 interface type 7 20 IP address 7 20 IP address mask 7 20 tunnel endpoint address 7 20 DVMRP interface statistical parameters address mask 7 33 IGMP querier interface 7 33 interface 7 33 invalid routes received 7 34 metric 7 33 neighbor DVMRP routers 7 34 network address 7 33 next probe message in sec 7 33 state 7 33 type 7 33 unrecognized packets received 7 34 DVMRP interface statistics examining 7 33 DVMRP multicast forwarding cache displaying 7 39 DVMRP multicast forwarding cache parameters destination group address 7 40 downstream interface 7 40 invalid flows from upstream 7 40 next pruned downstream interface to timeout 7 40 packets forwarded t
130. P unicast The default is 255 255 255 255 7 46 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Parameter Definition Min Advertisement The minimum time in seconds allowed between sending Interval sec unsolicited multicast router advertisements from the Table 7 33 CMP Router Discovery Protocol Parameters interface This value must be no less than three seconds and no greater than the Max Advertisement Interval The default is 0 75 times the maximum interval Max Advertisement Enter the maximum time in seconds allowed between Interval sec sending multicast router advertisements sent from the interface This value must be no less than four seconds and no greater than 1800 seconds The default value is 1800 8 9 seconds Advertisement Life The time in seconds of the lifetime of the router Time sec advertisements sent from the interface This value must be no less than the maximum advertisement interval and no greater than 9000 seconds The default value is three times the maximum advertisement interval From the IRDP State pull down menu for the selected interface select Enable From the Adv Address pull down menu for the selected interface select Multicast In the Min Advertisement Interval sec field for the selected interface delete the default value and enter the minimum time interval that passes before the host contacts the switch In the
131. P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Parameter Route Preference by Protocol Table 7 2 P Global Configuration Parameters Continued Allows you to Describe the routing preferences set up according to the network administrator s preferences These preferences are normally set up using a system based on the most to least trust For example local routes are normally considered to have more trust or a higher preference while OSPF external routes are considered to have less trust or a lower preference These preferences can be overridden but careful consideration must be given to how the preferences are set up Local Routes Specify a preference value for local routes High Preference Static Routes Specify a preference value for high level static routes OSPF Intra area Routes Specify an OSPF intra area route A lower number indicates a lower preference for the path OSPF Inter area Routes Specify inter area paths to destinations in other OSPF areas These are discovered through the examination of received summary Link State Advertisements LSA Enter a number to specify your path cost A lower number indicates a lower preference for the path OSPF External Routes Specify AS external paths to destinations external to the Autonomous System These are detected through the examination of received AS external LSAs Enter a number to specify your path cost preference
132. P550 Cajun Switch Overview Provides an overview of your P550 switch and theory of operation Chapter 2 P220 Cajun Switch Family Overview Provides an overview of your P220G or P220FE switch and theory of operation Chapter 3 Configuring the Cajun Switch Explains how to perform the initial configuration of your switch create users and configure ports Chapter 4 Configuring IPX Routing Explains how to configure IPX routing and interpret IPX statistics Chapter 5 Configuring IPX RIP Protocol Explains how to configure IPX RIP Chapter 6 Configuring IPX SAP Protocol Explains how to configure IPX SAP Chapter 7 Configuring IP Routing Explains how to configure your switch for IP routing and interpret IP routing statistics Chapter 8 Configuring RIP Routing Explains how to configure your switch for RIP routing Chapter 9 Configuring the OSPF Protocol Explains how to configure Open Shortest Path First OSPF on your Cajun Switch In addition this chapter also provides information on OSPF statistical displays Chapter 10 Configuring AppleTalk Explains how to configure AppleTalk parameters and view AppleTalk statistics Chapter 11 Monitoring and Configuring the Forwarding Cache L3 Only Explains how to interpret and monitor forwarding operations that occur in the address cache of the multilayer media modules Chapter 12 Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Provides detailed in
133. P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 43 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 4 Shut down the switch WARNING Before replacing switch controllers or elements you must turn off the switch Replace the failed primary controller by inserting it in the slot to the right of the redundant controller and to the left of element three See Figure 3 7 Restart the switch and login In the System Information section of the Web Agent click Switch Fabric The Switch Fabric Status dialog box displays From the Configure Redundant Hardware pull down menu select Yes Click APPLY to enable the redundant controller The Switch Controller field displays 1 Active to show that the redundant controller is now enabled 10 In the Toggle Active Controller field click Toggle to restore control to the primary controller The Switch Controller field displays 0 Active to show that the primary controller is now enabled Replacing an Element If an element fails you are notified by a console message and an event log message In the Web Agent the Switch Elements field displays Failed lt number gt where lt number gt is the number that indicates the failed element To configure the redundant element 1 In the System Information section of the Web Agent window click Switch Fabric The Switch Fabric Status dialog box displays From the Configure Redundant Hardware pull down menu select No Click Apply to dis
134. PF area is removed Modifying OSPF Areas To modify an OSPF area 1 In the OSFP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Areas The OSPF Areas dialog box opens 2 Select the OSPF area to be modified 3 Use Table 9 2 to modify your configuration 4 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Modifying OSPF Interfaces To modify an OSPF interface 1 In the OSPF Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Interfaces The OSPF Interfaces dialog box opens Note If OSPF is not enabled for your existing IP interfaces VLANs you must first enable OSPF before you can modify OSPF interfaces Refer to Configuring IP Interfaces in Chapter 7 for more information on how to enable OSPF on IP interfaces 2 Use Table 9 3 to determine how to modify your OSPF interfaces Table 9 3 OSPF Interface Parameters Parameter Definition Select Select the OSPF interface to be modified Interface Displays IP interface VLAN that has OSPF enabled Note This is a read only field IP Address Displays IP address associated with the OSPF interface Note This is a read only field Area Enter the area ID configured for this interface DR Priority Enter the decimal value for this interface for DR priority functionality Transit Delay Enter the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over this interface 9 4 Cajun P550 P220 S
135. PF link parameters 9 10 BDR choice OSPF neighbors parameters 9 12 bind to all Virtual LAN binding options 3 17 bind to received Virtual LAN binding options 3 17 binding options Virtual LANs 3 17 binding type VLAN switch port table parameters 12 5 blocking state spanning tree bridge port 12 10 BOOTP client IP helper address parameters 7 51 BOOTP relay agent 7 15 BOOTP server IP helper address parameters 7 51 BOOTP DHCP in discards IP routing global statistics 7 24 BOOTP DHCP in hops exceeded IP routing global statistics 7 24 BOOTP DHCP in requests IP routing global statistics 7 24 BOOTP DHCP in responses IP routing global statistics 7 24 BOOTP DHCP out requests IP routing global statistics 7 25 BOOTP DHCP out responses IP routing global statistics 7 25 BOOTP DHCP relay agent IP global configuration parameters 7 4 border Rtrs OSPF statistical parameters 9 9 bridge forward delay spanning tree bridge level parameters 12 9 bridge hello time spanning tree bridge level parameters 12 8 bridge max age spanning tree bridge level parameters 12 8 bridge port spanning tree bridge port parameters 12 9 bridge port parameters bridge port 12 9 designated bridge 12 10 designated cost 12 10 designated port 12 10 designated root 12 10 forward transitions 12 10 name 12 9 port 12 9 state 12 10 bridge ports configuring 12 9 bridge status event class parameters 16 8 broadcast packet
136. PLY 1 APPLY 2 Low Warning fo 0 o Temperature DEFAULTS A 16 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Monitoring the Cajun Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 2 Use Table 16 2 to set the threshold values Table 16 2 Temperature Thresholds Threshold Defines High Shutdown Value in degrees Celsius that when passed causes the switch to Temperature Layer 2 High send a trap to the network management station and triggers a Warning Temperature shutdown By default this value is 50 degrees Celsius For the Layer 3 Layer 3 CPU sensor the default value is 100 degrees Celsius Upper Warning Value in degrees Celsius that when passed causes the switch to Temperature send a warning that the temperature is approaching the high temperature threshold By default this value is 45 degrees Celsius For the Layer 3 CPU sensor the default value is 85 degrees Celsius Lower Warning Value that in degrees Celsius that when passed causes the switch Temperature to send a warning that the temperature is approaching the low temperature threshold By default this value is 5 degrees Celsius Low Shutdown How low the temperature must drop on the switch to reset the Temperature Layer 2 Low warning and high thresholds This value prevents the switch Warning Temperature from sending traps continually if the temperature is hovering Layer 3 around the threshold value By default this value is O degrees Ce
137. Route Table earlier in this chapter If available routes are found they are displayed in the IPX Route Table dialog box 2 Use Table 4 8 to review your configuration Table 4 8 IPX Route Table Parameters Parameter Defines the Select Parameter selected Network Network number in hex of the IPX network in question Interface Interface associated with the IPX network Source Method by which the network was learned For example RIP local or Static TTL Number of seconds before the route expires Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 4 11 Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 Table 4 8 PX Route Table Parameters Continued Parameter Defines the Ticks Amount of time in ticks that the packet takes to reach the network number you specified A tick is approximately 1 18th of a second Hops Number of routers hops that the packet must pass through before reaching the network number associated with the IPX network Next Hop MAC MAC address of the next destination through which the network is Address reached Examining IPX Route Table Statistics To examine your IPX route table statistics 1 In the IPX Display section of the Web Agent window click Route Table Statistics The IPX Routing Table Statistics dialog box opens 2 Use Table 4 9 to review each statistic Table 4 9 PX Route Table Statistics Statistic Definition Current Number of Indicates the current
138. Table 6 3 IPX SAP Network Filter Parameters Parameter Allows you to Select Select the IPX interface Note This field is displayed in the IPX SAP Net Filter dialog box not in the Add IPX SAP Net Filter dialog box Interface Select the interface to which this filter will be applied to SAP packets sent and or received on the interface Precedence Specify the filter precedence in order of importance with Oequal to most important Note All SAP filters on the same interface must be assigned a unique filter precedence Net Specify the network on which the server resides A network number of ffffffff represents all networks Type Specify the service type in hex that identifies the type of service the server provides Well known service types include e Unknown 0 e Print Queue 3 e File Server 4 Job Server 5 e Print Server 7 e Archive Server 9 Remote Bridge Server 24 e Advertising Print Server 47 e NetWare Directory Services 278 A value of ffff matches all service type values Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 6 5 Configuring IPX SAP Protocol Layer 3 Table 6 3 IPX SAP Network Filter Parameters Continued Parameter Direction Allows you to Select the direction of the filter in question Filter choices include e Inbound Applies the filter only to SAP packets received on the interface e Outbound Applies the filter only to SAP packets se
139. Talk global statistics 10 12 TTY console configuration Layer 2 and Layer 3 3 24 TTY console settings baud rate 3 25 data bits 3 25 flow control 3 25 parity 3 25 stop bits 3 25 tunnel endpoint address DVMRP interface parameters 7 20 TX LED behavior 16 1 type AppleTalk ARP cache table statistics 10 16 AppleTalk NBP filter parameters 10 8 AppleTalk NBP table parameters 10 17 AppleTalk static route 10 6 AppleTalk zone filter parameters 10 10 DVMRP interface statistical parameters 7 33 event and shutdown log entries 16 6 forwarding cache FE parameters 11 6 IPX SAP filter parameters 6 3 IPX SAP network filter parameters 6 5 IPX service table parameter 4 14 IPX static service parameter 4 8 LSA detail 9 15 multicast session parameters 15 8 OSPF link parameters 9 10 OSPF link state database parameter 9 14 OSPF link state database search parameters 9 13 power system statistical parameters 3 40 type network LSA detail 9 16 type 20 packet propagation IPX interface 4 6 type 3 ASE filter OSPF area parameters 9 3 U UDP in datagrams IP routing global statistics 7 24 UDP in errors IP routing global statistics 7 24 UDP out datagrams IP routing global statistics 7 24 undersize packets Ethernet interface statistical parameters 17 4 unknown messages codes encountered DVMRP global statistical parameters 7 32 unknown messages received IGMP global statistic parameters 7 28 IGMP interface statistical p
140. Up Networking The Dial Up Networking dialog box opens Note You must have dial up networking installed on your PC Double click Make New Connection to configure your modem The Make New Connection wizard opens In the Type a name for the computer you are dialing field enter a connection name for the computer you are dialing From the Select a Modem pull down menu select your modem and click Configure The Modem Properties dialog box opens Click the Connection tab The Connection tab opens In Connection preferences select the following e From the Data bits pull down menu select 8 e From the Parity pull down menu select None From the Stop bits pull down menu select 1 Click Advanced The Advanced Connection Settings dialog box opens In Use flow control click Software XON XOFF Click OK to close the dialog box The Modem Properties dialog box re opens 10 Click the Optionstab The Option tab opens 11 In Connection control click Bring up terminal window after dialing and click OK The Modem Properties dialog box closes and the wizard continues 12 In the wizard dialog box click Next and enter the telephone number you are calling 13 Click Next The wizard reports that you have successfully configured a modem 3 28 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 14 Click Finish The wizard closes and the newly configured connection display
141. VMRP upstream routers 1 In the DVMRP Display section of the Web Agent window click Route Table The DVMRP Route Table dialog box opens 2 In the Upstream Router s column for the appropriate source network click the number to view information on the upstream routers The Upstream Router s dialog box opens 3 Use Table 7 24 for more information on Upstream Router s Table 7 24 DVMRP Upstream Router s Parameter Definition Router Network Displays the router network address Address Router Cost to Source Displays the cost metric Network Found on Interface Displays the interface on which the upstream router was found Displaying the DVMRP Designated Forwarder s Table To view the DVMRP Designated Forwarder table 1 In the DVMRP Display section of the Web Agent window click Route Table The DVMRP Route Table dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 37 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 2 In the Designated Forwarder column for the appropriate source network click the number to view information on the designated forwarder The Designated Forwarder s table opens 3 Use Table 7 25 for more information on Designated Forwarder s parameters Table 7 25 Designated Forwarder s Table Parameters Parameter Defines the Forwarding Interface Local interface which leads to the network where the Designated Forwarder resides Forwarder Network Address Designated Forwarder f
142. able the failed element Shut down the switch WARNING Before replacing switch controllers or elements you must turn off the 5 6 switch Replace the failed element by inserting it into the appropriate slot See Figure 3 7 Restart the switch and login 3 44 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 7 In the System Information section of the Web Agent window click Switch Fabric The Switch Fabric Status dialog box displays 8 From the Configure Redundant Hardware pull down menu select Yes and click APPLY to enable the redundant element The Switch Elements field displays Normal 0 to show that the redundant element is now enabled 9 From the Enable Redundant Element pull down menu select Normal and click APPLY The Switch Element field displays Normal 0 to show that the replaced element is now enabled Performing a System Reset To perform a system reset 1 In the System Information section of the Web Agent window click System Reset The System Reset Page dialog box opens 2 Click Save to save your running configuration to the startup configuration before performing a system reset 3 Click Yesto reset the switch or No to cancel the operation Managing Configuration Files You can manage the system files that contain the configuration data for your Cajun P550 switch When you first install the switch or upgrade from a previous i
143. ables the helper to route the IP address of a BOOTP client The default value is Enabled TACACS Enables the helper to route passwords forwarded by the Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TACACS The default value is Enabled Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 51 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 6 Click CREATE to create the helper address or CANCEL to restore previous settings Deleting an IP Helper Address To delete an IP helper address 1 2 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent click IP Helper Address The IP Helper Address dialog box opens Select the IP helper address you want to delete and click Delete Modifying an IP Helper Address To modify an IP helper address 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent click IP Helper Address The IP Helper Address dialog box opens Select the IP helper address you want to modify Use Table 7 36 to modify the IP helper address parameters Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the RIP Routing Protocol Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures are specific to Layer 3 configuration Configuring the Switch Using the RIP Routing Protocol This section describes O Configuring RIP for the Switch Modifying RIP Interfaces O O Creating Trusted RIP Neighbors O Interpreting RIP Statistics
144. address parameters 7 51 document conventions xvii documentation feedback xiv online xiv documentation feedback xiv domain name VTP snooping parameters 3 19 down state spanning tree bridge port 12 10 downloaded image viewing 18 4 downloading image from TFTP server to an APP location 18 2 downloading image to an APP location 18 3 downstream dependent router DVMRP route table parameters 7 37 downstream interface DVMRP multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 40 downstream interfaces 7 41 IGMP local multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 31 DR address OSPF link parameters 9 10 DR choice OSPF neighbors parameters 9 12 DR priority OSPF interface parameters 9 4 OSPF neighbors parameters 9 11 DR router ID OSPF link parameters 9 10 duplex mode 10 100 port parameter 3 11 Fast Ethernet module 3 10 duplicate add attempts forwarding cache FE parameters 11 6 DVMRP configuring 7 18 displaying global statistics 7 32 modifying information 7 19 DVMRP designated forwarder table displaying 7 37 DVMRP downstream dependent router DVMRP supported major minor version 7 39 found on interface 7 39 router is SNMP manageable 7 39 router network address 7 39 router received probe from this router 7 39 router supports generation ID function 7 39 router supports prune function 7 39 DVMRP downstream interface DVMRP downstream link parameters 7 41 DVMRP downstream link parameters destination group address 7 41 DVMR
145. ageable Displays whether the router can be managed by SNMP Displaying the DVMRP Multicast Forwarding Cache The DVMRP Multicast Forwarding Cache screen provides detailed information on the multicast forwarding attributes including information on downstream interfaces and upstream sources DVMRP allows the switch to construct paths from the hosts that are sending to a multicast group to the hosts that are receiving it To display the multicast forwarding cache information 1 In the DVMRP Display section of the Web Agent window click Multicast Forwarding Cache The Multicast Forwarding Cache dialog box opens 2 Complete one of the following to modify your Multicast Forwarding Table e Select the entry and click Delete Entry to delete one or more entries e Click Flush Table to clear the entire table e Click REFRESH to receive the most up to date information on the entries in the table Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 39 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 3 Use Table 7 27 to review the DVMRP Multicast Forwarding Cache information Table 7 27 DVMRP Multicast Forwarding Cache Parameters Parameter Defines the Select Selection of the multicast forwarding cache Destination Group Destination group address of the multicast transmission Address Source SubNetwork Subnet from which the flow is coming Source Address Mask Subnet mask associated with the DVMRP source subnetwork U
146. ameter Allows you to NetBIOS UDP Configure your switch for InterVLAN forwarding of NetBIOS Rebroadcast broadcasts NetBIOS parameters include Inbound Allow the receipt of NetBIOS replies Outbound Allow the transmission of NetBIOS broadcasts e Both Allow the interface to both receive NetBIOS replies and send NetBIOS broadcasts Disable Disallow both the receipt of NetBIOS replies and the transmission of NetBIOS broadcasts VRRP Enable or disable VRRP on a given interface The default value is Disable 5 Click CREATE to save changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Note Routing is not supported on the serial interface Do not configure Routing Mgmt on serial IP interfaces IP Multinetting Using the Cajun P550 switch you set up IP multinetting a configuration of multiple subnets on a single VLAN A network is said to be multinetted Figure 7 1 when multiple logical groups of computers are brought together within a single broadcast domain To create a multinetted network you assign multiple subnets to a VLAN Figure 7 1 Multinet Diagram Ports Server 192 168 60 0 Ethernet segment A ist Cajun VLAN 192 168 10 0 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Example Creating a Multinet Interface To create a multinet interface 1 In the IP Configuration section of th
147. ameters 7 6 proxy mode LGMP server configuration parameters 15 13 prune expiration DVMRP downstream link parameters 7 42 prune expiration time upstream prune information 7 41 prune messages received DVMRP global statistical parameters 7 32 prune messages transmitted DVMRP global statistical parameters 7 32 pruning client ports router ports dynamic sessions pruning client ports 15 3 purge TTL RIP global configuration parameters 8 2 Q query messages received IGMP interface statistical parameters 7 29 query messages transmitted IGMP interface statistical parameters 7 30 query request interval IGMP interface parameters 7 17 query response interval IGMP interface parameters 7 18 30 Index queues managing 13 2 service ratio 13 1 R rate limit burst size 10 100 port parameter 3 12 rate limit mode 10 100 port parameter 3 12 rate limit rate 10 100 port parameter 3 12 read only SNMP access level 3 24 read write SNMP access level 3 24 read write with security level set to admin SNMP access level 3 24 receive new LSA count OSPF statistical parameters 9 9 receive version RIP interface parameters 8 3 recurring summer time hours configuration 3 35 redistribute hunt group configuration feature 12 13 redundant controllers installing 3 42 redundant element configuring 3 44 related documents xix remote fault detect gigabit port parameters 3 9 remote fault detection 3 8 remote monitoring
148. an Sos Se estan e he a aa T ae a a Pe Pe a 1 1 Hardware OVervieW ect bee eae Ae eee ote ie Bae hind Sa ee EN 1 1 CaSSIS a Gee oat eee eee ew eee ben bas a wets phate gate aes 1 1 MOduleS sisse enue Bad Hee Sa ded oe Pia Pk Dd Hw Sade Pa Gad ee Ssaek hee bP Eed 1 2 Layer 2 Supervisor Module mu cocina yd eas Gri Bale dt eigen 1 2 Layer 3 Supervisor Module 2 0 0 cc ee eee eens 1 3 Media Modules zst s ei fe aa ee in Gee Aa lene tn wee at eee Pe ee ee eee ee ete De 1 4 Layer 3 and Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Modules 0 0 cece eee eee eens 1 4 Layer 3 and Layer 2 Gigabit Speed Modules 0 0 cece eee eee eee 1 5 Cajun 2550 S witch Features vu na A bal ae bes a eae Pees 1 5 Crossbar Switch Fabric voii eek kha nas Pinte Pe a are de a oe eos 1 6 Cama ROUNE OVEIVIEW lend Gs wala Wea eal a be a ae A A Ee a S 1 7 Compatibility with the Layer 2 Switch 0 0 0 cece eee 1 7 Routing with Layer 2 and Layer 3 Modules 0 0 cee eee eens 1 7 Virtual Bridging Functions 0 enna 1 8 VEAN BUD CUOUS 405 BE ed eee E CR OE Bare hee ee 1 9 FLUTE GTOUPS Ghanaa A ee oad Bal Geese SO Bala Ueda Pia Sad Be Sasi De Dea a ex 1 10 OpenIrunk Technology seners eide s a yh ets eae See aa a 1 11 Spanning Tree Models ira a dat aed 1 12 Extensive Fault Toll ti A A A a 1 13 Buffer and Queue Management 0 0 nents 1 14 Web Based Management 0 0 cece eee eee eee 1 14 Cajun P550 P220 Swit
149. arameters 7 30 unrecognized packets received DVMRP interface statistical parameters 7 34 UPD in no ports IP routing global statistics 7 24 update pkt delay RIP global configuration parameters 8 2 update timer RIP global configuration parameters 8 1 update timestamp VTP snooping parameters 3 19 updater identity VTP snooping parameters 3 19 updater time stamp VLAN exchange parameters 3 19 updates received IPX RIP interface statistical parameters 5 6 IPX SAP interface statistical parameters 6 8 RIP statistical parameters 8 4 upgrading from a previous version of software 18 1 upper warning temperature temperature threshold parameter 16 3 upstream interface DVMRP multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 40 IGMP local multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 31 upstream interface is pruned 7 40 DVMRP multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 40 upstream neighbor router address DVMRP multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 40 upstream prune information destination group address 7 41 DVMRP upstream interface 7 41 interface is pruned 7 41 interface type 7 41 prune expiration time 7 41 source subnetwork 7 41 upstream router DVMRP route table parameters 7 37 upstream source IGMP local multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 31 upstream sources 7 42 DVMRP multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 40 use default route use default route 4 4 use default route for proxy ARP IP global configuration parameters 7 4 us
150. art number 4 In the Network Range End field enter the new network range end number 5 In the Network Number field enter the new network number of the next hop for the static route 6 In the Node field enter the new node number of the next hop for the static route 7 In the Type field enter the type to be associated with the static route 8 Click Edit Zone to edit the AppleTalk zone for this static route The Edit AppleTalk Zone dialog box opens 9 In the Add text field enter the new AppleTalk zone network range and click Add 10 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Deleting an AppleTalk Static Route To delete an AppleTalk static route 1 In the AppleTalk Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Static Route The AppleTalk Interfaces dialog box opens 2 Select the AppleTalk static route to be deleted 3 Click DELETE to remove the AppleTalk static route Creating an AppleTalk NBP Filter The Name Binding Protocol NBP performs a conversion from named AppleTalk entities to their AppleTalk protocol addresses Multiple names can exist for the same entity alias NBP also performs O Name registration Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 10 7 Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 O Name deletion O Name lookup O Name confirmation NBP allows you to bind a name to the internal storage address for your entity and register this mapping so that oth
151. ased HTTP server the Element Management System Text in is the default answer for each questions To accept the default press ENTER Would you like to change the super user password Yes Y Old Password XXXX ew Password XXXX Re type New Password XXXX User password changed succesfully What do you want the switch manager s console Ethernet IP Address to be 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 What is the subnet mask for your network s IP address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 What is the IP address of the default gateway for this network segment 0 0 0 0 You can now connect to the switch using the front panel out of band 10Base T connection This allows you to log in using either th mbedded web agent or the EMS See the Installation and Operation guides for instruction on establishing additional IP network connections Connect to the system with an out of band connection using the 10Base T port on the supervisor module front panel for Layer 2 or 10 100Base T port on the supervisor module for Layer 3 Figure 3 2 Cajun P550 Switch Attach serial port cable here Attach Ethernet cable here 3 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 3 2 Pinouts for 10Base T Crossover Patch Cables Pin Color Pin Color 1 WO 3 WG 2 O
152. ass of service types 3Com PACE CoS IEEE 802 1p CoS Layer 3 and Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Modules The Layer 2 L2 and Layer 3 L3 Fast Ethernet modules include O 20 Port 10 100Base TX Ethernet Module L2 support with 20 RJ 45 Ports 10 100 HDX FDX O 10 Port 100Base FX Ethernet Module L2 support with 10 Fast Ethernet Ports Fiber 1300 nM HDX FDX 1 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Cajun P550 Switch Overview O 12 Port 10 100Base TX Ethernet Module L2 L3 support with 12 RJ 45 Ports 10 100 HDX FDX O 10 Port 100Base FX Ethernet Module L2 L3 support with 10 Fast Ethernet Ports Fiber 1300 nM HDX FDX O 48 Port 10 100Base TX Ethernet Module L3 support with 48 RJ 71 Ports 10 100 HDX FDX Layer 3 and Layer 2 Gigabit Speed Modules The Layer 2 L2 and Layer 3 L3 Gigabit Ethernet modules include O 2 Port O 2 Port O 2 Port optics 4 Port 2 Port 2 Port Full Duplex 1000Base SX module L2 support 850 nM optics Full Duplex 1000Base LX module L2 support 1300 nM optics Full Duplex 1000Base SLX module L2 support 10 Km with 1300nM Full Duplex 1000Base SX F module L2 support 850 nM optics Full Duplex 1000Base SX F module L2 L3 support 850 nM optics Full Duplex 1000Base LX F module L2 L3 support 1300 nM optics Cajun P550 Switch Features The section includes Crossbar Switch Fabric QO QO 0 0 0 l Cajun Routing Overview Virtual Bridging Functions VLAN Fun
153. assisted multicast pruning The switch only forwards to appropriate destination switch ports 1 6 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Cajun P550 Switch Overview Cajun Routing Overview The Cajun switch is an IP and IPX router with virtual interfaces Virtual interfaces are mapped to physical ports or VLANs Layer 3 IP traffic is routed between the virtual interfaces Ports become members of VLANs by assignment or by rules Multiple VLANs can share a single trunk port In contrast multiple physical ports can be associated with a single VLAN In all cases traffic that arrives and leaves the same VLAN is bridged not routed This section provides additional information that includes O Compatibility with the Layer 2 Switch O Routing with Layer 2 and Layer 3 Modules Compatibility with the Layer 2 Switch The switch is completely backwards compatible with all of the Layer 2 media modules currently supported in the Cajun switch Traffic from the Layer 2 media module is routed by sending that traffic to the routing engine on the Layer 3 supervisor module The supervisor module routes all traffic from Layer 2 media modules in software as described in the section Routing with Layer 2 and Layer 3 Modules Note Layer 2 traffic that does not require routing is bridged independently of the Layer 3 traffic based on the MAC address or VLAN information Routing with Layer 2 and Layer 3 Modules When the Cajun switch is config
154. ble instance From the Hash Table Auto Increment pull down menu select False to prevent the table size from reconfiguring automatically Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings If you want to relearn the entire table click Delete All Learned Entries If you want to delete all entries that are currently aged out click Delete All Invalid Learned Entries Note If you change the Hash Table Size the switch relearns all addresses in that table causing the switch to flood packets for a few seconds Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 14 3 Managing Address Forwarding Tables Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Searching the Switch Address Forwarding Table The Address Forwarding Table can contain more than 24 000 entries on each switch The switch Web Agent provides a utility that allows you to filter which addresses it displays making the list more manageable Multiple criteria can be selected to produce a sophisticated filter The parameters are treated as ands meaning that displayed addresses must meet all selected criteria To filter the switch address forwarding table 1 In the Address Forwarding Table section of the Web Agent window click Entry SearchTfil3 2222 0 00T c24lent4054 Olay 14 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Managing Address Forwarding Tables Layer 2 amp Layer 3 12 Use Table 14 2 to review your search criteria options Table 14 2 Address Forwarding
155. c In the Net field enter ffffffff which represents all networks d In the Type field enter 278 which represents the type for NDS Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX SAP Protocol Layer 3 From the Direction pull down menu select Inbound From the Filter Suppress pull down menu select Disable This ensures that NDS advertisements are not filtered In the Hops field enter O Entering 0 ensures that there is no override in the transmission of data on the network 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings This filter ensures that all NDS packets received are not filtered on Interface Remote Filter 2 1 In the IPX SAP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Net Filters 2 Click Create to create a new filter The Add IPX SAP Net Filter dialog box opens 3 Configure the following parameters b From the Interface pull down menu select Remote In the Precedence field enter 1 In the Net field enter ffffffff which represents all networks In the Type field enter ffff which represents all services types From the Direction pull down menu select Inbound From the Filter Suppress pull down menu select Enable In the Hops field enter O Entering 0 ensures that there is no override in the transmission of data on the network 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings This filter ensures
156. casting section of the Web Agent window click Session Search The Intelligent Multicast Session Search dialog box opens 2 Use Table 15 3 to configure your session search Table 15 3 Intelligent Multicast Session Search Parameters Parameter Display only multicast sessions IP Subnet With this IP subnet e IP Address The destination IP multicast address portion of the subnet on which to search e IP Address Mask The subnet mask portion of the subnet on which to search MAC Address That have this destination MAC address or portion of this MAC address VLAN That are on this VLAN Client Port With a client port matching this switch port Session Type Of this session type e Learned Session is dynamically learned e Mgmt Session is configured statically by the user 3 Click SEARCH to begin the search for the multicast session The Multicast Sessions dialog box opens with the search results Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 15 7 Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 4 Use Table 15 4 for more information on your multicast session search results Table 15 4 Multicast Sessions Parameters Parameter Select Definition Select the multicast session Session ID Displays the multicast session identifier MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the multicast session VLAN Displays the VLAN on which the multicast session exists
157. ce IP address of the designated router BDR Choice Interface IP address of the backup designated router Searching the OSPF Link State Database To perform a search of your OSPF link state database 1 In the OSPF Display section of the Web Agent window click Link State Database Search The Link State Database Search dialog box opens Note It is possible to select more than one item in the Search By column to help narrow your search results 2 To search by Area ID click the Area ID checkbox and specify the IP address of the Area ID that you want to find in the database and click SEARCH To search by Type click the Type checkbox and from the Type pull down menu select the type of search you want to perform and click SEARCH To search by Router ID click the Router ID checkbox and specify the router IP address and click SEARCH 9 12 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 3 Use Table 9 9 to determine the search parameters Table 9 9 OSPF Link State Database Search Parameters Parameter Allows you to perform a search ArealD For the 32 bit identifier of the area from which a LSA was received Type For all entries in the database that match one of the following types e Router Links These packets describe the states of the router s links to the area and are only flooded within a particular area e Network Links These packets are generated by De
158. ce for an Ethernet Console VLAN select Mgmt Only from the IP Routing pull down menu If you select to create an IP interface for a serial console VLAN select Mgmt Only from the IP Routing pull down menu If you create an IP interface for an inbound VLAN select Routing Mgmt from the IP Routing pull down menu Network Address Enter the network IP address for the selected interface Mask Enter the subnet mask for the interface 7 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Parameter MAC Format Table 7 1 Add IP Interface Parameters Allows you to Select the MAC address format for the interface Options include e Ethernet V2 e Simple Network Access Protocol SNAP IP Routing Select to enable or disable IP routing on the interface Options include e Routing Mgmt Enables you to manage the switch from the Command Line Interface CLI or the Web Agent and configure IP routing for the switch e Mgmt Only Enables you to manage the switch however IP routing is disabled e Default Enables you to configure IP routing for the switch however you cannot manage the switch Note When you set up IP routing for an interface the Default selection is automatically chosen The IP interface is created with the default IP routing option on the VLAN associated with the interface RIP Enable or disable RIP The default value is Disable
159. ce name from the interfaces you have previously configured Admin State Shows the administration state of the interface The default setting is UP Options include e UP Indicates an active state e DOWN Indicates an inactive state VLAN Select a VLAN associated with the selected interface from the VLANs you have previously configured Network Address Assign an IP address to the VLAN you previously selected Mask Assign a subnet mask for the interface MAC Format Specify the MAC format Ethernet V2 or SNAP IP Routing Enable or disable IP Routing on the interface When set to Routing Mgmt you can both manage the switch from the CLI or Web Agent and configure IP Routing for the switch When set to Mgmt Only you can manage the switch however IP routing is disabled Note When the interface has a VLAN identified as Serial Console the only valid IP routing option is Mgmt Only RIP Enable or disable RIP for a given interface OSPF Enable or disable OSPF for a given interface Multicast Protocol Select a multicast protocol to associate with your interface Selections include DVMRP IGMP and None IGMP is enabled automatically when DVMRP is selected Proxy ARP Enable or disable Proxy ARP on a given interface ICMP Redirect Enable or disable ICMP Redirect on a given interface 7 6 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Table 7 3 P Interfaces Continued Par
160. ch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 3 From the Copy Source pull down menu select one of the following Running Config To copy your running configuration to your startup configuration to a file located on the switch or to a file located on a TFTP server e Startup Config To copy your startup configuration to your running configuration to a file located on the switch or to a file located on a TFTP server e File To copy a file stored on the switch to your running or startup configuration to a location on the switch or to a location on a TFIP server e TFTP Server To copy a file stored on a TFIP server to your running or startup configuration or to a file on the switch If you select File or TFTP Server also provide the path and filename of the source file in the Source Filename field 4 From the Copy Destination pull down menu select one of the following e Running Config If you are copying your startup configuration or other file located on the switch or on a TFIP server to your running configuration e Startup Config If you are copying your running configuration or other file located on the switch or on a TFIP server to your startup configuration e File If you are copying your startup or running configuration another file located on the switch or a file located on a TFTP server to a file on the switch e TFTP Server If you are copying your startup or running configuration or another file located on the s
161. ch configurations Read Write View and set switch configuration View community strings settings and view statistics Read Write with View and set all switch parameters N A Security Level Set including community table to admin None Do nothing This selection allows Access any switch you to disable a string without features deleting it 6 From the Security Level pull down menu select a security level for this community string Table 3 16 Table 3 16 SNMP Security Levels Allows Access to normal All switch configuration and reporting functions admin All switch configuration and reporting functions including access to community configuration 7 From the Trap Receiver pull down menu select Enable 8 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Changing the Console Serial Port Settings You can use the Web Agent to change the communications settings for the serial port connection on the front panel of the Layer 3 supervisor module Initially the switch s console port is configured as a TTY Console to support a TTY connection The Layer 2 and Layer 3 supervisor modules allow you to reconfigure the console serial port as a PPP Console to support a dial in PPP connection using a modem Note As a PPP console you can change only the switch s baud rate and flow control parameters The flow control parameters are limited to None or Xon Xoff 3 2
162. ch Operation Guide iv Smart ABEL cin Pei a e e br a ita 1 15 Cajun P550 Switch Modules o ooooooooorrr ee nee eee ees 1 15 Chapter 2 Overview of the P220 Gigabit Switch Family OVENVIEW renidi ech Gb dd ete Si beat Sie NE eae Ga dae a Poe les 2 1 Switch Features ion ia Da eevee it dd eles eke ke ddl Veet Reda fae 2 2 Grossbar Switch Fabrics tes ar saved SER eee wea Pe os OTe Saab eae ee 2 2 Virtual Bridging FUNCIONS sick ea edd wid ae SAS A nach Se Bas 2 4 VEAN FUNCIONS 1 a Codes we A Be ee ate wee Win cela ol Noes Bee ak 2 4 FUNG GTOUPDS ice ce Bsa Pee Bde ead ce See ata Basho AS he asa 2 5 OpenTrunk Technology iman aa a da pala abba de ae De 2 5 Dual Layer Spanning Trees riean en A Se CEN a a a ic 2 7 Buffer and Queue Management 0 cee eee teens 2 8 Web Based Management 0 cece ee eee eee ee eee ene 2 9 Smart Agent 00h bale ei gg ais a la gw ata lr las 2 9 RMON for Traffic Analysis 2 0 ia i ce ee nee eee nee 2 9 Chapter 3 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 A tik ots ate tale Sie GRAS SR eth ee a Rte une ER Sh RN 3 1 Configuring the Supervisor Module Using the CLI eannan errr eee eee 3 1 Configuring the Switch Using the Web Agent 0 0 cece eee eee eee 3 5 Logging In tothe Web Agent att A AA he elie Ne Bd AA INTE Ashe og 3 6 Setting Up User ACCOUMMS a ane ee ae sae hel We a a ee 3 6 Configuring Port Parameters Using the Web Agent
163. cket tracing enabling 16 4 packet type IPX datagram fields 4 3 packets Ethernet interface statistical parameters 17 2 packets forwarded through cache entry DVMRP multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 40 IGMP local multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 31 parity console serial port settings 3 25 path cost spanning tree bridge port information parameters 12 11 payload protocol type DVMRP upstream source parameters 7 42 peak number of routes AppleTalk route table statistics 10 15 IP routing table statistical parameters 7 26 IPX routing table statistic 4 12 peak number of zones AppleTalk zone table statistics 10 17 percent cache hits frame forwarding statistical parameters 11 4 percent drops frame forwarding statistical parameters 11 4 percent slow path frame forwarding statistical parameters 11 4 performing a system reset 3 45 periodic update interval IPX SAP interface parameters 6 2 permanent address forwarding table persistence parameters 14 6 invalid entry 14 5 persistence entry 14 5 persistence address forwarding table parameters 14 5 persistence entry ageout definition 14 5 permanent definition 14 5 physical port buffers buffer management parameters 13 3 piggyback port port mirroring information parameters 17 7 port mirroring parameter 17 8 poll interval OSPF interface parameters 9 5 port address forwarding table parameters 14 5 multicast session client port parameters 15 9 RMON mirro
164. ckets sent using the long format DDP Forward Counter DDP packets forwarded through this node No Client Packets received for which the destination socket was not known Too Short Packets received that were smaller than the minimum size allowed for an AppleTalk packet Bcast Error Broadcast errors detected TTL Expired Packets dropped because they timed out AARP Req Rx AppleTalk ARP requests received AARP Invalid PDU AppleTalk ARP requests received which were invalid AARP Req Tx AppleTalk ARP requests transmitted Config Addr Error Configuration address errors detected Echo Reply Rx Echo replies received DDP Output Short DDP packets sent using the short format DDP Input Counter DDP packets received DDP Local Counter DDP packets received destined for this node No Route DDP packets for which no route existed to the destination Too Long Packets received that were larger than the maximum size allowed Short PDU in Error Packets received that had a short PDU in error Checksum Error Packets which had checksum in error AARP Reply Rx AppleTalk ARP replies received AARP Reply Tx AppleTalk ARP replies transmitted Config Zone Error Zone configuration errors detected RTMP Rq Rx RTMP requests received RTMP Rq Tx RTMP requests transmitted RTMP Rsp Rx RTMP responses received RTMP Rsp Tx RTMP responses transmitt
165. configuration Table 5 2 Add IPX RIP Filter Parameters Parameter Allows you to Interface Select the interface to which this filter will be applied to RIP packets sent and or received on the interface Precedence Specify the filter precedence in order of importance with 0 equal to most important Note All filters on the same VLAN must be assigned a unique filter precedence Start Network Specify the first IPX network number in the range End Network Specify the last IPX network number in the range Direction Select the direction of the filter Filter options include Inbound Apply the filter only to RIP packets received on the interface e Outbound Apply the filter only to RIP packets sent on the interface e Both Apply the filter to RIP packets both sent and received on the interface Filter Suppress Select whether to enable or disable the IPX networks within the specified range in the filter to be filtered inbound or suppressed outbound e Filtered Apply the filter only to RIP packets received inbound direction on the interface e Suppressed Apply the filter only to RIP packets sent outbound direction on the interface Select Enable to filter suppress traffic Select Disable to disable the filtering and suppression of traffic Ticks Specify the time in ticks that the packet takes to reach the network number you specified A tick is approximately 1 18th ofa second This entr
166. ction of the Web Agent window click Virtual Links The OSPF Virtual Links dialog box opens Note This dialog box only appears with configured OSPF virtual links if you have previously configured one or more OSPF virtual links 2 Click CREATE The Add OSPF Virtual Link dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 9 5 Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 3 Use Table 9 4 to complete your OSPF virtual link configuration Table 9 4 OSPF Virtual Link Parameters Parameter Defines the Router ID Router ID for the far end of the virtual link Area Area ID of the area through which the virtual link travels Transit Delay Estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over this virtual link Retransmit Interval Number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions on this virtual link for adjacencies belonging to this virtual link This value is also used when retransmitting database description and link state request packets Hello Interval Length of time in seconds between the Hello packets that the router sends on the virtual link This value must be the same for all routers attached to a common network Dead Interval Number of seconds that a router s Hello packets have not been seen before it s neighbors declare the router down This should be some multiple of the Hello interval This value must be the same for all routers attached to a comm
167. ctions Hunt Groups OpenTrunk Technology Dual Layer Spanning Trees Buffer and Queue Management Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 1 5 Cajun P550 Switch Overview Crossbar Switch Fabric The crossbar switch matrix provides low latency high throughput packet switching using a crossbar architecture Figure 1 3 Figure 1 3 Crossbar Architecture Port 1 Port 1 1 76 Gb s 22 88 Gb s 1 76 Gb s Port 2 por 2 Crossbar Port 13 Port 13 gt Crossbars are more scalable than shared memory architectures Architecturally you can add more capacity simply by adding more switch elements By comparison shared memory switches have an inherent maximum upper boundary in throughput that makes high density single backplane gigabit switches impractical With a crossbar architecture you increase the number of gigabit ports in your network and the architecture scales to meet your needs The crossbar supports O O O O 13 fabric ports two per I O module slot plus one for the Supervisor Module 1 76 Gbps in and out on each fabric port 22 88 Gbps total capacity 45 76 Gbps total backplane capacity Under subscribed switching fabric in most configurations two connections per I O module slot plus one for the supervisor module Single copy replication When possible input frames destined for output multiple switch ports pass through the crossbar only once and are copied by the crossbar to each destination Hardware
168. d Displays the number of sessions removed by IGMP snooping e New Client Ports Added Displays the number of new client ports added by IGMP snooping New Router Ports Added Displays the number of new router ports added by IGMP snooping e Router Ports Removed Displays the number of router ports removed by IGMP snooping 3 Perform one of the following e Click APPLY to save your changes e Click CANCEL to restore previous settings e Click CLEAR to clear the statistics e Click REFRESH to refresh the contents of the table Note IGMP snooping only works on VLANS that have an IGMP interface enabled You must enable intelligent multicasting on a global basis to make IGMP snooping configuration active Configuring the LGMP Server To configure the LGMP server 1 In the Intelligent Multicasting section of the Web Agent window click LGMP Server The LGMP Server Configuration dialog box opens Note You must enable intelligent multicasting on a global basis to make the LGMP Server active LGMP serving is only active on VLANs that have an IGMP interface enabled and IGMP snooping is globally enabled 15 12 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 2 Use Table 15 9 to configure the LGMP server Table 15 9 LGMP Server Configuration Parameters Parameter Definition Enable State Select to enable or disable LGMP server configuration The default value is
169. d RIP Neighbors dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE The Add Trusted RIP Neighbor dialog box opens 3 Enter the Network Address of the node that acts as the trusted RIP neighbor 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Interpreting RIP Statistics To display RIP statistics 1 In the RIP Display section of the Web Agent window click Interface Statistics The Interface Statistics dialog box opens 2 Use Table 8 3 to interpret the RIP statistics Table 8 3 RIP Statistical Parameters Parameter Defines the Interface Interface associated with the IP address specified State Current status of the RIP route UP indicates that the interface is up and RIP can transmit and receive updates IP Address IP address associated with the interface Triggered Updates Sent Number of RIP triggered updates sent Non Triggered Updates Number of RIP non triggered updates sent Sent Updates Received Number of RIP updates received based on route changes in the IP routing table Bad Packets Received Number of bad packets received on this interface Bad Routes Received Number of bad routes received on this interface 8 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures are specific to Layer 3 configuration Included in this chapter O O Configuring OSPF Monitoring Switch Pe
170. d before the last switch shutdown Because it is stored in nonvolatile memory this log is preserved during a switch reboot or shutdown This list is designed to help you analyze the events that occurred immediately prior to a switch shutdown or reset 4 Use Table 16 7 for a definition of the event classes Table 16 7 EventTable Determines whether or not the switch sends Class AE a notification Start Upon system start System For system events Configuration For each configuration change for example enabling and disabling ports Temperature Status Of temperature status changes Temperature status message could precede a switch shutdown and are often critical Resource Upon a change in system resources Fan Status Of fan status Fan failures will eventually lead to overheating the system Fan Status message provide a good early warning for a failure that could eventually cause the switch to shut down Service Port Of Port status changes for service and user ports Set a Status User Port port as either service port user port from the port Status configuration page The purpose of this feature is to allow you to use different notification level for critical service ports if desired Authentication Failure When the switch detects an authentication failure This is a security related feature used to detect unauthorized SNMP activity Bridge Status Of changes in bridge status Sw
171. d use of Lucent s Java based multiswitch element management system Reference Documents The following documents supply related background information O Internetworking with TCP IP Volume 3rd Edition Douglas E Comer ISBN 0 13 216987 8 xix Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Preface O Internet Routing Architectures Cisco Press Bassam Halabi O Routing in the Internet Christian Huitema ISBN 0 13 132192 7 O Interconnedions Bridges and Routers Radia Perlman ISBN 0 201 56332 0 Terminology Throughout the book the term Layer 2 often followed by the abbreviation L2 is used to indicate switching capabilities For example the name Layer 2 Supervisor Module indicates a supervisor module that enables switching The terms Multilayer and Layer 3 often followed by the abbreviation L3 refer to the combined ability to switch and route For example the name Multilayer Supervisor Module indicates a supervisor module that provides switching and routing capabilities Contacting Lucent Technologies For information about Lucent Data Networking products and services please consult the Lucent World Wide Web site at http www lucent com dns If you have any questions please call Technical Support at 1 800 237 0016 press 0 at the prompt then dial ext 73300 If you are an international customer please call Technical Support at 1 813 217 2425 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide XX Preface
172. defines IP access list format cjnipalist mib is supported Policy Capability MIB for LDAP The private MIB that defines policy capabilities for the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP cjnpolicycap mib is supported Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide B 5 Supported MIB Groups B 6 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Numerics 10 100 port auto negotiation speed duplex advertisement 3 11 10 100 port parameter auto negotiation mode 3 11 category 3 11 duplex mode 3 11 flow control mode 3 11 name 3 11 port PACE priority 3 12 rate limit burst size 3 12 rate limit mode 3 12 rate limit rate 3 12 speed mode 3 11 10Base T crossover patch cables 3 5 10 port 100Base FX 1 4 12 port 10 100Base TX 1 4 3COM Virtual LAN trunking modes 3 16 3Com mapping table non VLAN switch port parameters 3 20 switch port configuration parameters 3 16 3Com SuperStack parameters automatic VLAN creation 3 21 port VLAN 3 21 trunk mode 3 21 VLAN bindings 3 21 3COM trunked ports 12 8 A AARP invalid PDU AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 AARP reply rx AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 AARP reply tx AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 AARP req rx AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 AARP req tx AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 access SNMP communities parameters 3 23 access level configuring SNMP communities 3 24 access list activating 7 14 Index AppleTalk NBP filter
173. dge Routers Extensive Fault Tolerance The Cajun P550 switch is designed as a backbone switch You can install the switch in your network s core without creating a single point of failure Extensive fault tolerance features include O N 1 power Power supplies share the power supply load If a power supply fails the remaining supply or supplies assume the load automatically and the switch management system warns you of the failure O Hot swappable power supplies fans and modules Each can be changed from the switch front panel without powering down the switch Redundant switch links using spanning tree and hunt groups Front loadable cables modules power supplies and fans Redundant switch matrix and switch controller modules Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 1 13 Cajun P550 Switch Overview Buffer and Queue Management Adding gigabit speeds to existing networks means that there can be a huge disparity between link speeds For example anything more than a 1 load on a gigabit link could easily overwhelm a 10 Mb s Ethernet link Without queue and buffer management gigabit links might only move congestion in a network rather than relieving it The switch employs the following buffer and queue management techniques O Configurable active backpressure e Half duplex ports use active backpressure to jam input ports when their frame buffers are full e Full duplex links use IEEE 802 3z pause control fra
174. dow select Console Configuration The Console Configuration dialog box opens 2 Click PPP for your console type and click Select The Console Port Configuration dialog box opens 3 Use Table 3 17 to change your console port settings Note The only parameters you can change as a PPP console is baud rate and flow control The flow control settings are limited to None or Xon Xoff 3 26 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 4 In the Modem Init Cmd field enter your modem initialization command The default modem configuration string is AT amp DOSO L Table 3 18 Modem Configuration String Parameters Parameter Definition amp DO Disable DTR SO 1 Auto answer mode one ring CD follows carrier Depends on modem EO Disable local echo Software Flow Control Depends on modem Receive and Transmit 5 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Note If you misconfigure your PPP serial console port you can regain CLI access to correct the configuration parameters For more information refer to Regaining Configuration Access to the PPP Serial Port Console Safety Tip To successfully dial in with PPP to the switch you must also configure an IP address and interface for the PPP Serial Interface Serial Console Refer to Configuring the IP Interface for the PPP Console later in this chapter for more info
175. ds o oo oooooooooooo o 16 2 Checking Active AMADA e A O A Fs 16 3 Viewing the Active Alarm Table 0 0 ccc rr 16 3 Using the Event Subsystem nent eens 16 3 Configuring the Protocol Event Log 0 0 cence eee 16 4 Viewing the Event and Shutdown Logs 2 0 cc ee eee 16 5 Viewing Event Statistics erri sett ea Sieh ote a a BG eed eh 16 6 Senne Log SIZE Bans eget tet eee ee ed ee I A a ee ae atte 16 7 Configuring Event Notification 0 eee eee eens 16 9 Chapter 17 Analyzing Network Performance Using RMON and Ethernet Statistics Layer 2 amp Layer 3 OVERVIEW cua das da a tl a ia os 17 1 vewn SLAUISIICS Eea A A A AE Gale ee eaten ad 17 1 senmo Up a Mirror POT Ei A Beebe Stele a le ae o E ad SAE eee a 17 6 Chapter 18 Downloading New Operational Code to the Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 OVERVIEW e ft cians Bod Serta A SA ae Sts Bes A dearth Ste eet he SOtadhed 18 1 Upgrading from a Previous Version 0 0 cece eee teen eee 18 1 Saving the Previous Configuration 0 ec eee eee ees 18 2 Downloading the Image a sesir ronan a Be Ea a as Ce SE Rae a es 18 2 Selecting the Image for Rebot iein anea e irei ie eee ee ee een o 18 4 Resetting LES With Massie 625s a sired eke Rae ag Mee ee tn 18 4 Appendix A FCC Notice A l Appendix B Supported MIB Groups MIBs Supported by Layer 2 and Layer 3 Switches 0 0 00 B 1 xi Cajun P550 P220 Switch Op
176. e e If enabled RIP packets can contain the maximum allowed by the MTU of the RIP interface e If disabled RIP packets are limited to 50 network entries Periodic Update Interval Specify in seconds the interval at which periodic RIP updates sec are sent out an interface Aging Interval Multiplier Specify the length of time that information from received RIP updates are kept as a multiplier of the Periodic Update Interval Triggered Updates Select to enable or disable RIP updates to be immediately transmitted to the network in response to changes in the network topology Advertise Default Route Select to enable or disable the advertising of the default Only network exclusively subject to a route to the default network being known to the switch Mode Select the mode for the RIP interface Options include e Talk Listen Send and receive advertisements Talk Only Send advertisements e Listen Only Receive advertisements 3 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Creating and Modifying IPX RIP Filters To create IPX RIP filters 1 In the IPX RIP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Filters The IPX RIP Filters dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE to create a new filter The Add IPX RIP Filter dialog box opens 5 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX RIP Protocol Layer 3 3 Use Table 5 2 to complete your
177. e Note that rules may override each other so review your current configuration prior to creating new rules for an access list Access Type The method of handling incoming datagrams based on the IP access type Priority levels include e Deny Filter Allows you to filter out traffic based on the specified configuration Permit Fwd pri8 high to pril low Allows you to prioritize traffic based on the specified configuration e Permit Fwd with no change in priority Allows you to forward traffic with no change in priority Source Subnet e Source Address The IP address of a subnet that is denied or granted access to the switch e Source Address Wildcard A range of IP addresses that are denied or granted access to the switch Place the number one 1 in the bit positions you want to ignore 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 9 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Creating Extended Access Rules To create extended access rules 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Access Lists The IP Access List dialog box opens Note The IP Access List dialog box displays all standard and extended access rules that have been created If no rules have been created the following statement displays No 1P Access Rules are currently configured 2 Click Create Extended The IP Extended Access Rule Creat
178. e every host on a network segment to process the packet Possible actions e To prevent broadcast storms use VLANs to limit the area of the network that each broadcast packet affects In general each VLAN creates a separate broadcast domain More VLANs mean less proliferation of broadcast packets e Monitor the broadcast rate of your network during normal operation e Establish a baseline e Use Rate Limiting to reduce broadcasts 17 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Analyzing Network Performance Using RMON and Ethernet Statistics Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Statistic Multicasts Indicates Normal during network operation For example multicast packets are to send target video streams to selected stations on the network and are part of the operation of the Spanning Tree Protocol Table 17 1 Interpreting Ethernet Interface Statistics Continued Actions Possible causes e Too many multicast frames can consume valuable network bandwidth Possible actions e Using Intelligent Multicasting can significantly reduce multicast traffic on individual ports e Segmenting the network into smaller VLANs and routing between them can also help control proliferation of multicasts CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check or Alignment Errors Counts of the number of times that the number of bits in a frame cannot be divided by 8 that is cannot be broken into legal octets and that c
179. e LDAP server Typically RealNet Rules will set this value whenever there is a new policy to download If this value is a non zero value the LDAP client will compare it to the producer signal on the LDAP server No comparison is made if the value is zero Consumer Signal Used to indicate the success of the LDAP client downloading a policy If the consumer signal matches the producer signal then the last time the LDAP client attempted to download a policy the download was successful If the consumer signal is 1 then either the LDAP client had a problem processing the access lists or the consumer signal set on the LDAP client did not match the signal configured on the LDAP server If the consumer signal is not 1 and does not match the producer signal then the LDAP client was unable to connect to the LDAP server s Configuring an IP Helper Address When you configure an IP Helper Address you enable a server to receive broadcasts from the switch and forward them to a server or computer on a particular VLAN The receiving server is referred to as the helper because once it receives the request from the switch it obtains the requested information and forwards it to the requesting server or computer Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Creating an IP Helper Address To create an IP helper address 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click IP Helper Addre
180. e Print Server 7 e Archive Server 9 e Remote Bridge Server 24 e Advertising Print Server 47 e NetWare Directory Services NDS 278 A value of ffff matches all service type values Direction Select the direction of the filter in question Filter choices include e Inbound Applies the filter only to SAP packets received on the interface Outbound Applies the filter only to SAP packets sent on the interface e Both Applies the filter to SAP packets both sent and received on the interface Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 6 3 Configuring IPX SAP Protocol Layer 3 Table 6 2 IPX SAP Name Filter Parameters Continued Parameter Allows you to Filter Suppress Select to enable or disable whether the services matching Name and Type are filtered inbound or suppressed outbound e Filtered Applies the filter only to SAP packets received inbound direction on the interface e Suppressed Applies the filter only to SAP packets sent outbound direction on the interface Select Enable to filter suppress traffic Select Disable to disable the filtering and suppression of traffic Specify the number of routers hops that the packet must pass through before reaching the service s matched by the filter This entry is used to override the value in the SAP packet Entering 0 ensures that there is no override in the transmission of data on the network 4 Click CREATE to save your c
181. e Web Agent window click Interfaces The IP Interfaces dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE to create a multinetting interface The Add IP Interface dialog box opens 3 In the Interface field enter the name of the new interface 4 From the VLAN pull down menu select the VLAN for this multinet configuration 5 In the Network Address field enter the network address associated with this interface 6 Click CREATE The IP Interfaces dialog box opens with the new interface listed 7 Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all the interfaces you want associated with the same VLAN Note You must have a different network address for each new multinetting interface that you create for the same VLAN Configuring Access Lists Access control lists ACLs also referred to as access lists contain rules that forward or deny data to and through the switch By configuring access lists you can O Prioritize the transmission of frames within the Cajun P550R switch O Filter out specific or general network transmissions for example all traffic from a particular subnet to the switch When you create an access list you create a series of rules that describe how data is forwarded or filtered within the switch You can assign up to eight levels of priority to routed data Standard access lists support the conversion to the Web Agent of Cisco scripts that contain access lists Extended access lists enable the switch to filter or deny information bet
182. e eG BR de bod treed ee he 7 48 Configuring LDAP Settings vrs foie Das chasse y wea aa wea wales Ola Ae ane wees 7 48 Viewing LDAP StatiStiGS aor accel a Rik shale coeds Gla a SLE ads BEd 7 50 Configuring an IP Helper Address 0 2 EE E EEE E AE E ER 7 50 Creating an IP Helper Address 2 0 cee eens 7 51 Deleting an IP Helper Address 2 0 0 0 ce eee nes 7 52 Modifying an IP Helper Address 20 0c cc ene eens 7 52 Chapter 8 Configuring the RIP Routing Protocol Layer 3 OVERVIEW s draden fein SL ae ides lee ae Bhs A Soe tans A AD bars 8 1 Configuring the Switch Using the RIP Routing Protocol 0000s eee eee ee 8 1 Configuring RIP for the Switch 0 20 0 eens 8 1 Modifying RIP Interlaces re tdi dete led Syed ate A ad ne 8 2 Creating Trusted RIP Neighbors 0 0 cece teen eens 8 3 Interpreting RIP Statistics 0 ee een ene ee eee 8 4 Chapter 9 Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 OVEIVIE WS SAO Bay as EA A ES Bhs a ENE 9 1 COM UA OPA a a tt 9 1 Configuring the OSPF Global Configuration 0 0 cece ee eee 9 2 Creating OSPF ATES 644 2 het ae pede A ae oe iaa ada i n 9 3 Deleting OSPE ATCAS di ed Ve tn Se RN ae head Ca ee GE EEN ee Se OE EES 9 3 Modilying OSPF Areas A dp ee ed Tec a 9 4 Modilying OSPF IMterlaces aiii a Wile aed eee DAES Selo bln a 9 4 Creating OSPF Virtual LinkShare inda aae a eee a ea ae 9 5 Deleting OSPF Virtual Li
183. e interpacket gap IPX SAP interface parameters 6 1 use max packet size IPX SAP interface parameters 6 2 user account access level ADMINISTRATOR user 3 7 READ_ONLY user 3 7 READ_WRITE user 3 7 user accounts access levels 3 7 setting up 3 6 user logins default 3 6 user port status event class parameters 16 8 using dial up networking using dial up networking 3 29 utilization Ethernet interface statistical parameters 17 2 V valid address forwarding table parameters 14 5 version RIP interface parameters 8 2 view the active alarm table 16 3 viewing AppleTalk global statistics 10 11 viewing AppleTalk route table statistics 10 15 viewing AppleTalk statistics 10 11 viewing AppleTalk zone table statistics 10 17 viewing DVMRP downstream routers 7 38 viewing DVMRP neighbor routers 7 34 viewing DVMRP upstream routers 7 37 viewing Ethernet statistics 17 1 viewing event and shutdown logs 16 5 viewing event Statistics 16 6 viewing IGMP interface statistics 7 28 viewing link state advertisement details 9 15 viewing RMON statistics 17 1 viewing switch port parameters 3 13 viewing the AppleTalk ARP cache table 10 15 viewing the AppleTalk NBP table 10 17 viewing the AppleTalk route table 10 14 viewing the AppleTalk zone table 10 16 viewing the downloaded image 18 4 viewing the running configuration 3 46 Index 37 viewing the script execution log file script execution log file viewing 3 46 viewing the sta
184. e of 0 0 0 0 indicates to the client that there is no primary LDAP server Primary Server Port Enter the port number of the primary LDAP server for the access control list domain The port number is used in conjunction with the primary server IP address There are no special overload values The default port is 389 Secondary Server IP Enter the backup LDAP server IP address for the Address access control list domain This address is used as a backup when connecting to and downloading access lists from an LDAP server If the LDAP client is unsuccessful in connecting to or downloading access lists from the primary server the secondary server IP address is used If the primary server IP address has a value of 0 0 0 0 the secondary server IP address is used The default value is 0 0 0 0 Note Setting the IP address of the secondary server to 0 0 0 0 indicates to the LDAP client that there is no secondary server Secondary Server Enter the backup LDAP server port number for the Port access control list domain The port number is used in conjunction with the secondary server IP address There are no special overload values The default port number is 389 Search Base Enter the search criteria that will be sent to the LDAP server The default value is ou Devices ou CajunRules o Lucent 3 Click APPLY to save changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings The LDAP client sends a search for access contro
185. e port you want to configure The Switch Port Configuration dialog box opens Figure 3 4 Switch Port Configuration Dialog Box Switch Port Configuration for Port 3 1 Port VLAN Default Trunk Mode CLEAR 5 Frame Tags Use F VLAN Binding Static Automatic VLAN Creation Disable E VTP Snooping Enable E Allow Learning Enable E Hunt Group None E Spaning Tree Mode Enable E Fast Start Disab E Enim Mode Disable E 3Com Mapping Table 3ComDefault E Mirror Port Disable APPLY CANCEL Next Port Module Refer to Configuring Port VLAN Parameters and Configuring Non VLAN Switch Port Parameters later in this chapter for your specific configuration needs 3 14 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 3 7 describes Switch Port configuration parameters Table 3 7 Switch Port Configuration Parameters Parameter Port VLAN Definition Specifies the VLAN assignment for this port Trunk Mode Select the trunk mode Allows you to define the port as a trunk and allows you to select the appropriate VLAN trunking format if the port is connected to another switch Refer to Table 3 8 for more information on trunk mode options Frame Tags Select whether to ignore or use received Frame VLAN tags If you ignore VLAN tags on incoming frames the frames are bound to the port
186. e supported by the Layer 3 switch For information about additional MIBs supported by the Cajun P550R refer to MIBs Supported by the Layer 3 Switch on page B 2 IPX Interface MIBs The following public and private MIBs define the attributes of IPX interfaces The Novel MIB is not currently supported Private IPX Interface MIBs The following private IPX interface MIBs are supported e cjnipxifmgmt mib e cjnipx mib e cjnipxrip mib e cjnipxsap mib Prominet MIB The following components of the private Prominet MIB are supported e ProminetMIB txt e cjnSwitchRoot mib e cjnRoot mib Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide B 1 Supported MIB Groups IEEE 802 3 MAU Management RFC 1155 smi is supported IEEE 802 3 Statistics Group RFC 1398 mib is supported Bridge MIB RFC 1493 mib is supported SNMPv2 RFC 1907 mib is supported RMON RFC 1757 mib is supported MIBs Supported by the Layer 3 Switch The following section lists by protocol public and private Management Information Bases MIBs supported by the Cajun P550R switch the Layer 3 switch For information about additional MIBs supported by the Cajun P550R switch refer to MIBs Supported by Layer 2 and Layer 3 Switches on page B 1 RIP Version 1 0 and 2 0 Standard MIB RFC 1724 is supported Private MIB The private MIB cjniprip mib is supported Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Supported MIB Groups OSPF Version 2 0 VRRP
187. e the switch in its default state it will adjust for growth automatically However this will lead to a few seconds of flooding packets when the address table reconfigures To manually control when a flood event occurs 1 2 In the Address Forwarding Table section of the Web Agent window click Table Configuration The Address Forwarding Table Configuration dialog box opens Enter a new Auto Sizing Utilization Threshold percentage if you just want to cause the table reconfiguration to occur at a different level of usage efficiency The default value of 40 is recommended for most applications Raising the value might cause the table to be relearned more frequently and will make address space usage more efficient In the Instance IDs column click the ID number to achieve finer control of particular tables The Address Table Instance dialog box opens for the instance ID selected Table 14 1 Address Table Instan Parameters Parameter VLAN Association Definition Displays the associated VLAN switch port and opens the VLAN Switch Port dialog box Total Number of Entries Displays the total number of entries for this VLAN Entry Type Displays the entry type for this VLAN Options include e Learned Entry is dynamically learned e Management Entry is configured by the user statically Self Entry is the switch s own address 14 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Managing Addr
188. ecution Log File Each time the startup txt file or other script runs a log file is generated Log files contain the data that scripts return To view your script execution log file O In the CLI Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Script Log File The Script Execution Log File dialog box opens showing the contents of the script execution log file Or O In priv mode in the Command Line Interface enter show file logfile txt Copying Configuration Files If you modify your running configuration through the Command Line Interface CLI or the Web Agent and you want your changes to replace your startup configuration copy your running configuration to your startup configuration Before you copy a running configuration over your startup configuration copy your startup configuration to a file on the switch or on a TFTP server using the Web Agent or the Command Line Interface On the switch configuration files are automatically saved as text files using the txt 3 46 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 extension On a TFIP server you can edit the startup txt file using a text editor of your choice and save copies of it with or without a file extension Copying Running Configuration to Startup Configuration To save your running configuration as your startup configuration in NVRAM 1 In the CLI Configuration section of the Web Agent window click
189. ed RTMP RDR Rx RTMP route data requests received 10 12 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 Table 10 5 AppleTalk Global Statistical Parameters Continued Parameter Number of RTMP RDR Tx RTMP route data requests transmitted Zip Query Rx ZIP queries received Zip Query Tx ZIP queries transmitted Zip Reply Rx ZIP replies received Zip Reply Tx ZIP replies transmitted Zip Ext Reply Rx ZIP extended replies received Zip Ext Reply Tx ZIP extended replies transmitted Zip GNI Rq Rx ZIP get net info request received Zip GNI Rq Tx ZIP get net info request transmitted Zip GNI Rsp Rx ZIP get net info response received Zip GNI Rsp Tx ZIP get net info response transmitted 3 Click REFRESH to update all statistics Or Click CLEAR to reset all statistics to zero Viewing the AppleTalk Interface Statistics Table To view the AppleTalk Interface statistics table 1 In the AppleTalk Display section of the Web Agent window click Interface Statistics The AppleTalk Interface Statistics Table opens 2 Use Table 10 6 for more information on the statistics table Table 10 6 AppleTalk Interface Statistics Table Parameters Parameter Definition Interface Displays the name of the AppleTalk interface Network Range Displays the network range associated with the AppleTalk interface N
190. ed IPX SAP provides update packets If disabled IPX SAP periodic update packets have no interpacket gap Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 6 1 Configuring IPX SAP Protocol Layer 3 Table 6 1 PX SAP Interface Parameters Continued Parameter Allows you to Use Max Packet Size Select to enable or disable whether the SAP packets sent out an interface are set to the maximum transmission unit size e If disabled SAP packets are limited to 7 service entries If enabled SAP packets can contain the maximum number of service entries allowed by the MTU of the SAP interface Periodic Update Interval Specify in seconds the interval at which periodic SAP updates sec are sent out an interface Aging Interval Multiplier Specify the length of time that information from received SAP updates are kept as a multiplier of the Periodic Update Interval Triggered Updates Select to enable or disable whether SAP updates are immediately transmitted to the network in response to changes in the network topology Get Nearest Server Reply Select to enable or disable whether the router responds to Get Nearest Server requests received on the interface Get Nearest Server Reply Specify the delay in msecs to wait before responding to a Get Delay Nearest Service request received on the interface Mode Select the mode for the SAP interface Options include e Talk Listen Send and receive adve
191. editing 10 7 network number 10 6 network range end 10 6 network range start 10 6 node 10 6 type 10 6 zone 10 6 AppleTalk statistics viewing 10 11 AppleTalk zone filter creating 10 9 editing 10 10 AppleTalk zone filter parameters access list 10 10 interface 10 10 name 10 10 type 10 10 AppleTalk zone table viewing 10 16 AppleTalk zone table statistics current number of zones 10 17 index 10 16 name 10 16 network range 10 16 peak number of zones 10 17 AppleTalk zone table statistics viewing 10 17 application multicast session client port parameters 15 9 multicast session parameters 15 8 router port display parameters 15 6 area LSA detail 9 15 OSPF interface parameters 9 4 OSPF summaries parameters 9 7 OSPF virtual link parameters 9 6 area ID OSPF area parameters 9 3 OSPF link parameters 9 10 OSPF link state database parameter 9 14 OSPF link state database search parameters 9 13 OSPF statistical parameters 9 9 area type OSPF area parameters 9 3 ARP cache searching 7 26 ARP cache entries 7 4 ARP cache search parameters IP address 7 27 VLAN 7 27 AS border route OSPF global configuration parameters 9 2 AS border Rtrs OSPF statistical parameters 9 9 ASBR 9 2 4 Index assignment Virtual LANs configuring 3 16 attached router ID 1 amp 2 LSA detail 9 16 auth key RIP interface parameters 8 3 VRRP configuration parameters 7 44 auth type RIP interface parameters 8 3 VRRP
192. egotiation must be disabled in order to enable remote fault detection When auto negotiation is enabled remote fault detection is automatically disabled e For GMAC gigabit modules auto negotiation is always disabled 11 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Parameter Definition Name Table 3 4 describes the gigabit port parameters Table 3 4 Gigabit Port Parameters A user assigned name for this port possibly a drop name or the name of the station or other device connected to the port Category Allows you to select either User Port or Service Port The User Port is intended for use with switch connections to end user nodes The Service Port is intended for use with switch connections to servers or other switches The primary difference between the User and Service Port designation is that a Service Port allows the switch to generate both log messages and alarm messages traps The User Port only generates log messages This prevents your network management station from being overwhelmed by port up down messages that result from users turning workstations on and off 3 8 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Parameter Definition Flow Control Determines if IEEE 802 3z pause control is used on this port Mode The pause mechanism allows the port to stop a sending station Table 3 4 Gigabit Port Parameters
193. eld enter IFF From the Direction pull down menu select Outbound From the Filter Suppress pull down menu select Enable In the Ticks and Hops fields enter O respectively 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings This filter ensures that the advertising of all networks on the interface Backbone will be suppressed Together Filter 1 and Filter 2 will act to suppress all network advertising with the exception of network 10 It is important to note that Filter 2 had the Precedence field set to 1 and Filter 1 had the Precedence field set to 0 Any filter with a Precedence of 0 will always override a filter with a precedence of 1 or higher Interpreting IPX RIP Interface Statistics To interpret IPX RIP interface statistics 1 In the IPX RIP Display section of the Web Agent window click Interface Statistics The IPX RIP Interface Statistics dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 5 5 Configuring IPX RIP Protocol Layer 3 2 Use Table 5 3 to interpret your IPX RIP statistics Table 5 3 IPX RIP Interface Statistical Parameters Parameter Definition Interface The interface associated with this RIP interface State The current state of the RIP interface Network Number The network number of the IPX network associated with the interface Triggered Updates Sent The number of triggered updates sent from the RIP interface Non triggered Updates Sent T
194. ent window click Interfaces The AppleTalk Interfaces dialog box opens 14 From the Default Zone pull down menu select the new zone that you just created 15 Select the AppleTalk interface to be updated by clicking the Select check box 16 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Note You may select and change as many interfaces simultaneously with one APPLY operation Deleting an AppleTalk Interface To delete an AppleTalk interface 1 In the AppleTalk Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Interfaces Configuration The AppleTalk Interfaces dialog box opens 2 Select the AppleTalk interface to be deleted by clicking the Select check box 3 Click DELETE to remove the AppleTalk interface Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 10 5 Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 Creating an AppleTalk Static Route To create an AppleTalk static route 1 In the AppleTalk Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Static Route The AppleTalk Static Route dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE to add a new static route The Add AppleTalk Static Route dialog box opens 3 Use Table 10 2 to configure your static route Table 10 2 AppleTalk Static Route Parameters Parameter Definition Network Range Start Enter the starting network number The network number specifies the range of AppleTalk network numbers for extended networks Each number in the range must be an
195. equence number Age Displays the age in seconds of the LSA Checksum Displays the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement except the age field 9 14 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 Viewing LSA Details To view link state advertisement details 1 In the OSPF Display section of the Web Agent window click Link State Database Search The Link State Database Search dialog box opens Note It is possible to select more than one item in the Search By column to help narrow your search results 2 To search by Area ID click the Area ID checkbox and specify the IP address of the Area ID that you want to find in the database and click SEARCH If your search produces results the detailed information displays in the OSPF Link State Database dialog box To search by Type click the Type checkbox and from the Type pull down menu select the type of search you want to perform and click SEARCH To search by Router ID click the Router ID checkbox and specify the router IP address and click SEARCH 3 In the Detail Link column click Details The LSA Detail dialog box opens 4 Use Table 9 11 for more information on LSA Details Table 9 11 LSA Detail Parameters Parameter Definition Area Displays the 32 bit identifier of the area from which the LSA was received Type Displays the link state type Types include e Router Links e Network
196. er 3 route cache search parameters comparison value 11 5 destination address 11 5 destination port 11 5 PRE 11 5 protocol 11 5 rule number 11 5 source address 11 5 source port 11 5 VLAN 11 5 Layer 3 routing overview 1 7 Layer 3 spanning tree overview 1 12 2 7 Layer 3 supervisor temperature example 16 2 Layer 3 switching routing 3 31 LDAP configuring 7 48 configuring settings 7 48 configuring statistics 7 50 event class parameters 16 9 settings 7 48 LDAP configuration parameters primary server IP address 7 49 primary server port 7 49 search base 7 49 secondary server IP address 7 49 secondary server port 7 49 LDAP statistics consumer signal 7 50 last change 7 50 producer signal 7 50 learned entries delete all invalid learned entries 14 3 learning state spanning tree bridge port 12 10 LEDs HD FD 16 2 port 10 100 module 16 2 port gigabit module 16 1 LGMP client 15 3 LGMP client configuration parameters enable state 15 16 intelligent multicast session statistics 15 16 LGMP clients 15 16 LGMP message reception statistics 15 16 LGMP client display per VLAN parameters intelligent multicast session statistics 15 17 LGMP message reception statistics 15 17 VLAN 15 17 LGMP client configuring configuring viewing a LGMP client 15 15 LGMP clients LGMP client configuration parameters 15 16 LGMP message reception statistics LGMP client configuration parameters 15 16 LGMP client displa
197. er entities can look it up You can display NBP names to users and use addresses internally to locate entities When you register your entity s name and address pair NBP validates its uniqueness To create an NBP filter 1 In the AppleTalk Configuration section of the Web Agent window click NBP Filter The AppleTalk NBP Filter dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE to add a new NBP filter The Add AppleTalk NBP Filter dialog box opens 3 Use Table 10 3 to configure the NBP filter Table 10 3 AppleTalk NBP Filter Parameters Parameter Definition Access List Enter the access list number to be associated with the NBP filter Valid values are 600 631 Name Enter the name of the NPB name object to be filtered Type Select the type of filtering Options include e Deny e Permit Note You can also leave this field blank for wildcarding Interface Select the interface s to apply this filter to 4 Click CREATE to add your new static route or CANCEL to restore previous settings Editing an AppleTalk NBP Filter To edit an AppleTalk NBP filter 1 In the AppleTalk Configuration section of the Web Agent window click NBP Filter The AppleTalk NBP Filter dialog box opens 2 Use Table 10 3 to edit your AppleTalk NBP filter 10 8 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 3 Click CREATE to add a new filter The Add AppleTalk NBP Filter dialog box opens See
198. eration Guide IPX Interface MIBS ta e iaa ed a a a ea B 1 The Novel MIB is not currently supported 0 0 0 ee eee B 1 Private IPX Interface MIBS in ia cs DE 6 add ia bs 8 B 1 Prominet MIB vtr a a E ad da B 1 IEEE 802 3 MAU Management 2 cee ee ee eee eee nee B 2 THEE 802 3 Statistics Group 0 sii ead ahd a eo ela Gee bale cai B 2 Bride MIB 220 aha ne A RACY Cah Geen Saar e s We ee RA a ees ava a gene SA B 2 SNM RV 25 tite sic sel tle VA Lea gs A Bae a eet el RE A ER aghast chs CHD te BR ala AA TOA B 2 RMON Saer tna A SIS tati B 2 MIBs Supported by the Layer 3 Switch 0 0 cece eee eee ee B 2 RIP Version JO and RO ce ee tbe seek Male ead ee ate GE ES Seek A Sas esa ig B 2 Standard MIB arta ohh ate ote coh ole ao pata Sued Aeneas ER A dde ida lia B 2 Private MIB A ate Mee SS woes Seta le sates aie B 2 OSPF Version 2 0 B 3 Standard MIB 4 A A A ise Aan B 3 Private MID 2 E fond ate ad de genes wrt A A en IA B 3 VRRP Era E to RS nal hts uae Mids tole B 3 Standard MIUB aida Sak ob be Bis ba Boned dob a e Data a ha B 3 PYIV ate MUB cis eera Sock ish ash aes wees ae et als a BRAN ta a ite ah gece ee Sey B 3 IGMP spied sheeted tation se ae a aa Sl Sep Becca ido Il ee aa abs sed de B 3 StandardMIBS rd DO E A Gee Gee Bote aaa hae ke eck B 3 Private MIB 2 A A A Geese es bc B 3 TPrlnterace sta ada a da aa aa B 3 IP Version 4 0 AOS A A BR OE st B 4 Standard MIB ost a a A a a ads is iii B 4 Private MTB ta e
199. erent VLANs on different ports Optional per VLAN spanning tree This isolates loop control to smaller domains so spanning trees converge faster during reconfiguration VLAN Functions A VLAN Virtual LAN is a software defined group s of hosts on a local area network LAN that communicate as if they were on the same wire even though they are physically on different LAN segments throughout a site VLANs provide network managers with two significant capabilities O O The ability to segment traffic in a flat switched network This helps prevent traffic from being forwarded to stations where it is not needed The ability to ignore physical switch locations when creating workgroups VLANs are logical constructions and can traverse physical switch boundaries The P220 switch supports Layer 1 port based VLANs which have the following characteristics O O O Frames classified as they enter the switch using Layer 1 Port based Explicitly tagged VLAN packets are forwarded based on the information in the packet See OpenTrunk Technology on page 2 5 for more information Up to 1000 VLANs VLANs define a set of ports in a flooding domain Packets that need to be flooded are sent only to ports participating in that VLAN 2 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Overview of the P220 Gigabit Switch Family Hunt Groups Hunt groups also known as link aggregation aggregate bandwidth from multiple ports
200. erface before you can edit an interface See Enabling AppleTalk Routing Globally and Creating an AppleTalk Interface earlier in this section From the VLAN pull down menu select the VLAN to be associated with the interface In the Metric field enter the new port metric to be associated with the interface From the Frame Type pull down menu select the new frame type to be associated with the interface In the Network Range Start field enter the new network range start number In the Network Range End field enter the new network range end number Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 7 In the Network Number field enter the new network number to be associated with the interface 8 In the Node field enter the new node number to be associated with the interface 9 From the Admin State pull down menu select to enable or disable the administration state associated with the interface 10 From the Default Zone pull down menu select the new default zone associated with the interface Note If there is no zone to select or if you want to edit the zones available proceed with steps 11 through 14 Otherwise proceed to step 15 11 Click Edit Zone to edit the AppleTalk zone for this interface The Edit AppleTalk Zone dialog box opens 12 In the Add text field enter the new AppleTalk zone and click Add 13 In the AppleTalk Configuration section of the Web Ag
201. eries received IGMP global statistic parameters 7 28 group membership queries transmitted IGMP global statistic parameters 7 28 group membership reports received IGMP global statistic parameters 7 28 group multicast protocol IGMP group membership table parameters 7 30 group reporter address IGMP group membership table parameters 7 31 group reports received IGMP interface statistical parameters 7 29 H hardware multicast pruning 2 3 2 4 hardware overview 1 1 hardware requirements for routing 3 31 hash depth Layer 3 cache configuration 11 2 hash mode Layer 3 cache configuration 11 2 hash table address table instance parameters 14 3 hash table auto increment configuring flood event 14 3 hash table size configuring flood events 14 3 Index 13 HD FD LED behavior 16 2 hello interval OSPF interface parameters 9 5 OSPF virtual link parameters 9 6 hello time spanning tree bridge level parameters 12 9 Help Online xv helper address IP helper address parameters 7 51 high and normal overflow drops buffer management table parameters 13 4 high and normal stale drops buffer management table parameters 13 4 high priority allocation buffer management table parameters 13 4 high priority service ratio buffer management table parameters 13 4 high shutdown temperature temperature threshold parameter 16 3 high preference static routes IP global configuration parameters 7 5 high priority traffic 13
202. ernet The server and help files are available on the Internet To download update your CajunDocs CD 1 Launch a web browser and go to the CajunDocs Installer Web page at http pubs lucentctc com cdrom cajundocs html 2 Click the latest version CajunDocs CD ROM installer to download into the directory you previously created For more information on this product refer to the online documentation that comes on your CajunDocs CD ROM or refer to http pubs lucentctc com to review the online documentation there Conventions This document uses the following conventions User Input User entered text To create a new password type store password owl Boldface Menu command From the Interface pull down menu Text keyword to be acted select Default upon or button Click Cancel to cancel the installation name System Text displayed by the If you attempt the find the physical Output system location of port 30 the system displays Unit 2 Port 2 Using Note Caution and Warning Note Provides additional information about a procedure or topic CAUTION Indicates a condition that may damage hardware or software WARNINGIndicates a condition that may cause bodily injury or death xvii Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Preface Audience This guide is intended for O Network manager or administrator O Hardware installer Overview of The Contents This guide contains the following chapters Chapter 1
203. ers This is not a tunnel and does not require encapsulation Non Encapsulated Tunnel All multicast data traffic is IPIP encapsulated but the protocol messages are simply unicast IPIP Tunnel All multicast traffic data and protocol messages on this interface is encapsulated in IP unicast packets with the protocol set to IPIP IP in IP Tunnel Endpoint Address Tunnel endpoint IP address of a router Configure this setting to represent the IP address of the end router to which you want to send datagrams through a tunnel Typically the origin and endpoint routers are separated by a gateway s or a router s that do not support DVMRP Interface Metric Cost metric for the interface Src Host Addr in Prune Msg Transmission of prunes e Enable Send prunes with the full source host address Disable Send prunes with only the subnet portion of the source address Interface Scope 3 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Minimum TTL time to live required for a packet to leave this interface None 127 255 7 20 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Monitoring Switch Performance Using IP Statistics This section provides detailed information on the analysis and use of IP and IP multicast statistics IP routing statistic options include O Displaying Global IP Routing Statistics O Searching the I
204. ervice of the route This parameter is associated with AS External Summary Network and Summary AS Border LSAs Metric Displays the cost of the link This parameter is associated with AS External Summary Network and Summary AS Border LSAs Forward Address Displays the forward address This indicates that packets for the external destination should be forwarded to the advertising OSPF router This parameter is associated with AS External LSAs Tag Displays the tag associated with the LSA This parameter is associated with AS External LSAs Attached Router ID 1 amp 2 Displays the router ID for the attached router s Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 10 rr Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures are specific to Layer 3 configuration Included in this chapter O AppleTalk Routing Overview O Configuring AppleTalk Routing O Viewing AppleTalk Statistics AppleTalk Routing Overview AppleTalk Phase I was originally designed for local work groups AppleTalk Phase II extends the number of nodes in an internetwork to over 16 million and the number of zones per port to 254 The Cajun switch supports both AppleTalk Phase I and Phase II However the translation from AppleTalk Phase I to Phase IT is not supported The Cajun switch version 4 0 software supports AppleTalk routing for packets destined across VLANs inter VLAN using Layer 3 but for int
205. ess Forwarding Tables Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Parameter Definition Entry Validity Displays the entry validity for this VLAN Table 14 1 Address Table Instance Parameters Continued Options include e Valid Entry exists e Invalid Entry has aged out but still exists even though the port binding is invalid Hash Table Displays the hash table parameters Options include e Size It is recommended that the hash table size be 1 8th the size of the total number of addresses for the VLAN Auto Increment Hash tables may grow dynamically larger if more addresses are discovered Disabling auto increment prevents these tables from growing dynamically at the risk of extra flooding Bucket Info Displays parameters to monitor the efficiency of the hash 4 table allocations Options include e Count Indicates the hash table count e Capacity Indicates the hash table capacity e Utilization High utilization indicates that a larger hash table is needed From the Hash Table Size pull down menu select the new size to alter the space available for this address table The rule of thumb is Tables with high Total Bucket Utilization greater than 75 can be made smaller Tables with low Total Bucket Utilization less than 40 should be made larger Note that the number of addresses for a given hash table is 4 1 for example if you have a hash table of 16 bytes the VLAN can hold 64 addresses in it s ta
206. ettings 16 5 default password 3 3 default route RIP interface parameters 8 3 default zone AppleTalk interface parameters 10 4 defining the VRRP authentication key interface 7 44 deleting deleting multicast session client ports 15 8 deleting an AppleTalk interface 10 5 deleting an IP helper address 7 52 deleting an OSPF area 9 3 deleting AppleTalk static routes 10 7 deleting OSPF summaries 9 8 deleting OSPF virtual links 9 6 deleting static client ports 15 11 description event and shutdown log entries 16 6 designated bridge spanning tree bridge port parameters 12 10 designated cost spanning tree bridge port parameters 12 10 designated forwarder DVMRP route table parameters 7 37 designated forwarder s table parameters forwarder cost to source network 7 38 forwarder network address 7 38 forwarding interface 7 38 designated port spanning tree bridge port parameters 12 10 designated root spanning tree bridge port parameters 12 10 designating a switch fabric 3 41 destination address Layer 3 route cache search parameters 11 5 destination filename configuration file management 3 48 destination group address DVMRP downstream link parameters 7 41 DVMRP multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 40 8 Index DVMRP upstream source parameters 7 42 IGMP local multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 31 upstream prune information 7 41 destination network IPX datagram fields 4 3 destination node IPX datagram f
207. etwork Number Displays the network number of this node Node Displays the node number of this node Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 10 13 Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 Table 10 6 AppleTalk Interface Statistics Table Parameters Continued Parameter Definition Seed Displays whether the AppleTalk interface seeded the network State Displays the state of the AppleTalk interface Options include e Up indicates that the AppleTalk interface is active e Down indicates that the AppleTalk interface is inactive Viewing the AppleTalk Route Table To view the AppleTalk route table 1 In the AppleTalk Display section of the Web Agent window click Route Table The AppleTalk Route Table opens 2 Use Table 10 7 for more information on route table statistics Table 10 7 AppleTalk Route Table Parameters Parameter Definition Select Select the entry to be acted upon Network Range Displays the network range Metric Displays the AppleTalk metric for the network range State Displays the state of the entry Options include e Good e Suspect e Going Bad Bad Owner Displays the AppleTalk component responsible for the addition of the route Options include e Local Static e RTMP Next Hop Displays the next hop address where forwarded packets are routed 10 14 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring AppleTalk Routing
208. f VLANs more than 500 are configured This problem will be addressed in an upcoming software release If you set a port s VLAN trunking mode to Clear make sure not to change the VLAN Binding Type from the default value Static If you are using both the VLAN auto learning feature and the Binding Type Bind to Received make sure that you set the binding type before you set Autolearn to enable or else the port may not be automatically added to the VLAN VLAN To create a VLAN 1 In the Switching Parameters section of the Web Agent window click Virtual LANS The VLAN Configuration dialog box opens Click CREATE The Create VLAN dialog box opens In the Name field enter a name for the VLAN In the ID field enter an unused VLAN ID between 1 and 4095 VLAN IDs are global and must be consistent from switch to switch even when switches are manufactured by different vendors Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 12 3 Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Layer 2 and Layer 3 5 Use Table 12 1 to configure the VLAN parameters Table 12 1 VLAN Parameters Parameter Definition Name Name assigned to this VLAN ID Identifier used throughout the network to identify this VLAN If you want ports on more than one device to participate in a particular VLAN you must use the same VLAN ID to identify the VLAN on every device Initial Hash Table Sets the number of Layer 2 address entries used to store Size i
209. f the Web Agent window click Global Configuration The IP Global Configuration dialog box opens 2 From the IP Multicast Forwarding pull down menu select Enable This enables IP multicast globally 3 In the IGMP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Global Configuration The IGMP Global Configuration dialog box opens 4 From the IGMP pull down menu select Enable Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 5 To enable MTRACE processing from the MTRACE pull down menu select Enable 6 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Modifying IGMP Interfaces To modify IGMP interfaces 1 In the IGMP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Interfaces The IGMP Interfaces dialog box opens Note If no IGMP interfaces are enabled for your existing IP interfaces you must first enable a multicast protocol before you can configure IGMP Refer to Creating an IP Interface earlier in this chapter for more information on how to select a multicast protocol 2 Use Table 7 8 to complete your configuration Table 7 8 GMP Interface Parameters Parameter Allows you to Select Select the interface to be modified Interface Display the IP interface that is configured with IGMP IP Address Identify an IP address associated with this interface This parameter is not configurable from the IGMP configuration dialog box
210. f the router Application Displays the active applications of the router port Applications include e Mgmt Static e IGMP LGMP e CGMP 4 Select a router port and click DELETE to remove a router port or CANCEL to restore previous settings Configuring Static Router Ports To configure a static router port 1 In the Intelligent Multicasting section of the Web Agent window click Global Configuration The Intelligent Multicast Global Configuration dialog box opens Note You must enable intelligent multicasting on a global basis to make your static router port configuration active See Configuring Global Intelligent Multicasting earlier in this chapter 15 6 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 2 Click Display Configure Router Ports The Router Port Display Configuration dialog box opens 3 In the Static Router Port Configuration section enter a port number in the Port field 4 In the VLAN column click All to add this router port to all VLANs Or From the VLAN pull down menu select a specific VLAN Note When adding a router port to all VLANs the router port is added only to the VLANs bound to the switch port To bind multiple VLANs to a switch port refer to Chapter 3 in this guide 5 Click CREATE to save your changes Searching for Intelligent Multicast Sessions To perform a session search 1 In the Intelligent Multi
211. face Interface Type The interface type Types include e Broadcast All traffic is forwarded through the routers This is not a tunnel and does not require encapsulation e IPIP Tunnel All multicast traffic data and protocol messages on this interface is encapsulated in IP unicast packets with the protocol set to IPIP IP in IP e Non Encapsulated Tunnel All multicast data traffic on this interface is IPIP encapsulated but the protocol messages are simple unicast Interface is Pruned Status of whether the interface has been pruned Prune Expiration Time in sec Time in seconds that the interface times out waiting for the prune message to expire 6 In the Downstream Interface s field click the number to view information on the downstream interface The DVMRP Downstream Link s dialog box opens 7 Use Table 7 29 to view the DVMRP Downstream Links information Table 7 29 DVMRP Downstream Links Parameters Parameter Displays the Destination Group Address Destination group address Source SubN etwork Source subnetwork DVMRP Downstream Interface DVMRP Downstream interface Interface Type Interface type Types include e Broadcast All traffic is forwarded through the routers This is not a tunnel and does not require encapsulation IPIP Tunnel All multicast traffic data and protocol messages on this interface is encapsulated in IP unicast packets with the prot
212. face parameters 6 2 gigabit ethernet modules Layer 2 Layer 3 1 5 gigabit module configure ports 3 7 gigabit module configuring flow control mode 3 8 port name 3 7 port pace priority 3 8 ports 3 7 3 9 service port 3 8 user port 3 8 gigabit port name configuring 3 7 gigabit port parameters category 3 8 flow control mode 3 9 port name 3 8 port PACE priority 3 9 remote fault detect 3 9 gigabit ports configuring physical port parameters 3 8 enabling 3 7 3 9 global configuration 15 4 intelligent multicast 15 4 global RIP RIP global configuration parameters 8 1 GMACI auto negotiation 3 8 GNS requests received IPX SAP interface statistical parameters 6 8 GNS responses sent IPX SAP interface statistical parameters 6 8 graft acknowledgments received DVMRP global statistical parameters 7 32 graft acknowledgments transmitted DVMRP global statistical parameters 7 32 graft messages received DVMRP global statistical parameters 7 32 graft messages transmitted DVMRP global statistical parameters 7 32 group address forwarding table parameters 14 5 group address IGMP group membership table parameters 7 30 group created on IGMP group membership table parameters 7 30 group join requests received IGMP interface statistical parameters 7 29 group leave requests received IGMP interface statistical parameters 7 29 group member interface IGMP group membership table parameters 7 30 group membership qu
213. figuration dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE The Add VRRP Virtual Router dialog box opens 3 Use Table 7 31 to configure your VRRP parameters Table 7 31 VRRP Configuration Parameters The name associated with the selected interface to configure VRID The reporting virtual router s identification The ID range is 1 255 decimal IP Address The virtual router s IP address Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 43 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Table 7 31 VRRP Configuration Parameters Continued Parameter Priority The sending VRRP router s priority Higher values equal higher priority Possible values e 255 The value that must be assigned to the Master e 1to 254 Values that must be used for routers backing up a Virtual router e 0 the current Master is disabled Allows Backup routers to trigger without waiting for the current Master to timeout Advertisement Timer The number of seconds a Master virtual router advertises itself Auth Type The VRRP authentication method The default is None The VRRP authentication key for the interface The default is LUCENT Addr Owner The address owner override Override 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Configuring VRRP Authentication To configure VRRP authentication 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Interfaces The IP Interfaces dialog box opens 2 Select
214. figuration section of the Web Agent click Modules and Ports The Module Information dialog box opens 2 In the Switch Ports column click on the Switch Ports link for the module which you want to enable VTP snooping The Switch Ports dialog box for that module opens 3 In the Name column click the port on which you want to enable VTP Snooping switch wide The Switch Port Configuration dialog box opens for that port 4 From the Trunk Mode pull down menu select either IEEE 802 1Q or Multi layer to match the trunk mode setting of the switch port of the switch port at the other end of the link 5 From the VTP Snooping pull down menu select Enable This is disabled by default 6 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings 7 In the Switching Parameters section of the Web Agent window click VTP Snooping The VTP Snooping Configuration dialog box opens 3 18 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 8 Use Table 3 10 to configure your switch VTP Snooping parameters Table 3 10 VTP Snooping Parameters Parameter VTP Snooping State Definition Select to enable or disable the VTP snooping protocol globally for the switch The default value is Disabled Domain Name Enter the name associated with the Cisco VIP domain The default is Null Note The domain name is automatically learned within approximately five minutes from a
215. figuring the Supervisor Module Using the CLI To connect to the Web Agent you must first use the serial command line interface CLI to give the supervisor module an IP address and a subnetwork mask Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 1 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 To configure the supervisor module using the CLI 1 Attach a serial cable from your PC s serial port to the serial port of the supervisor module front panel refer to Figure 3 1 using a 9 pin straight through male to female serial cable refer to Switch Features earlier in this guide for pinout information 2 Runa terminal emulation program HyperTerminal for example on the attached PC Ensure that the terminal settings match those listed in Table 3 1 3 Power up the switch by turning on the power supplies In the terminal emulation program the switch displays the following startup messages Booting the operational system please wait Initializing the file subsystem done Initializing the event subsystem done Initializing the agent subsystem done Initializing the platform done Initializing the switch subsystem done Starting up threads Periodic Task Event etwork Interface Switch Interface Telnet Processes Ping Process Module Manager Address Table Aging Multicast Pruning Front Panel Display Download Fans Poller Power Supplies Poller VTP Snooping Redundant Controller Element Polle
216. find all entries in the routing cache that contain a VLAN entry of vlan_10 0 1 1 you would search by VLAN and specify vlan_10 0 1 1 as your search value 11 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Monitoring and Configuring the Forwarding Cache Layer 3 3 Use Table 11 4 to determine the parameters you use in your search Table 11 4 Route Cache Entry Search Parameters Parameter Allows you to search for all entries Destination Address Within the routing cache that match the specified destination address IP address Source Address Within the routing cache that match the specified source address IP address Protocol By protocol identifier By default this field is 0 for IP for example not supported by IP Destination Port Within the routing cache that match the specified destination port IPU IPM IPX Source Port Within the routing cache that match the specified source port IPU IPM IPX Comparison Value Within the routing cache that match the specified comparison value TCP UDP Values include DA Destination address DASA Destination and source address DAPROT Destination address and protocol DADP Destination address and destination port number DASAPROT Destination and source address and protocol DASADPSP Destination and source address and the corresponding destination and source port numbers VLAN Within the routing cache that match the specified
217. formation on how to optimize bandwidth usage on your network Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide xviii Preface Chapter 13 Tuning Your Switch Performance Shows how to use your switch s buffer management features to optimize traffic throughput through the switch fabric Chapter 14 Managing Address Forward Tables Provides information on how to manage the address forwarding tables in your switch Chapter 15 Managing Intelligent Multicasting Provides information on how to configure and manage intelligent multicast sessions on your switch Chapter 16 Monitoring the Cajun Switch Explains how to use the Web Agent to assess your switch s current operational status Chapter 17 Analyzing Network Performance Using RMON and Ethernet Statistics Provides information on how to interpret the statistics counter values displayed in your switch Chapter 18 Downloading New Operational Code to the Switch Provides information on how to update the operational code on your switch Appendix A FCC Notice Provides the FCC notice statement Appendix B MIB Groups Provides information on the supported MIB groups Index Related Documents This section provides information on supporting documentation including O Lucent Documents O Reference Documents Lucent Documents The following documents provide additional information on Lucent products P500 Manager User s Guide which describes the installation an
218. formation section of the Web Agent click System Reset 2 In response to the question Do you want to reset the switch click Yes The switch resets with the selected version To reset the switch through the command line interface after downloading version 4 0 1 At the system prompt enter the following command reset 2 In response to the question Are you sure you want to continue enter Y The switch resets with the selected version 18 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide A 7 445414812981 SCH 555 FCC Notice FCC Notice Class A Computing Device This equipment generates uses and may emit radio frequency energy The equipment has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such radio frequency interference Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference Any modifications to this device unless expressly approved by the manufacturer can void the user s authority to operate this equipment under part 15 of the FCC rules VCCI Notice Class A Computing Device This equipment is in the Class A category information equipment to be used in commercial and or industrial areas and conforms to the standards set by the Volunta
219. g DVMRP Routing Table Statistics DVMRP routing table statistics provides information on the current number of valid routes the number of total routes present both valid and invalid and the number of triggered routes To view the DVMRP routing table statistics 1 In the DVMRP Display section of the Web Agent window click Route Table Statistics The DVMRP Routing Table Statistics dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 35 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 2 Use Table 7 22 to review the DVMRP Routing Statistics information Table 7 22 DVMRP Routing Statistical Parameters Parameter Defines the Current Number of Total number of routes present in the routing database This Routes number includes both valid and invalid routes Number of Triggered Total number of routes added to the routing table that were Routes triggered by a topology change in the network Number of Valid Routes Total number of valid routes present in the routing database Displaying the DVMRP Route Table The DVMRP route table contains information on valid DVMRP routes the expiry for those routes and additional next hop information To view the DVMRP route table 1 In the DVMRP Display section of the Web Agent window click Route Table The DVMRP Route Table dialog box opens 2 Complete one of the following to modify your DVMRP table e Select the entry and click Delete Entry to delete one or more entries e Click Flush
220. g Ports toa Hunt Group ee eee eee ne eee 12 14 Chapter 13 Tuning Your Switch Performance Layer 2 amp Layer 3 OVETVICW 1 tad aie oar AA RN aE Sa ee Sad ae NE RE Saale ea 13 1 How Queues Work ns Lt Be a Aa BB Leth oder ER HA ale diane ace RA 13 1 Managing Buffers and Queues 0 0 ene ene eee 13 2 Chapter 14 Managing Address Forwarding Tables Layer 2 Layer 3 OVERVIEW Saa eana A ANA AR NA AA IS RAI E ARS E SS aE re eta 14 1 Configuring the Address Forwarding Table 0 cece ee ee nee 14 1 Configuring the Age Timer and Super Age Timer 0 00 ee 14 1 Controlling Reconfiguration of Address Table Sizes 20 00 ee eee 14 2 Searching the Switch Address Forwarding Table 0 0 cece eee ee ee eee 14 4 Adding Entries to the Address Forwarding Table Manually oooooooo o 14 6 Chapter 15 Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 OVERVIEW coco oda ese ASA ted a ood rh A Su dice dh a Sad iaa da 15 1 INtrOdWCtiON e A Sea ee A RO Ae E a 15 1 Layer 3 Dynamic Intelligent Multicasting 2 0 cee ee eee 15 2 TOMP S mope td wets Bhs gee ek Ga od aha Nelle Be ed at eke WN ee Note ae She 15 2 LGMESSCIVO ii ii A A he nc Spot else awa aes 4 15 3 Layer 2 Dynamic Intelligent Multicasting 2 2 0 cee eee eee 15 3 LGMP Client 13 Ante AA A aed es EE Se ee Sega E EA 15 3 CGMP SnOOPING ui A Bie See BOI De aw ER ER A RRA ee
221. g generated by deselecting unwanted events from the Event Subsystem gt Event Configuration dialog box If your switch is a Layer 3 switch you may also want to disable select protocol event log settings in the Event Subsystem gt Protocol Event Configuration dialog box Events dropped dueto Displays the number of events the Event System has had to event system queue full drop due to a full Event System queue You can reduce the number of events being generated by deselecting unwanted events from the Event Subsystem gt Event Configuration dialog box If your switch is a Layer 3 switch you may also want to disable select protocol event log settings in the Event Subsystem gt Protocol Event Configuration dialog box Setting Log Size To set log size 1 In the Event Subsystem section of the Web Agent window click Event Configuration The Event Management dialog box opens 2 From the Event Log pull down menu select the number of entries you want to store in each of the switch event logs Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 16 7 Monitoring the Cajun Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 3 Use Table 16 6 to configure your switch event and shutdown log Table 16 6 Eventand Shutdown Logs Log Purpose Event Log A detailed ongoing record of events that occur in the switch This log is stored in memory and is erased if the system shuts down or reboots Shutdown Log Contains a list of events that occurre
222. ghbor s query before assuming the role of querier if not already the querier If no query is received from a neighbor with a lower IP address in the allotted time this interface becomes the querier IGMP Version 2 0 only The default value is 255 seconds Robustness Variable Perform tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet If a subnet is expected to have more packet loss the Robustness Variable should be increased The Robustness Variable must not be set to 0 and should not be set to 1 The default value is 2 3 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Configuring DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP is a distance vector routing protocol that uses IP packets with protocol type 2 IGMP to exchange routing datagrams DVMRP enables multicast routers to exchange distance vector updates that contain lists of multicast flows and their cost metrics DVMRP uses tunneling between pairs of DVMRP routers when traffic must pass through one or more intermediary routers or gateways that do not implement DVMRP Configuring the DVMRP Global Configuration To configure the DVMRP global configuration 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Global Configuration The IP Global Configuration dialog box opens 2 From the IP Multicast Forwarding pull down menu select Enable This enables IP multicast globally 3 In the DVMRP Configuration section of
223. group must be the same speed Packets arriving on different fabric ports within the switch will have loads balanced more evenly Hunt groups will not load share if the source and destination traffic and the hunt group ports are on the same fabric port Most I O modules divide their ports evenly across two fabric ports For 10 port and 12 port I O modules all ports use a single fabric port The first port assigned to a hunt group becomes the flood port It can not be changed unless the flood port is disabled Configuring Hunt Groups To configure a hunt group 1 Ensure that the same speed ports that you are configuring into a hunt group are physically connected to each other for example in a four port gigabit hunt group ensure that you have four fiber cables with switch ports connected at each end Note Auto negotiation should be disabled on the ports to further insure against speed mismatch From the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Modules and Ports The Module Information dialog box opens In the Ports column click on the port number The Physical Port Configuration dialog box opens 12 12 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Layer 2 and Layer 3 4 For the selected port click Enable to disable the port The selection is removed and the port is disabled Disable all of the ports you are adding to the hunt group if this is a new hunt g
224. h in NVRAM e Running Config Specifies a running configuration Startup Config Specifies a startup configuration e TFTP Server Specifies a source file located in a directory on a TFTP server Source Filename Specifies the path and name of the source file Source files can be ASCII files in NVRAM available for upload or files located on a TFTP server available for download Copy Destination Specifies the destination of the file to be copied e Unspecified Specifies an initialized value e File Specifies that a source is copied or downloaded to NVRAM e Running Config Specifies that a source is copied to the running configuration e Startup Config Specifies that a source is copied to the startup configuration TFTP Server Specifies that a source is copied to a TFIP server location Destination Filename Specifies the location of the destination Configuration files and other files can be copied to NVRAM on the switch or to a TFIP server as a destination location TFTP Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of a source or destination TFTP server Copy download source files located on a TFTP server to your running configuration your startup configuration or a location on the switch Or copy upload your configuration files or a file located on the switch to a TFIP server 3 48 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Swit
225. hanges or CANCEL to restore previous settings Example Suppress Advertising of all Print Servers on Interface Remote To configure your switch to suppress the advertising of all Print Servers for example type 7 on Interface Remote 1 In the IPX SAP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Name Filters 2 Click CREATE to create a new filter The Add IPX SAP Name Filter dialog box opens 3 Configure the following parameters a From the Interface pull down menu select Remote b In the Precedence field enter O c In the Name field enter The asterisk represents a wildcard that applies to all server names d In the Type field enter 7 e From the Direction pull down menu select Outbound f From the Filter Suppress pull down menu select Enable g In the Hops field enter O Entering 0 ensures that there is no override in the transmission of data on the network 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings 6 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX SAP Protocol Layer 3 This filter ensures that all advertising of any known print server on Interface Remote will be suppressed Creating IPX SAP Network Filters To create IPX SAP Network filters 1 In the IPX SAP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Net Filters 2 Click CREATE The Add IPX SAP Net Filter dialog box opens 3 Use Table 6 3 to complete your configuration
226. have multiple stations on a switch segment reconfigure network into segments with fewer stations e Isolate each adapter to see if the problem ceases e Activate spanning tree to resolve loops automatically e Ensure that there are no connections to the same station where both connections are simultaneously active Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 17 5 Analyzing Network Performance Using RMON and Ethernet Statistics Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Setting Up a Mirror Port Configuring an RMON mirror port allows you to mirror traffic from a port or set of ports to a specific mirror port where you can attach a sniffer or RMON probe The switch supports a single mirror port and a single source port for each switch fabric port For example 20 port Fast Ethernet cards have two fabric ports one for ports 1 through 10 one for ports 11 through 20 You can set up a single source port and a single mirror port for each set of ports associated with a fabric port You can also choose to mirror all traffic from a particular fabric port to the mirror port or set up multiple source ports to mirror traffic to a single mirror port Packets addressed to the CPU such as pings are duplicated out of the mirror port Tagged packets that are sent into a source port with a VLAN ID to which the source port is not bound are not transmitted out the mirror port VLAN tag information is not propagated to the mirror port Note To prevent u
227. he Layer 3 L3 address cache Percent Cache Hits Total percentage of successful matches between packets received on a fabric port and the percent of those packets that matched the Layer 3 address cache entries L3 Slow Path Frames Number of frames received on a fabric port that were not successfully matched against existing forwarding entries in the Layer 3 L3 address cache Subsequently these frames were forwarded to the supervisor module slow path All frames sent to the supervisor module are routed in software Percent Slow Path Total percentage of unsuccessful matches between packets received on a fabric port and the percent of those packets that did not match the Layer 3 address cache entries L3 Drop Frames Number of Layer 3 frames that were dropped because they did not match the Layer 3 address cache entries Percent Drops Total percent of Layer 3 frames dropped RX Frame Count T2 Total number of frames received on a fabric port L2 Frame Count T2 Number of Layer 2 frames received on a fabric port that were forwarded on to an associated VLAN Searching the Routing Cache for an Entry To search the L3 address cache 1 In the L3 Forwarding Cache section of the Web Agent window click Entry Search The Route Cache Entry Search dialog box opens 2 Select the search criteria you want to use to find more specific information on available routes For example if you want to
228. he high priority queue to guarantee delivery of as many packets as possible regardless of delay increase this value The change does not take effect until you reset the switch Priority Threshold Some priority schemes have more than two queues the IEEE allows up to 8 numbered 0 through 7 Set this parameter to the value at which the Cajun P550 switch starts sending packets to the high priority queue The default value 4 causes all traffic with a priority greater than or equal to 4 4 5 6 and 7 to be assigned to the high priority queue Lucent recommends that you do not change this parameter High Priority Determines how many times the high priority queue is serviced Service Ratio for each time the low priority queue is serviced The ideal value changes from queue to queue but the goal is to ensure that traffic mix guarantees optimal mix between high priority and best effort traffic High and Normal Number of packets dropped because the associated buffer is full Overflow Drops Indicates that the device immediately before the queue is processing traffic faster than the next downstream element can process the same volume of traffic For example overflow drops on the input buffer indicate that traffic is arriving faster than the switch matrix can process it Overflow drops on the output buffers indicates that the output port cannot handle the volume of the load being offered High and Normal Number of packets dropped
229. he number of fragments by combining them as they are received IP Fragmentation OKs Number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity IP Fragmentation Failures Number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity but could not be IP Fragmentation Creates Number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity IP Routing Discards Number of routing entries that were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free up buffer space for other routing entries ICMP In Messages Total number of ICMP messages that the entity received Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors ICMP In Errors Number of ICMP messages that the entity received but determined as having ICMP specific errors bad ICMP checksums bad length ICMP In Destination Unreachables Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received ICMP In Time Exceeds Number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received ICMP In Parameter Problems Number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received ICMP In Source Quenchs Number of ICMP Source Quench messages received ICMP In Redirects Number of ICMP Redirect messages received ICMP In Echo Requests Number of ICMP Echo request messages received
230. he TCP UDP Source Port field e Enter a Min of O HTTP e Enter a Max of 80 HTTP 10 Select TCP Established A check mark displays in the check box 11 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Each time an end user attempts to access the corporate Web server specified by the source and destination TCP UDP ports all Web requests are filtered Example Filtering Traffic Between Subnets It is possible to filter traffic to either a specific address or to an entire subnet In this example all traffic between the two subnets is filtered O O 10 1 1 0 10 1 2 0 This example also assumes that the network is a Class C network 255 255 255 0 To filter traffic between both subnets you must create two access rules To create the access rules 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Access Lists The IP Access List dialog box opens Click Create Extended The IP Extended Access Rule Creation dialog box opens In the Access List Name field enter a number between 100 and 199 to identify your new access control list In the Access Rule Index field enter a number to identify the access rule Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 5 From the Access Type pull down menu select Filter 6 In the Source Address field enter the source address 10 1 2 0 and the source address wildcard 0 0 0 255 respectively
231. he latest information Configuring Viewing CGMP Snooping To configure CGMP snooping and view its statistics 1 In the Intelligent Multicasting section of the Web Agent window click CGMP Snooping The CGMP Snooping dialog box opens Note You must enable intelligent multicasting on a global basis to make CGMP snooping configuration active 2 Use Table 15 13 for more information on CGMP snooping parameters Table 15 13 CGMP Snooping Parameters Parameter Definition Enable State Select to enable or disable CGMP snooping CGMP Packet e Join Messages Received Displays the number of Reception Statistics CGMP join messages received e Leave Messages Received Displays the number of CGMP leave messages received e Unknown Messages Received Displays the number of unknown CGMP messages received Intelligent Multicast New Sessions Created Displays the number of new Session Statistics multicast sessions created by CGMP snooping New Client Ports Added Displays the number of new client ports added to a multicast session by CGMP snooping Existing Sessions Removed Displays the number of existing multicast sessions that have been removed by CGMP snooping All Sessions Removed Displays the number of times that all multicast sessions created by CGMP snooping were removed New Router Ports Added Displays the number of new router ports added by CGMP snooping Existing Router Ports Removed Displays
232. he number of non triggered updates sent from the RIP interface Updates Received The number of updates received by the RIP interface Updates may be received periodically even if no changes have occurred Requests Received The number of requests for updates received by the RIP interface Bad Packets Received The number of bad packets received by the RIP interface 3 Click Clear to remove the statistics or Refresh to access current interface Statistics 5 6 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX SAP Protocol Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures are specific to Layer 3 configuration Included in this chapter O Configuring IPX SAP Interfaces O Creating IPX SAP Filters O Interpreting IPX SAP Interface Statistics Configuring IPX SAP Interfaces To configure the IPX SAP interfaces 1 In the IPX SAP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Interfaces The IPX SAP Interfaces dialog box opens 2 Use Table 6 1 to configure the IPX SAP interfaces Table 6 1 PX SAP Interface Parameters Parameter Allows you to Select Select a SAp interface to modify Interface Identify the IPX interface associated with the SAP interface Network Number Identify the number of the IPX network associated with the interface Use Interpacket Gap Select whether or not SAP updates sent out over an interface have an interpacket transmission delay If enabl
233. he total number of routes added Total Routes Deleted Displays the total number of routes deleted RIP Route Changes Indicates the number of changes to the IP route database made by RIP RIP Queries Indicates the number of RIP queries sent to the network Searching the IP ARP Cache To search the IP ARP Cache entries 1 In the IP Display section of the Web Agent window click ARP Cache Search The ARP Cache Entry Search dialog box opens 2 Select the search criteria you want to use to find more specific information on your switch s current ARP cache For example if you want to find all of the IP ARP cache entries associated with your out of band connection on your switch search by VLAN and specify Ethernet Console as your search value 7 26 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 3 Use Table 7 14 to determine your search parameters Table 7 14 ARP Cache Search Parameters Allows you to perform a search based Parameter on IP Address An IP address you specify I F The interface you select System entries include all interfaces that you previously configured 4 Click SEARCH to start the search If matching entries are found they are displayed in IP ARP Cache dialog box IP Multicast Statistics IP multicast statistics include Examining IGMP Interface Statistics Displaying the Multicast Group Table Displaying the IGMP Local Multicast For
234. hernet link Without queue and buffer management gigabit links might only move congestion in a network rather than relieving it The switch employs the following buffer and queue management techniques O Configurable active backpressure e Half duplex ports use active backpressure to jam input ports when their frame buffers are full e Full duplex links use IEEE 802 3z pause control frames to pause traffic when buffers are full O Packed frame buffers for optimal memory utilization The memory management allows virtually 100 utilization of buffer memory O Two Class of Service priority queues that provide flexible queue management algorithms to meet application requirements 2 8 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Overview of the P220 Gigabit Switch Family O Large buffer space e 512 KB per gigabit port e 128 KB additional for outbound 10 100 ports O Configurable queue depth for each of two prioritized packet queues O Configurable priority threshold Web Based Management Web based management allows you to manage switches from any station connected to your network The switch offers a command line interface to set up connection and a rich set of web based management features O Reduced Instruction Set Computing based RISC Supervisor provides high speed VLAN RMON and network management support O Web Agent Built in SNMP and HTML based agent compatible with popular Web browsers provides top to b
235. hich Summer Time Hours start For example if Summer Time Hours start on the first Sunday in April select the First week Options include e First First week of the month the default Start value when Daylight Savings Time starts in the Western hemisphere e Second Second week of the month e Third Third week of the month Fourth Fourth week of the month e Last Remaining days of the month that form the last week of the month Last is specified as the default End value denoting when Daylight Savings Time ends in the Western hemisphere Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 35 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Day Parameter Definition Table 3 19 Recrring Summer Time Hours Configuration Select the day of the week when you want recurring Summer Time Hours to start or end Options are based on a seven day week and include e Sunday the default Start and End values In the Western hemisphere DST starts on the first Sunday in April and ends on the last Sunday in October e Monday e Tuesday e Wednesday e Thursday e Friday e Saturday Month Select the month when recurring Summer Time Hours start or end The twelve months of the Gregorian calendar are provided For recurring Summer Time Hours the default Start value is April the month during which DST starts in the Western hemisphere The default End value is October the month during which DST ends in the
236. hrough cache entry 7 40 source address mask 7 40 source subnetwork 7 40 upstream interface 7 40 Index 9 upstream interface is pruned 7 40 upstream neighbor router address 7 40 upstream sources 7 40 DVMRP neighbor routers DVMRP supported major minor version 7 35 expiration period 7 35 found on interface 7 35 neighbor is SNMP manageable 7 35 neighbor network address 7 35 neighbor received probe from this router 7 35 neighbor supports generation ID function 7 35 neighbor supports MTRACE requests 7 35 neighbor supports prune function 7 35 viewing 7 34 DVMRP parameters maximum number of routes 7 19 DVMRP route table parameters designated forwarder 7 37 downstream dependent router 7 37 expiration period in sec 7 36 reporting router 7 36 reporting router interface 7 36 route metric 7 36 source network 7 36 source network mask 7 36 upstream router 7 37 DVMRP routing statistical parameters current number of routes 7 36 number of trigger routes 7 36 number of valid routes 7 36 DVMRP routing table displaying 7 36 DVMRP routing table statistics displaying 7 35 DVMRP supported major minor version DVMRP downstream dependent router 7 39 DVMRP neighbor routers 7 35 DVMRP upstream interface upstream prune information 7 41 DVMRP upstream prune information 7 40 DVMRP upstream routers found on interface 7 37 router cost to source network 7 37 router network address 7 37 viewing 7 37 DVMRP upstream sou
237. ic Client Ports column click the number The Static Multicast Sessions Client Ports dialog box opens 3 In the Port field enter the new port number to be added 4 Click Add Client Port The new static client port is added Note You can only add static client ports to static sessions on VLANs that the port is bound to or on sessions created for All VLANs Deleting Static Client Ports To delete static client ports 1 In the Intelligent Multicasting section of the Web Agent window click Static Sessions The Static Multicast Sessions dialog box opens 2 In the Static Client Ports column click the number The Static Multicast Sessions Client Ports dialog box opens 3 Select a port and click DELETE to remove the static client port or CANCEL to restore previous settings Configuring IGMP Snooping Layer 3 only To configure IGMP snooping 1 In the Intelligent Multicasting section of the Web Agent window click IGMP Snooping The IGMP Snooping dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 15 11 Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 2 Use Table 15 8 for more information on IGMP snooping Table 15 8 IGMP Snooping Parameters Parameter Definition Enable State Select to enable or disable IGMP snooping The default value is Disabled Intelligent Multicast e New Sessions Created Displays the number of new Session Statistics session created by IGMP snooping e Sessions Destroye
238. ields 4 3 destination port Layer 3 route cache search parameters 11 5 destination port number DVMRP upstream source parameters 7 42 destination socket IPX datagram fields 4 3 destination subnet IP access list parameters 7 10 detail link OSPF link state database parameter 9 14 diagnostics for switch hardware 3 41 dial up networking configuring with a PPP serial port console 3 28 direction IPX RIP filter parameters 5 3 IPX SAP filter parameters 6 3 IPX SAP network filter parameters 6 6 disabled spanning tree bridge port 12 10 disabling 12 11 displaying intelligent multicasting 15 6 IPX routing global statistics 4 9 displaying DVMRP global statistics 7 32 displaying DVMRP multicast forwarding cache 7 39 displaying DVMRP routing table statistics 7 35 displaying frame forwarding cache statistics 11 3 displaying global IP routing statistics 7 21 displaying IGMP global statistics 7 28 displaying IGMP local multicast forwarding cache 7 31 displaying IPX RIP interface statistics 3 1 5 5 displaying Layer 3 forwarding cache 11 5 displaying multicast forwarding cache 7 39 displaying OSPF neighbors 9 10 displaying OSPF statistics 9 8 displaying router ports 15 6 displaying the cooling system status 3 40 displaying the DVMRP designated forwarder table 7 37 displaying the DVMRP routing table 7 36 displaying the IGMP multicast group table 7 30 displaying the power system statistics 3 40 DNS IP helper
239. ighbor e Loading Link State Request packets are sent to the neighbor asking for the more recent LSAs that have been discovered but not yet received in the Exchange state e Full The neighboring routers are fully adjacent These adjacencies will now appear in router LSAs and network LSAs Router ID The router ID of the neighbor Master The state of the neighbor master or slave DD Number The hexadecimal number used to sequence the collection of Database Description Packets The initial value indicated by the Init bit being set should be unique The DD sequence number then increments until the complete database description has been sent DR Priority Displays the DR Priority of the neighboring router This is used to determine whether this neighbor is eligible to become the Backup Designated Router If 0 the router is ineligible to become the Backup Designated Router E Option The method used to flood AS external LSAs T Option Specifies whether this neighbor is an ASBR MC Option Specifies whether this neighbor supports MOSPF Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 9 11 Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 Table 9 8 OSPF Neighbors Parameters Continued Parameter Definition N Option Specifies whether this neighbor supports the handling of Type 7 LSAs OPQ Option Specifies whether this neighbor supports opaque LSAs Link State Advertisements DR Choice Interfa
240. iguration section of the Web Agent window click Global Configuration The IPX Routing Global Configuration dialog box opens Figure 4 2 PX Routing Global Configuration Dialog Box IPX Routing Global Configuration IPX Routing Enable x Use Default Route Disable gt RIP Enable E SAP Enable E Maximum Number of Routes 2046 _ Maximum Number of Services 2048 APPLY CANCEL Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 4 3 Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 2 Use Table 4 2 to configure your global setup Table 4 2 PX Global Parameters Parameter Allows you to IPX Routing Enable or disable IPX routing on a global basis The default value is Enable Use Default Route Enable or disable the default route if known The default value is Disable RIP Enable or disable IPX RIP on a global basis This affects all IPX interfaces set up to use the IPX RIP routing protocol The default value is Enable SAP Enable or disable IPX SAP on a global basis This affects all IPX interfaces set up to use the IPX SAP routing protocol The default value is Enable Maximum Number of Specify the maximum number of routes that can be added to the Routes routing table The system rounds up your entry to the nearest power of 2 For example if you enter 1000 the system rounds this number up to 1024 routes The default value is 2048 Maximum Number of Specify the maximum number of services that ca
241. ilter 2 2 ee ee eee 10 7 Editing an AppleTalk NBP Filter 0 2 eee ee eee 10 8 Adding or Deleting Interfaces to NBP Filter 2 2 cee eee 10 9 Creating an AppleTalk Zone Filter 2 ee eee 10 9 Editing an AppleTalk Zone Filter 0 0 eee ee ee 10 10 Adding or Deleting Interfaces to a Zone Filter 0 0 0 eee ee ee ee eee 10 11 Viewing AppleTalk Statistics o o oooooooooooo nee Da a a eee 10 11 Viewing AppleTalk Global Statistics 2 0 cee eens 10 11 Viewing the AppleTalk Interface Statistics Table o o ooooooooooooooo oo 0000 10 13 Viewing the AppleTalk Route Table 0 0 cece eee 10 14 Viewing AppleTalk Route Table Statistics 0 0 ce eee 10 15 Viewing the AppleTalk ARP Cache Table 0 0 0 2 ee eee eee eee 10 15 Viewing the AppleTalk Zone Table 1 2 eee eee 10 16 View AppleTalk Zone Table Statistics o o o ooooooooorooo eee eee 10 17 Viewing the AppleTalk NBP Table 0 0 0 cece eee 10 17 Chapter 11 Monitoring and Configuring the Forwarding Cache Layer 3 OVEIVIEW sa Be ray A A EAS AA ER BE A As is AS et a he Sa 11 1 Configuring the Fowarding Cache 0 cc eee eens 11 1 Monitoring the Forwarding Cache Statistics 2 s ee ee 11 3 Displaying Frame Fowarding Statistics 0 0 eee ee eee 11 3 Searching the Routing Cache for an Entry 2 2 0 0 cece eee eee 11 4 Displaying the Forwarding Cache
242. ing Cache O Displaying Frame Fowarding Statistics O Searching the Routing Cache for an Entry Configuring the Fowarding Cache The forwarding cache enables you to configure the multilayer media module s forwarding tables To configure the forwarding cache 1 In the L3 Forwarding Cache section of the Web Agent window click Cache Configuration The Layer 3 Forwarding Cache Configuration dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 11 1 Monitoring and Configuring the Forwarding Cache Layer 3 2 Use Table 11 1 to complete your fowarding cache configuration Table 11 1 Layer 3 Cache Configuration Tree Configuration Tree Configuration For the Field Allows you to protocol Hash Depth IP Unicast Configure the hash depth for IP unicast IP IP Multicast multicast and IPX datagrams Choices IPX include e Hash 8 An 8 bit memory bucket used to store information about the source or destination protocol address or both e Hash 10 A 10 bit memory bucket used to store information about the source or destination protocol address or both e Hash 12 A 12 bit memory bucket used to store information about the source or destination protocol address or both Hash Mode IP Unicast Configure the table hash lookup mode for the IP Multicast IP unicast IP multicast and IPX forwarding IPX table Choices include DA only Forwarding entries input to the forwarding table are lim
243. instance delete all invalid learned entries 14 3 delete all learned entries 14 3 address table instance entry type learned 14 2 management 14 2 self 14 2 address table instance hash table auto increment 14 3 size 14 3 address table instance parameters bucket info 14 3 entry type 14 2 entry validity 14 3 hash table 14 3 total number of entries 14 2 VLAN association 14 2 address table sizes controlling reconfiguration 14 2 address table sizing definition 14 1 address table age timer configuring 14 1 address table super age timer configuring 14 1 address tables segmented 2 4 admin SNMP security level 3 24 admin state AppleTalk interface parameters 10 4 IPX interface 4 5 admin state add IP interface parameters 7 2 IP interface parameters 7 6 2 Index adv address IRDP parameters 7 46 advertisement OSPF summaries parameters 9 7 advertisement life time IRDP parameters 7 47 advertisement timer VRRP configuration parameters 7 44 advertisements received VRRP statistical parameters 7 45 advertisements sent VRRP statistical parameters 7 45 AFT address table 14 2 age LSA detail 9 16 OSPF link state database parameter 9 14 age interval Layer 3 cache configuration 11 2 age timer buffer management table parameters 13 3 aged entries forwarding cache FE parameters 11 6 ageout address forwarding table persistence parameters 14 6 persistence entry 14 5 aggregating bandwidth 12 11 aging
244. intelligent multicasting mechanisms LGMP client and CGMP snooping are supported Note For Layer 2 or Layer 3 LGMP to perform properly VLAN IDs must match between switches Specifically if two switches are connected with a non tagging link the port default VLANs of the ports connecting the two switches must be the same This is because the VLAN is embedded in the LGMP message and the receiving switch maps the LGMP message to the specified VLAN IGMP Snooping IGMP snooping is only supported in Layer 3 As IGMP reports are received by the switch IGMP sessions are created Intelligent multicast sessions are created and the ports on which these reports are received are added to the appropriate sessions When the IGMP session is terminated the associated intelligent multicast session is deleted Note IGMP snooping is only available for VLANs that have an IGMP interface enabled 15 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 LGMP Server Because Layer 2 cannot snoop IGMP messages it requires Layer 3 to provide the necessary information through a Lucent proprietary protocol Lucent Group Membership Protocol LGMP Essentially LGMP works by having the Layer 3 switch re transmit received IGMP messages to the Layer 2 switches by sending them to a well known multicast MAC address The Layer 2 switch then creates multicast sessions adds clients to those sessions and removes
245. interface parameters 7 3 IP interface parameters 7 6 managing buffers and queues 13 2 mask add IP interface parameters 7 2 IP interface parameters 7 6 IP static route parameters 7 14 OSPF summaries parameters 9 7 master OSPF neighbors parameters 9 11 max age spanning tree bridge level parameters 12 9 max packets per second port mirroring information parameters 17 7 max packets per secondl mirror port configuration parameters 17 8 max advertisement interval IRDP parameters 7 47 maximum entries Layer 3 cache configuration 11 2 maximum groups IGMP interface parameters 7 17 maximum number of ARP cache entries IP global configuration parameters 7 4 24 Index maximum number of paths OSPF global configuration parameters 9 2 maximum number of routes DVMRP parameters 7 19 IP global configuration parameters 7 4 maximum number of routes 4 4 maximum number of services IPX global parameters 4 4 maximum system entries Layer 3 cache configuration 11 3 MC option OSPF neighbors parameters 9 11 MD5 key ID OSPF interface parameters 9 5 OSPF virtual link parameters 9 6 members hunt group configuration feature 12 13 memory buffer detailed configuration parameters 13 3 memory use in bytes forwarding cache FE parameters 11 6 metric AppleTalk interface parameters 10 3 AppleTalk route table statistics 10 14 DVMRP interface statistical parameters 7 33 LSA detail 9 16 MIB groups supported B 1 MIBs
246. ion or select a specific VLAN from the pull down menu 4 Click CREATE to create the new static multicast session or CANCEL to restore previous settings Deleting Static Multicast Sessions To delete a static multicast session 1 In the Intelligent Multicasting section of the Web Agent window click Static Sessions The Static Multicast Sessions dialog box opens 2 Use Table 15 7 for more information on static multicast sessions Table 15 7 Static Multicast Sessions Parameters Parameter Definition Select Select the static multicast session to be modified VLAN Displays the VLAN on which the static multicast session exists MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the static multicast session IP Address Displays the IP address associated with the static multicast session if available Static Client Ports Displays the number of static client ports associated with the static multicast session and opens the Static Multicast Session Client Ports dialog box 3 Click DELETE to remove your selected static multicast session or CANCEL to restore previous settings 15 10 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Creating Static Client Ports To create a static client port 1 In the Intelligent Multicasting section of the Web Agent window click Static Sessions The Static Multicast Sessions dialog box opens 2 In the Stat
247. ion dialog box opens 3 Use Table 7 5 to configure your IP access rules to either filter or prioritize traffic Table 7 5 P Extended Access Rule Creation Parameters Parameter Allows you to specify Access List Name An alphanumeric name assigned to the newly created access list Access Rule Index The sequence number for each new rule you create Note that rules may override each other so review your current configuration prior to creating new rules for an access list Access Type The method of handling incoming datagrams based on the IP access type you set Priority levels include e Deny Filter Allows you to filter out traffic based on the specified configuration e Permit Fwd pri8 high to pril low Allows you to prioritize traffic based on the specified configuration e Permit Fwd with no change in priority Allows you to forward traffic with no change in priority Source Subnet e Source Address The IP address of a subnet that is denied or granted access to the switch e Source Wildcard A range of IP addresses that are denied or granted access to the switch Place the number one 1 in the bit positions you want to ignore Destination Subnet e Dest Address The IP address of a subnet that is denied or granted access to data from the switch Dest Address Wildcard A range of IP addresses of subnets that are denied or granted access to the switch Place the number one 1 in the bit positions you want
248. ip This feature allows the same host to appear on different VLANs on different ports 1 8 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Cajun P550 Switch Overview O Optional per VLAN spanning tree This isolates loop control to smaller domains so spanning trees converge faster after a topology change Otherwise packets are forwarded to the port s default VLAN VLAN Functions A VLAN Virtual LAN is a logical group of hosts on a local area network LAN that communicate as if they were on the same wire even though they are physically on different LAN segments throughout a site Virtual LANs provide network managers with two significant capabilities O The ability to segment traffic in a flat switched network This helps prevent traffic from being forwarded to stations where it is not needed O The ability to ignore physical switch locations when creating workgroups VLANs are logical constructions and can traverse physical switch boundaries The switch hardware supports Layer 1 Layer 2 and Layer 3 VLANs The switch based VLANs have the following characteristics O Frames classified as they enter the switch using Layer 1 Port based O Explicitly tagged VLAN packets are forwarded based on the information in the packet O VLANs define a set of ports in a flooding domain Packets that need to be flooded are sent only to ports participating in that VLAN Figure 1 5 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 1 9 Cajun P55
249. is reported in an HH MM SS format Times this VR became master Number of instances that the virtual router became the Master Advertisements Number of advertisements received matching the VRRP Received Virtual Router configuration Advertisements Sent Number of advertisements sent by the VRRP Virtual Router Bad Advertisements Number of advertisements received by the VRRP Virtual Received Router with invalid parameters Configuring IRDP ICMP Router Discovery Protocol IRDP is an alternative router discovery protocol using ICMP messages on multicast links ICMP uses router discovery messages known as router advertisements and router solicitations Each router periodically multicasts a router advertisement from each of its multicast interfaces announcing the IP address of that interface and other router IP addresses Hosts discover the addresses of their neighbor routers by listening for the Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 45 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 advertisements When a host attached to a multicast link starts up it may multicast a router solicitation to ask for immediate advertisements rather than waiting for the next periodic one to arrive If no advertisements arrive the host may re transmit the solicitation a small number of times but then must stop sending more solicitations Routers that subsequently start up or were not discovered because of packet loss or tem
250. ist rules 7 9 creating IPX RIP filters 5 2 creating IPX SAP filters 6 2 creating IPX SAP network filters 6 5 creating IPX static routes 4 6 creating IPX static services 4 7 creating OSPF summaries 9 7 creating OSPF virtual links 9 5 creating static ARP entries IP static route 7 14 creating static IP routes 7 14 crossbar 1 6 features 2 3 crossbar features 2 3 crossbar features supported 1 6 crossbar switch fabric 2 2 current entries forwarding cache FE parameters 11 6 current number of routes AppleTalk route table statistics 10 15 DVMRP routing statistical parameters 7 36 IP routing table statistical parameters 7 26 current number of zones AppleTalk zone table statistics 10 17 current power available power system statistical parameters 3 40 current system entries Layer 3 cache configuration 11 3 D data bits console serial port settings 3 25 day one time summer time hours configuration 3 38 summer time hours configuration 3 36 DD number OSPF neighbors parameters 9 11 DDP forward counter AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 DDP input counter AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 Index 7 DDP local counter AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 DDP output counter AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 DDP output long AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 DDP output short AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 dead interval OSPF interface parameters 9 5 OSPF virtual link parameters 9 6 debug protocol event log s
251. istics dialog box opens Click either 30 second or 30 minute RMON History Samples The Ethernet Interface history statistics window opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 17 1 Analyzing Network Performance Using RMON and Ethernet Statistics Layer 2 amp Layer 3 7 Use Table 17 1 to interpret the Ethernet Interface statistical values Table 17 1 Interpreting Ethernet Interface Statistics Statistic Indicates Actions Sample The sample number N A Interval Start The date and time this log entry N A was made Utilization Percentage of utilization The percentage of available bandwidth used by traffic Bytes Raw number of octets received at A sharp increase could indicate a the interface Provides some need to reconfigure the network indication of the amount of network bandwidth being used Packets Counts the raw number of readable A sharp increase could indicate a Ethernet packets of legal length need to reconfigure the network received at the interface However octets are a better indication of bandwidth utilization Broadcasts Broadcast packets are a normal part Uses monitoring to recognize of network operation For example IP networks use broadcasts as part of Address Resolution Protocol ARP to resolve network addresses oncoming broadcast storms Broadcast storms occur when stations are creating traffic that generates more traffic Possible cause Broadcasts caus
252. itch Fabric Of failures in the switch fabric These are critical failures and should be monitored closely 16 8 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Monitoring the Cajun Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 16 7 Event Table Continued Determines whether or not the switch sends Class NA a notification OSPF For OSPF events if OSPF protocol event logging is enabled RIP For RIP events if RIP protocol event logging is enabled LDAP For LDAP events if LDAP protocol event logging is enabled AppleTalk For AppleTalk events if AppleTalk protocol event logging is enabled 5 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Configuring Event Notification To configure event notification 1 In the Event Subsystem section of the Web Agent window click Event Configuration The Event Management dialog box opens 2 In the ID column click event type The delivery of event information is enabled when this type of event occurs 3 Use Table 16 8 to configure Event Table actions If no events are selected no action will be taken when an event of this event class occurs Table 16 8 Event Table Actions Setting Determines Log Event entry entered in event and shutdown logs Trap SNMP trap message event notification sent to designated trap receivers Console Displays the event information to the console serial port connected at the switch front panel
253. itch to deliver multicast traffic between neighboring routers and across the network For example the switch could use Internet Group Membership Protocol IGMP Only to forward multicast traffic to locally attached subnetworks However if the multicast traffic in question is needed to be sent to a neighboring router the switch could use DVMRP to send the information between routers Since IGMP is a required protocol for any multicast routing protocol for example DVMRP it is automatically enabled when you enable DVMRP Note You must globally enable IP multicast routing in order to successfully configure IGMP or DVMRP Refer to Configuring IP Global Routing earlier in this chapter for instructions on enabling IP multicast routing Configuring IGMP IGMP enables hosts to inform routers when they join or leave groups Routers periodically query hosts query interval for the groups in which the hosts are members When there is more than one router in a broadcast domain subnet one of the routers becomes the designated querier Only the designated router queries the hosts Both IGMP Version 1 0 and IGMP Version 2 0 are supported After selecting the specific IGMP version for an interface you can manually configure the Version 1 0 querier The selection of the querier for Version 2 0 is dynamic but can be overridden Enabling the IGMP Global Configuration To enable IGMP global configuration 1 In the IP Configuration section o
254. ited to using protocol destination address only e SA DA Forwarding entries input to the forwarding table are limited to using destination and source address only Aging IP Unicast Configure the IP unicast IP multicast or IPX IP Multicast forwarding table entry aging status as either IPX enabled or disabled Age Interval IP Unicast The IP unicast IP multicast or IPX IP Multicast forwarding table entry aging period in IPX seconds The default value is 120 seconds Maximum IP Unicast The number of active entries in the IP Entries unicast IP multicast or IPX forwarding table IP Multicast IPX This is the maximum number of active entries per fabric port Additional flows are forwarded by the supervisor module The default value is 15000 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Monitoring and Configuring the Forwarding Cache Layer 3 Table 11 2 Layer 3 Cache Configuration System Configuration System Configuration Field Defines Maximum System Entries A user specified number This number is the maximum number of entries allowed for the entire system all fabric ports The default value is 130000 Current System Entries The current total number of entries for the entire system all fabric ports The default value is 0 System Entries Failures The current total system entry failures 3 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Click REFRES
255. ive on the network do not remain in the switch address forwarding table indefinitely Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to clear the dialog box fields 14 6 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 15 Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures address both Layer 2 and Layer 3 configurations Included in this chapter Introduction Configuring Global Intelligent Multicasting Displaying Router Ports Configuring Static Router Ports Searching for Intelligent Multicast Sessions Creating a Static Multicast Session Configuring IGMP Snooping Layer 3 only Configuring the LGMP Server Configuring Viewing an LGMP Client Oo 90 0 0 000 U 0 Configuring Viewing CGMP Snooping Introduction Intelligent multicasting refers to the forwarding of Layer 2 multicast traffic packets with a multicast destination MAC address to a subset of ports participating in a VLAN With intelligent multicasting disabled Layer 2 multicast traffic is flooded to all ports participating in the VLAN on which the traffic is received Intelligent multicasting is used to limit the forwarding of Layer 2 multicast traffic to only those ports within the VLAN that have clients attached to them that want to receive this multicast traffic Limiting this forwarding reduces the amount of traffic to ports that do not have clients wanting to receive the multicast traffic A multicast se
256. k route table statistics 10 15 Index 39
257. l lists to the primary server if the client finds the primary server The primary server retrieves the access lists from the LDAP database and returns them to the switch s LDAP client If the client does not find the primary server and if the primary server does not respond after five retries the client tries to connect to the secondary server If the secondary server fails after five retries the client times out The LDAP client applies the access lists to manage the way traffic is forwarded Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 49 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Viewing LDAP Statistics To view LDAP statistics 1 In the IP Display section of the Web console click LDAP Statistics The LDAP Statistics dialog box opens 2 Click Refresh to dynamically update LDAP Statistics data LDAP Statistics include Table 7 35 LDAP Statistics Parameter Definition Last Change Displays the sysUpTime in the device that this Policy Capability was last modified Providing this allows a remote manager to detect a change in the Policy Capabilities by polling a single object On seeing this value change an interested manager should relearn this device s Policy Capabilities For more detailed information about SysUpTime and Policy Capabilities refer to lucentDevicePolicyCapabilityLastChange in the Lucent MIB Producer Signal The sequence number that when modified triggers the LDAP client to download the latest policy from th
258. l of spanning tree to control routes between switches in the Cajun Network This creates smaller spanning tree domains and provides quicker convergence upon reconfiguration Managing Spanning Trees To manage spanning trees 1 In the Switching Parameters section of the Web Agent window click Spanning Tree The Spanning Tree Information dialog box opens 2 From the Configuration pull down menu select the type of spanning tree you want to implement 3 Use Table 12 3 to select your Spanning Tree options Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 12 7 Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Layer 2 and Layer 3 Table 12 3 Spanning Tree Options Parameter Definition IEEE 802 1D Entire switch is a single IEEE 802 1D compliant bridge Note When the spanning tree mode is set to IEEE 802 D BPDUs are sent out ports in Clear non trunked format even if the port has a trunking format 3Com 802 1Q or Dual Layer defined Per VLAN Each VLAN functions as a separate IEEE 802 1D compliant bridge Note If you disable spanning tree on a single VLAN spanning tree will be re enabled when the switch is reset In order for spanning tree to function properly with 3Com trunked ports the spanning tree mode should be set to per VLAN In Per VLAN spanning tree there is one instance of spanning tree for each VLAN and the BPDUs are tagged with the VLAN ID ensuring they are interpreted correctly on the receiving end Dual La
259. lay as in Figure 3 9 3 42 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Figure 3 9 Properly Installed Redundant Hardware Settings Switch Fabric Status Component State Switch Controller 0 Active Redundant Controller Available Switch Elements Normal 0 Redundant Element Available Toggle Active Controller Toggle Enable Redundant Element Normal Apply Configure Redundant Hardware ves Apply 6 From the Configure Redundant Hardware pull down menu select Yes 7 Click APPLY to save your changes The redundant hardware is enabled If the primary controller fails the redundant controller takes over in its place If an element fails the redundant element takes over in its place Replacing the Primary Controller If the primary controller fails you are notified by a console message and an event log message In the Web Agent the Switch Controller field displays 0 Failed If the switch is installed with a redundant controller the redundant controller automatically takes over the operation of the failed primary controller To replace the primary controller 1 In the System Information section of the Web Agent window click Switch Fabric The Switch Fabric Status dialog box displays 2 From the Configure Redundant Hardware pull down menu select No 3 Click APPLY to disable the primary controller Cajun
260. le 17 3 Port Mirroring Configuration Parameters Definition List of available selections Enables you to select a particular source port associated with the selected fabric port You can also select all ports Note To mirror inbound traffic only select a source port and a mirror port not a piggyback port Mirror Port Port from which you want to send the traffic This port can be on another module in the switch Once a specific port associated with a fabric port has been designated a mirror port other ports associated with that fabric port no longer appear on the selection list Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 17 7 Analyzing Network Performance Using RMON and Ethernet Statistics Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 17 3 Port Mirroring Configuration Parameters Continued Parameter Piggyback Port Definition Port used to enable bi directional port mirroring If no piggyback port is specified only received traffic from the source port will go to the mirror port The piggyback port should have the same bandwidth as the source port Only one port per fabric can be used as a piggyback port Sampling rates have no effect on transmitted information Considerations e You cannot use a port that has been designated as a piggyback port Once a port has been designated as a piggyback port the link light is turned on even if there is no connection on the selected port The piggyback port is displayed i
261. le before being deleted O Address Table Sizing Parameters allow you to adjust what the switch does when address table use becomes inefficient The Address Table dialog box also provides information useful when working with Lucent support personnel Configuring the Age Timer and Super Age Timer To change the aging values for all instances of the address table 1 In the Address Forwarding Table section of the Web Agent window click Table Configuration The Address Forwarding Table Configuration dialog box opens 2 In the Age Time field enter a new value The default of 300 seconds is the standards recommended default Aged out addresses become invalid until the switch sees another packet with the aged out entry s source address Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 14 1 Managing Address Forwarding Tables Layer 2 amp Layer 3 3 4 In the Super Age Time field enter a new value The Super Age Timer marks all invalid table entries then checks to see if they remain invalid for the specified super age interval This clears the table of entries that are no longer used The default value is 7 days Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Controlling Reconfiguration of Address Table Sizes Each VLAN you define creates a separate version of the switch address forwarding table When these address tables become large they may begin to use address space inefficiently If you leav
262. lsius Checking Active Alarms Each switch stores a table of active alarms This allows you to view a list of open issues in the switch without having to view the entire event log By doing this you can quickly obtain a snapshot of the switch s health Viewing the Active Alarm Table To view the Active Alarm Table in the Event Subsystem section of the Web Agent window click Active Alarms The Active Alarm Table opens Using the Event Subsystem There are two switch system activity logs for Layer 3 O Event Log stores a large table of events The size of the table is user settable Because these events are stored in switch memory the list is cleared each time the switch reboots Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 16 3 Monitoring the Cajun Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 O Shutdown Log stores the same information as the Event Log but generally in a smaller table because the table is stored in the switch s nonvolatile RAM NVRAM This log list is particularly useful in assessing the cause of a switch failure because the information is retained even after the switch restarts Configuring the Protocol Event Log You can use the protocol event log to enable RIP and OSPF packet tracing for Layer 3 only RIP requests and responses received and sent through all RIP interfaces are logged to the event log as protocol events OSPF packet types received and sent through all OSPF interfaces are logged to the event log as protoc
263. mation on the DVMRP neighbor router s Displaying DVMRP Neighbor Router s To view the DVMRP neighbor routers 1 In the DVMRP Display section of the Web Agent window click Interface Statistics The DVMRP Interface Statistics dialog box opens 2 In the DVMRP Neighbor Router s column click on the number where the number is 1 or more to view DVMRP neighbor routers 3 Use Table 7 21 to view more information on DVMRP neighbor routers 7 34 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Parameter Neighbor Network Address Table 7 21 DVMRP Neighbor Routers Displays The neighbor router s network address Found on Interface The neighbor routers found on this interface DVMRP Supported Major Minor Version The DVMRP version supported by the neighbor router Expiration period in sec The time in seconds before the neighbor router times out Neighbor Received Probe From This Router Whether the neighbor router received this router s probe message Neighbor Supports Prune Function Whether the neighbor router supports prune functionality Neighbor Supports Generation ID Function Whether the neighbor router supports generation of IDs Neighbor Supports MTRACE Requests Whether the neighbor router supports MTRACE requests Neighbor is SNMP Manageable Whether the neighbor router can be managed by SNMP Displayin
264. mes to pause traffic when buffers are full Packed frame buffers for optimal memory utilization The memory management allows virtually 100 utilization of buffer memory Two Class of Service priority queues that provide flexible queue management algorithms to meet application requirements Large buffer space e 512 KB per gigabit port e 128 KB additional for outbound 10 100 ports Configurable queue depth for each of two prioritized packet queues Configurable priority threshold Web Based Management Web based management allows you to manage switches from any station connected to your network The switch offers a command line interface and a rich set of web based management features O O Reduced Instruction Set Computing based RISC Supervisor provides high speed VLAN RMON and network management support Web Agent Built in SNMP and HTML based agent compatible with popular Web browsers provides top to bottom switch management 1 14 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Cajun P550 Switch Overview Smart Agent Smart Agent the software for the Supervisor Module has the following features Built in support for Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP and HTML Out of band from 10Base T or RS 232 In band from a defined VLAN Powerful alarm and event logging subsystem OQ n Point and click interface with Netscape Navigator V3 0 or later or Microsoft Internet Explorer V3 0 or later
265. mission Note This counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams IP Out Discards Number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination but were discarded for example for lack of buffer space Note that this counter includes datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this discretionary discard criterion IP Out No Routes Number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams which meet this no route criterion Note that this includes any Datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down IP Reassembly Timeout Maximum number of seconds that received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity IP Reassembly Required Number of IP fragments received that need to be reassembled 7 22 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Table 7 11 1P Routing Global Statistics Continued Statistic IP Reassembly OKs Defines the Number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled IP Reassembly Failures Number of failures detected by the IP re assembly algorithm timeout errors Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms can lose track of t
266. module console or inband has a separate IP address For Layer 3 this location can be that of any of the router interfaces Press Enter The login window opens Click Login The Username Password dialog box opens Enter a valid user name The default super user name is root Enter a valid password The default password is root The Web Agent window opens Figure 3 3 Note Change the root password for the system as soon as possible to optimize security Setting Up User Accounts User accounts set up in the system allow you to access both the command line interface and the Web Agent To add a user to this interface 1 9 i AY Log in to the switch from your Web browser using a user name with administrator privileges The default login of user root password root has this authority The Web Agent application window opens In the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window select User Logins The User Account Management dialog box opens Click Add User The Add User Account dialog box opens In the User Name field enter a user name for the account In the Password field enter a password for the account In the Re enter Password field re enter the same password 3 6 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 7 From the Access Type pull down menu select an access type Table 3 3 Table 3 3 User Account Access Levels User Level Can Canno
267. mum age for this spanning tree Determined by the root bridge Hello Time Current hello time for this spanning tree Determined by the root bridge Forward Delay Current forwarding delay for this spanning tree Set by the root bridge 7 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Ports To configure spanning tree bridge ports 1 In the Switching Parameters section of the Web Agent window click Spanning Tree The Spanning Tree Information dialog box opens 2 In the Bridge Ports column click the port number listed The Spanning Tree Bridge Port Information dialog box opens 3 Use Table 12 5 to configure the Spanning Tree Bridge port parameters Table 12 5 Spanning Tree Bridge Port Parameters Parameter Options Bridge Port The bridge port Port The spanning tree bridge port number Name The name assigned to the bridge port Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 12 9 Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Layer 2 and Layer 3 Table 12 5 Spanning Tree Bridge Port Parameters Continued State Current bridging state of the port The options are Disabled The port is disabled Blocking The Spanning Tree algorithm has set this port s state to block meaning that it is enabled but not passing traffic e Listening The port is in a transitional state waiting for the spanning tree algorithm to determine whe
268. n be added The Services system rounds up your entry to the nearest power of 2 For example if you enter 1000 the system rounds this number up to 1024 services The default value is 2048 3 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings and close the dialog box Configuring IPX Interfaces You can create new IPX interfaces and associate up to four interfaces of different encapsulation types to a VLAN The concept of more than one IPX interface on a VLAN is referred to as multinetting To create a new IPX interface 1 From the IPX Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Interfaces The IPX Interfaces dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE The Add IPX Interface dialog box opens 3 From the VLAN pull down menu select the VLAN to which you want to assign an IPX network address Note If you need to create a new VLAN refer to Creating and Implementing VLANs in Chapter 10 4 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 4 Use Table 4 3 to complete the configuration of your IPX interface Parameter Select Table 4 3 PX Interface Parameters Allows you to Select the interface to be configured Note This parameter is displayed in the IPX Interface dialog box not in the Add IPX Interface dialog box State Display the current state of the interface Options include Up e Down Note This parameter is displayed in
269. n errors 7 23 ICMP in messages 7 23 ICMP in parameter problems 7 23 ICMP in redirects 7 23 ICMP in source quenches 7 23 ICMP in time exceeds 7 23 ICMP in timestamp replys 7 23 ICMP in timestamp requests 7 23 ICMP out address mask reply 7 24 ICMP out address mask requests 7 24 ICMP out destination unreachable 7 24 ICMP out echo reply 7 24 ICMP out echo requests 7 24 ICMP out errors 7 23 ICMP out messages 7 23 ICMP out parameter problems 7 24 ICMP out redirects 7 24 ICMP out source quenches 7 24 ICMP out time exceeded 7 24 ICMP out timestamp reply 7 24 ICMP out timestamp request 7 24 IP forward datagrams 7 22 IP fragmentation creates 7 23 IP fragmentation failures 7 23 IP fragmentation OKs 7 23 IP in address errors 7 22 IP in delivers 7 22 IP in discards 7 22 IP in header errors 7 21 IP in receives 7 21 IP in unknown protocols 7 22 IP multicast forward datagrams 7 24 IP multicast in discard 7 24 IP multicast in receives 7 24 IP out discards 7 22 IP out no routes 7 22 IP out requests 7 22 IP reassembly failures 7 23 IP reassembly OKs 7 23 IP reassembly required 7 22 IP reassembly timeout 7 22 IP routing discards 7 23 UDP in datagrams 7 24 UDP in errors 7 24 UDP in no ports 7 24 UDP out datagrams 7 24 IP routing search table deleting local entries from routing table 7 26 IP routing statistics 7 21 IP routing table searching 7 25 IP routing table search parameters interface 7 25
270. n place of the source port in the VLAN menu e Ifthe source and piggyback ports are at a higher bandwidth than the mirror port s bandwidth the traffic on the source port may exceed the bandwidth that the mirror port can handle The piggyback port will always show that it is using multi layer tagging e A spanning tree topology change occurs when you change a piggyback port e Piggyback ports display in certain views of the Cajun P550 Switch user interface where you typically expect to find information about a source port For example the VLAN Switch Ports list which displays the list of ports associated with a VLAN includes the piggyback port but not the source port In the Intelligent Multicast Session Search and Static Multicast Sessions views the piggyback port displays in place of the source port when piggyback port mirroring is enabled Note To mirror outbound traffic only select a source mirror and piggyback port Set the sampling to disable Since disabling sampling only applies to inbound traffic only outbound traffic is received Sampler Type Selects how often you want the mirror port to receive traffic samples e Always sends all samples e Periodic sends samples at the interval described below e Disabled shuts off traffic samples to the mirror port but keeps the association intact Sampling Interval Displays the number of packets per second that are served by the mirror port
271. n port VLAN combination egress rules determine whether frames transmitted from the port on the VLAN are tagged or untagged This is accomplished by setting the Trunking Mode attribute in the Switch Port Configuration dialog box For example choosing the IEEE 802 1Q trunk mode causes all frames transmitted out of the port to be tagged using the IEEE 802 1Q tag header format Individual port VLAN combinations may be changed to cause frames transmitted from the port to be untagged for particular VLANs Port Based VLANs VLAN assignment of a packet is based on global VLAN ID Regardless of any name you assign to a VLAN the switch looks only at the VLAN ID number to determine a packet s VLAN destination 12 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Layer 2 and Layer 3 Creating and Implementing VLANs Adding users to VLANs includes O VLAN Considerations O Creating a VLAN O Assigning Ports To VLANs VLAN Considerations Be aware of the following issues when configuring VLANs Q Creating a The default setting for Initial Hash Table Size a number used to determine how much space is initially reserved for new address tables supports 58 simultaneous VLANs the switch supports 1 000 VLANs To increase the number of VLANs you can implement simply decrease the initial hash table size for each new address table instance The switch powers up very slowly when large numbers o
272. n section of the Web Agent window click Static Routes The IP Static Routes dialog box opens Click CREATE The Add IP Static Routes dialog box opens This allows you to define a static route for the PPP console In the Network Address field enter the IP address to be associated with the PPP console port In the Mask field enter the network mask IP address In the Next Hop Address field enter the IP address of the gateway associated with this static route Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings 3 30 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Hardware Requirements for Routing To configure your switch as an IP IPX router you must first configure your Cajun switch with the following hardware O Layer 3 supervisor module mandatory O Layer 3 media modules optional including e 2 Port Gigabit Ethernet module e 10 Port 100 Base F module e 12 Port 10 100 Base T module Configuring IP Routing on the Switch The Cajun P550 Switch with Integrated Routing combines scalable wire speed IP Layer 3 switching routing with 10 100 1000 Ethernet Layer 2 switching bridging in a high capacity chassis based system The product emphasizes traditional standards compliant IP operation and ample capacity to avoid bottlenecks For more detailed information on Cajun P550 Switch routing operations refer to Routing with Layer 2 and Layer 3
273. nd the online help system to the server machine and drive Starting the Lucent HTTP Web Server To run the Lucent HTTP server 1 Click on your Win32 NT Start Menu 2 Select the CajunDocs program group and select document server from that program group The Lucent document server will launch To access this server from a Web browser you need to set a server location on the switch as specified in the next section XV Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Preface Entering the Server Location at the Switch To set the location of the documentation server 1 2 Launch your Web browser and connect to your switch Enter your user name and password at the respective prompts and click Login In the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Server Location The Online Help Configuration dialog box opens In the HTTP Server Location field enter the host name or IP address of the HTTP server followed by the server name with a port designation of 2010 for example for a host named phantom enter http phantom 2010 If you decide to install your online help on a Web server other than the Lucent HTTP server bundled on the CajunDocs CD ROM then specify the URL without a port number if your Web server runs on port 80 for example http www abc company com If your Web server does not run on port 80 you need to add the port number for example http host path port Note The default port number fo
274. nerating Host Membership Reports reporting each host group to which they belong on the network interface from which the Query was received Group Membership Number of query messages sent by all local IGMP Queries Transmitted interfaces These messages are sent to discover which host groups have members on their attached local networks Queries are addressed to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 and carry an IP time to live of 1 Group Membership Number of query messages received by all local IGMP Queries Received interfaces All hosts that receive this query transmit a group membership report reporting each host group to which they belong Unknown Messages IGMP message of a type other than Group Membership Received Query Group Membership Report or Leave group Examining IGMP Interface Statistics The IGMP interface statistics allow you to view IGMP statistics for each configured IP interface with multicast enabled To view IGMP interface statistics 1 In the IGMP Display section of the Web Agent window click Interface Statistics The IGMP Interface Statistics dialog box opens 7 28 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 2 Click REFRESH to view the latest interface statistics Or Click CLEAR to reset all statistics to zero 3 Use Table 7 16 to review the IGMP interface statistics Table 7 16 GMP Interface Statistical Parameters Parameter Define
275. nes along the entire path that frames travel The default case is that when output buffers fill up frames destined for a particular buffer will be dropped This should only occur in a case where the output port is very congested However there is an optional mode which in which normal priority frames are never dropped inside the switch In this mode input buffers may fill up If they do the affected input ports may use flow control to temporarily halt traffic from neighboring switches Managing Buffers and Queues To manage buffers and queues 1 From the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Modules and Ports The Module Information dialog box opens 2 In the Buffer Management column click the Module number for the module whose buffers you want to manage The Buffer Management dialog box opens 3 Use Table 3 to view your buffer management parameters 13 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Tuning Your Switch Performance Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 13 1 Buffer Management Parameters Parameter Definition Fabric Port Buffers Displays the port s fabric port buffers and allows you to open the Buffer Detail Configuration dialog box for the selected module Service ratios e 3tol 9to 1 e 999 to 1 e 9999 to 1 Physical Port Buffers Displays the port s physical port buffers if available Service ratios e 3l1to 1 63to 1 e 127to 1 e 255to 1 511 to 1 1023 to 1 2047 to 1 40
276. nformation for this VLAN Use the default value The general implementation rule is Use a smaller size when you implement lots of VLANs more than 50 Use a larger size when you have lots of MAC addresses on the same VLAN in the network more than 16 000 Note The number of address for a given hash table is 4 1 for example if you have a hash table of 16 bytes the VLAN can hold 64 addresses in it s table instance Auto Increment Determines whether the number of memory buckets used by HT Size this VLAN s address table adjusts automatically when memory use become inefficient Select true if you want the HT size to increase when the number of entries belonging to this VLAN reaches a pre defined threshold Select false to disable this feature 6 Click APPLY to create the new VLAN or CANCEL to restore previous settings Configuring VLAN Parameters To configure all ports assigned to a VLAN 1 In the Switching Parameters section of the Web Agent window click Virtual LANs The VLAN Configuration dialog box opens 2 Click on the Name of the VLAN whose members you want to view The VLAN Switch Ports dialog box opens 3 Use Table 12 2 to configure the VLAN parameters Table 12 2 VLAN Switch Port Table Parameters parameter pene O Port The VLAN switch port Port Name The user assigned name for this port 12 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Group
277. nging baud rate 3 25 data bits 3 25 flow control 3 25 parity 3 25 stop bits 3 25 consumer signal LDAP statistics 7 50 contacting Lucent xx controller redundancy enabling 3 42 controlling address table size reconfiguration 14 2 conventions xvii cooling system status displaying 3 40 copy destination configuration file management 3 48 copy source configuration file management 3 48 copying configuration invalid combinations 3 49 from the switch or server to a configuration file 3 47 running configuration to startup configuration 3 47 startup configuration to running configuration 3 47 to a TFTP server 3 47 to the switch 3 47 copying files 3 49 copying from to a TFTP server 3 49 copying source files 3 47 copying the running configuration 3 49 copying the startup configuration 3 49 cost IP static route parameters 7 14 OSPF interface parameters 9 5 CRC alignment errors Ethernet interface statistical parameters 17 3 creating a BOOTP DHCP server entry 7 15 creating a multinet interface 7 8 creating a static client port 15 11 creating a VRRP router 7 43 creating access rules for filtering traffic between subnets 7 12 creating an AppleTalk interface 10 3 creating an AppleTalk static route 10 6 creating an AppleTalk zone filter 10 9 creating an IP interface 7 2 creating an IPX interface 4 4 creating an NBP filter AppleTalk 10 8 creating an VRRP virtual router 7 43 creating IP interface access l
278. nks oooooooooooor nee eens 9 6 Modifying OSPF Virtual Links 20 0 0 o e e a A nee eens 9 7 Creating OSPF Summaries aii a eee Be CAN HG o BA oe a 9 7 Deleting OSPF Summaries 0 0 eee eee nes 9 8 Modifying OSPF Summaries e nanag een d eaaa O ee nent eens 9 8 Monitoring Switch Performance Using OSPF Statistics 0 cee eee eee eee 9 8 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide viii Displaying OSPF StatistiCS eat is hin na m na e a E e a ar i a E ada aa a ae aa 9 8 Displaying OSPR LOKS A A AA E it Tae aS 9 10 Displaying OSPF Neighbors sste eee a e A ne ae 4 9 10 Searching the OSPF Link State Database 0 0 cee eee 9 12 Viewing LSA Details a se gee dees ee ayo a ee desde ae 9 15 Chapter 10 Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 OVENVIC Wie id A ada Dre eid dane petal dg A A A A ate nado dt 10 1 AppleTalk Routing Overview iaa Oe eS ad hee Ee ee ee ee 10 1 Configuring AppleTalk Routing 0 ne eens 10 2 Enabling AppleTalk Global Routing 0 eee ee eee 10 2 Creating an AppleTalk Routing Interface 0 0 neeaae 10 3 Editing AppleTalk Interlaces a fed Seanad a aida 10 4 Deleting an AppleTalk Interface o o o o o oooooororo eee eee 10 5 Creating an AppleTalk Static Route 0 0 eens 10 6 Editing AppleTalk Static Routes 0 0c nee eens 10 7 Deleting an AppleTalk Static Route 0 ee een 10 7 Creating an AppleTalk NBP F
279. nnecessary traffic flooding on a mirror port put the mirror port on the same VLAN as the source port To set up an RMON mirror port 1 In the Port Mirroring section of the Web Agent window click Sampling The Port Mirroring Information dialog box opens 2 Use Table 17 2 to view your port mirroring information 17 6 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Analyzing Network Performance Using RMON and Ethernet Statistics Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Parameter Configure Source Table 17 2 Port Mirroring Information Parameters Definition Mirroring Configuration dialog box Select the configuration source port Provides a link to the Port Source Port Displays the port under investigation Mirror Port Displays the port that transmits mirrored data Mirror Port Name Displays the name of the mirror port device Piggyback Port uses Displays the name of the port that is used for bi directional port mirroring When used as a mirror port it is unavailable for other Sampler Type traffic Displays the speed of sampling that is performed for source port Max Packets per Second Displays the maximum number of packets per second that are served by the mirror port 3 In the Configure Source column click a source port for the traffic The Port Mirroring Configuration dialog box opens 4 Use Table 17 3 to select options for the mirror port Parameter Source Port s Tab
280. nstallation your configuration parameters are stored in a startup txt file located in the switch s Non Volatile Random Access Memory NVRAM When the switch is restarted the startup txt file runs and stores configuration parameters in volatile RAM as a running configuration Changes you make to the switch configuration are automatically recorded in RAM but not in NVRAM When you want to retain your current configuration you must manually save itto NVRAM through the Web Agent or the Command Line Interface CLI For information about how to save your running configuration file to your startup configuration refer to Copying Running Configuration to Startup Configuration later in this section To determine changes you have made to your running configuration you can view and compare your running and startup configuration files Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 45 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Viewing Your Running Configuration To view your running configuration O In the CLI Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Running Configuration Or O In priv mode in the Command Line Interface enter show running_config Viewing Your Startup Configuration To view your startup configuration O In the CLI Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Startup Configuration Or O In priv mode in the Command Line Interface enter show startup_config Viewing Your Script Ex
281. nt on the interface e Both Applies the filter to SAP packets both sent and received on the interface Filter Suppress Select to enable or disable whether the services matching Net and Type are filtered inbound or suppressed outbound e Filtered Applies the filter only to SAP packets received inbound direction on the interface e Suppressed Applies the filter only to SAP packets sent outbound direction on the interface Select Enable to filter suppress traffic Select Disable to disable the filtering and suppression of traffic Hops 4 Click CREATE Specify the number of routers hops that the packet must pass through before reaching the service s matched by the filter This entry is used to override the value in the SAP packet Entering 0 ensures that there is no override in the transmission of data on the network to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Example Filtering all Services Except Netware Directory Services NDS To configure your sw create two filters To create these filters Filter 1 itch to filter all services except NDS on Interface Remote you must 1 In the IPX SAP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Net Filters 2 Click CREATE to create a new filter The Add IPX SAP Net Filter dialog box opens 3 Configure the following parameters a From the Interface pull down menu select Remote b In the Precedence field enter O
282. nt this port to recognize and use 3Com s PACE priority mechanism 15 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings 3 10 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 3 5 describes the Fast Ethernet port parameters Table 3 5 FastEthernet 10 100 Port Parameters Parameter Name Definition A user assigned name for this port possibly a drop name or the name of the station or other device connected to the port Category Allows you to select either User Port or Service Port e The User Port is intended for use with switch connections to end user nodes e The Service Port is intended for use with switch connections to servers or other switches The Service Port allows the switch to generate both log messages and alarm messages traps The User Port only generates log messages preventing your network management station from being overwhelmed by port up down messages that result from users turning workstations on and off Speed Mode Allows you to select the speed of the port manually to either 10 or 100 Mb s If auto negotiation is enabled this setting is ignored Duplex Mode Allows you set the port duplex mode half or full duplex If auto negotiation is enabled this setting is ignored Flow Control Mode Determines if flow control is used on this port For half duplex links active backpressure
283. ntelligent multicasting 15 3 LGMP client 15 3 interface add IP interface parameters 7 2 AppleTalk ARP cache table statistics 10 16 AppleTalk interface parameters 10 3 AppleTalk interface statistics 10 13 AppleTalk NBP filter parameters 10 8 AppleTalk NBP table parameters 10 17 AppleTalk route table statistics 10 15 AppleTalk zone filter parameters 10 10 creating a VRRP virtual router 7 43 DVMRP interface parameters 7 20 DVMRP interface statistical parameters 7 33 enabling VRRP 7 43 IGMP interface parameters 7 17 IGMP interface statistical parameters 7 29 IP helper address parameters 7 51 IP interface parameters 7 6 IP routing table search parameters 7 25 IP static ARP parameters 7 15 IPX interface 4 5 IPX RIP filter parameters 5 3 IPX RIP interface statistical parameters 5 6 IPX route table parameter 4 11 IPX routing table search parameters 4 11 IPX SAP filter parameters 6 3 IPX SAP interface parameters 6 1 IPX SAP interface statistical parameters 6 8 IPX SAP network filter parameters 6 5 IPX service table parameter 4 14 IPX service table search parameter 4 13 IPX static route 4 6 IPX static service parameter 4 8 IRDP parameters 7 46 16 Index OSPF interface parameters 9 4 RIP interface parameters 8 2 RIP statistical parameters 8 4 VRRP authentication 7 44 VRRP configuration parameters 7 43 VRRP statistical parameters 7 45 interface is pruned DVMRP downstream link parameters 7 42 up
284. ntinued lower speed ports by placing a threshold on the percentage of port traffic that can be flooded packets unknown unicasts and multicasts You can optionally include known multicast packets in this percentage to further decrease the possibility of the port s output buffer being overwhelmed Rate Limit Rate Determines the percentage of a port s forwarded traffic that can be unknown unicast and multicast flooded Lower this value if the port has overflow problems Rate Limit Burst Size Determines the limit of packets allowed in a single burst Accepted values are 1 to 2048 For Fast Ethernet ports set this value lower than 1024 output buffer capacity Lower this value if the port has overflow problems Port PACE Priority Determines if the port detects 3Com s proprietary PACE format as packets pass through the port PACE allows a packet s priority higher priority packets move through the switch before lower priority packets to be set at the adapter Using the All Ports Configuration Dialog Box The All Ports Configuration dialog box allows you to apply the same parameter settings to all switch ports for P220 switches and in a module for the P550 using a single command To set all ports in a module 1 2 In the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window select Modules amp Ports The Module Information dialog box opens In the Ports column click the number for the module you
285. o route deletes forwarding cache FE parameters 11 6 entry expiration period in sec IGMP group membership table parameters 7 31 entry type address table instance parameters 14 2 entry validity address table instance parameters 14 3 E option OSPF neighbors parameters 9 11 error protocol event log settings 16 5 Ethernet interface statistical parameters broadcast packets 17 2 bytes 17 2 CRC alignment errors 17 3 fragments 17 4 interval start 17 2 jabbers 17 5 multicast packets 17 3 oversize packets 17 4 packets 17 2 sample 17 2 undersize packets 17 4 utilization 17 2 Ethernet interface statistics configuring 17 1 Ethernet statistics RMON viewing 17 1 event and shutdown log entries description 16 6 event ID 16 5 log ID 16 5 severity 16 6 time stamp 16 5 type 16 6 event and shutdown logs viewing 16 5 event class parameters AppleTalk 16 9 authentication failure 16 8 bridge status 16 8 configuration 16 8 fan status 16 8 LDAP 16 9 OSPF 16 9 resource 16 8 RIP 16 9 service port status 16 8 start 16 8 switch fabric 16 8 system 16 8 temperature status 16 8 user port status 16 8 event classes 16 8 event configuration accessing 16 7 16 9 event ID event and shutdown log entries 16 5 event log definition 16 8 event log switch event definition 16 3 event log wraps event statistics 16 7 event notification configuring 16 9 event statistics event log wraps 16 7 events d
286. obally BOOTP DHCP Accepts client requests for an IP address and forwards them to a server Relay Agent This agent also relays responses from the server to the client Limit Proxy ARP Enable or disable Proxy ARP on the same network When enabled the to Same Network router only responds to ARP requests when the source and target IP address are in the same IP network and different IP subnets When disabled the router only responds to ARP requests when the source and target IP address are in different networks Use Default Route Enable or disable the use of the default route on your Cajun switch as the for Proxy ARPs route for Proxy ARPs For example if you have a default route configured to reach the 0 0 0 0 IP address then any ARP request that does not match any of the other routes in your IP routing table will automatically go to this default route Maximum Specify the maximum number of routes that can be added to the routing Number of Routes table The default number of routes is 16384 Note These routes refer only to IP Unicast entries Maximum Number of ARP Cache Entries Specify the maximum number of ARP cache entries Refers to the space available for the IP address table When you increase the number of entries it may cause the table to be relearned more frequently Consequently it will make address space usage more efficient The default maximum number of entries is 16384 7 4 Cajun P550
287. ocol Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures are specific to Layer 3 configuration Included in this chapter O Configuring IPX RIP Interfaces O Creating and Modifying IPX RIP Filters O Interpreting IPX RIP Interface Statistics Configuring IPX RIP Interfaces To configure the IPX RIP interfaces 1 In the IPX RIP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Interfaces The IPX RIP Interfaces dialog box opens 2 Use Table 5 1 to configure the IPX RIP interfaces Table 5 1 IPX RIP Interface Parameters Parameter Allows you to Select Select a RIP interface to modify Note This field is displayed in the IPX RIP Interface dialog box not the Add IPX RIP Interface dialog box Interface Identify the IPX interface associated with the RIP interface Network Number Identify the number of the IPX network associated with the VLAN Use Interpacket Gap Select to enable or disable whether RIP updates sent out over an interface have an interpacket transmission delay If enabled IPX RIP provides update packets If disabled IPX RIP periodic update packets have no interpacket gap Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX RIP Protocol Layer 3 Table 5 1 PX RIP Interface Parameters Continued Parameter Allows you to Use Max Packet Size Select to enable or disable whether the RIP packets sent out an interface are set to the maximum transmission siz
288. ocol set to IPIP IP in IP Non Encapsulated Tunnel All multicast data traffic on this interface is IPIP encapsulated but the protocol messages are simple unicast Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 41 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Table 7 29 DVMRP Downstream Links Parameters Continued Parameter Interface is Pruned Displays the Status of whether the interface has been pruned Prune Expiration in sec Time in seconds that the interface times out waiting for the prune message to expire 8 In the Upstream Source s field click on the number to view information on the upstream source The DVMRP Upstream Source s dialog box opens 9 Use Table 7 30 to view the DVMRP Upstream Source s information Table 7 30 DVMRP Upstream Sources Parameters Parameter Destination Group Address Displays the Destination group address for the upstream interface Flow Source Address Host source address for the upstream flow Flow Upstream Interface Name of the flow source interface Payload Protocol Type Protocol type for the payload Configuring VRRP Source Port Number Source port number Destination Port Destination port number Number When multiple routers are available to forward traffic the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP is used to provide fast automatic fail over for hosts when the default gateway fails This eliminates the
289. ol events AppleTalk packet types received and sent through all AppleTalk interfaces are logged to the event log as protocol events LDAP packet types received and sent through all LDAP interfaces are logged to the event log as protocol events Note Enabling the protocol event log may cause the event log to be rapidly filled with protocol events To configure the protocol event log 1 In the Event Subsystem section of the Web Agent window click Event Configuration The Event Management dialog box opens In the ID column click one of the following e RIP OSPF e LDAP e AppleTalk Use Table 16 8 to configure Event Table actions Log and Console are the only available settings Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings In the Event Subsystem of the Web Agent click Protocol Event Configuration The Protocol Event Management window opens 16 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Monitoring the Cajun Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 6 Use Table 16 3 to configure your protocol event log settings Table 16 3 Protocol Event Log Settings Parameter Enables or disables the logging of Fault Serious errors that can cause a system crash for example panic Error Serious errors that will not cause a system crash but can contribute protocol problems Warning Non critical errors Info Event details Trace RIP and OSPF packet tracing Debug Event message
290. on network Authentication Type of authentication available for use on a given OSPF interface Authentication types include e None e Simple Password e MD5 Authentication Authentication Key Area s authentication key MD5 Key ID MD5 authentication key ID as a decimal value 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Deleting OSPF Virtual Links To delete an OSPF virtual link 1 In the OSPF Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Virtual Links The OSPF Virtual Links dialog box opens 2 Select the virtual link to be removed 3 Click DELETE The virtual link is removed 9 6 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 Modifying OSPF Virtual Links To modify an OSPF virtual link 1 In the OSPF Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Virtual Links The OSPF Virtual Links dialog box opens 2 Select the virtual link to be removed 3 Use Table 9 4 to modify your configuration 4 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Creating OSPF Summaries The primary purpose of the OSPF summary is route aggregation Route aggregation is a group range of IP addresses that are linked to a single address To create anew OSPF summary 1 In the OSPF Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Summaries The OSPF Summaries dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE
291. on of the Web Agent window click Zone Filter The AppleTalk Zone Filter dialog box opens Click Edit If The Add Delete Interface to Zone Filter dialog box opens In the Add pull down menu select the interface to be added Or Click the Select for the interface to be removed Click Add to add this zone filter to the selected interface DELETE to remove this zone filter from the selected interface CANCEL to restore previous settings Viewing AppleTalk Statistics This section includes O QO QO 0 0 0 l Viewing AppleTalk Global Statistics Viewing the AppleTalk Interface Statistics Table Viewing the AppleTalk Route Table Viewing AppleTalk Route Table Statistics Viewing the AppleTalk ARP Cache Table Viewing the AppleTalk Zone Table View AppleTalk Zone Table Statistics Viewing the AppleTalk NBP Table Viewing AppleTalk Global Statistics To view AppleTalk global statistics 1 In the AppleTalk Display section of the Web Agent window click Global Statistics The AppleTalk Global Statistics dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 10 11 Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 2 Use Table 10 5 for more information on AppleTalk global statistics Table 10 5 AppleTalk Global Statistical Parameters Parameter Number of Echo Req Tx Echo requests transmitted Echo Req Rx Echo requests received DDP Output Counter DDP packets sent from this node DDP Output Long DDP pa
292. onfiguration supervisor module 3 2 client port intelligent multicast session search parameters 15 7 multicast session parameters 15 8 client pruning timer client pruning timer 15 5 clients per VLAN displaying 15 17 collisions 17 5 communities configuring SNMP 3 23 SNMP 3 23 community string configuring SNMP 3 23 SNMP communities parameters 3 23 comparison value Layer 3 route cache search parameters 11 5 config addr error AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 config zone error AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 configuration event class parameters 16 8 invalid copies 3 49 saving 18 2 configuration file management copy destination 3 48 copy source 3 48 destination filename 3 48 save running configuration to startup configuration 3 48 source filename 3 48 TFTP server IP address 3 48 configuration files 3 45 configuration revision number VTP snooping parameters 3 19 configure 15 6 configure ports gigabit module 3 7 6 Index configure source port mirroring information parameters 17 7 configure static router ports static router ports 15 6 configuring non VLAN switch ports 3 19 switch port 3 14 configuring a Fast Ethernet module 3 9 configuring a redundant element 3 44 configuring all VLAN ports 12 4 configuring an IPX router 4 3 configuring AppleTalk routing 10 2 configuring event logs protocol 16 4 configuring event notification 16 9 configuring fast start mode
293. onfiguring Access ISIS ri Wak Lae Soleo whe ek ae Wl ah Mets ae A 7 8 Creating Standard Access Rules 2 0 0 ec eee eens 7 9 Creating Extended Access Rules 1 2 0 0 ee a n a ni aaea 7 10 Activating Access LISTS neari dae ed A OURS ee Meee eae 7 13 Greating IP StatiesROULES sos atest A ER ES BEA D 7 14 Creating Static ARP Entries 0 eee eee eens 7 14 Creating a BOOTP DHCP Server Entry 0 eee eee eee 7 15 IP Multicast 20 ii E oo Mata ead SON Ae ee DR rie he G 7 15 Coniguring IGMP era oc ate A a need Begone IA ates 7 16 Enabling the IGMP Global Configuration 0 0 eee eee ee eee 7 16 Modifying IGMP Interfaces 2 0 naeun 7 17 Contigurimg DVM RP oss ete a ee Ge A ae Oe ON la awed EO Ai 7 18 Configuring the DVMRP Global Configuration 2 2 0 e eee eee 7 18 Modifying DVMRP Interface Information 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee 7 19 Monitoring Switch Performance Using IP Statistics o o ooooooooooooo ooo ees 7 21 Displaying Global IP Routing Statistics eee 7 21 Searching the IP Routing Table 2 2 0 cc ee eens 7 25 Examining the IP Routing Table Statistics 0 0 0 2 eee ee eee eee 7 26 Searching the IP ARP Cache o o a dias 7 26 IP Multicast Statistics 000 cal rs io 7 27 Displaying IGMP Global Statistics 1 0 raro 7 27 Examining IGMP Interface Statistics o oooooooooooooooooroo o 7 28 Displaying the Multicast Group Table
294. ontain a Frame Check Sequence validation error Typically caused by turning equipment on or off and by noise on twisted pair segments These errors can also result from configuring a network that does not comply with 802 3 standards In a standards compliant Ethernet network CRC or alignment errors represent transit and receive bit errors The Ethernet standard allows 1 in 10 bit error rate but you should expect performance to be less than 1 in 101 packets Rates in excess of one error per one thousand packets indicate a serious problem Possible causes e Defect at the transmitting station e Turning equipment on or off This should cause only a few errors e Damaged cables e Interference on network cabling Possible actions respectively e Use port error statistics to isolate the problem Check the transceiver or adapter card connected to the port where the problem seems to originate Also check the cable and cable connections for damage e Normal operation no action required e Check cables for damage e Inspect cable runs to see if they are too close to noisy devices and check for problems with network devices Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 17 3 Analyzing Network Performance Using RMON and Ethernet Statistics Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 17 1 Interpreting Ethernet Interface Statistics Continued Statistic normal collision activity in Ethernet netwo
295. or Session Pruning Time it is automatically removed Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 15 3 Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 2 Use Table 15 1 to configure your global configuration setup Table 15 1 Intelligent Multicast Global Configuration Parameter Definition Enable State Select to enable or disable intelligent multicasting globally The default value is Enabled Automatic Router Port e Enable Select to enable or disable automatic router port Pruning pruning The default value is Enabled e Time Enter the time in seconds after which quiet learned router ports can be pruned The valid range in seconds is 10 to 172800 48 hours The default value is 120 seconds Automatic Session e Enable Select to enable or disable removal of stale learned Pruning sessions The default value is Enabled Time Enter the time in seconds after which stale learned sessions can be removed The valid range in seconds is 10 to 172800 48 hours The default value is 250 seconds Automatic Client Port e Enable Select to enable or disable automatic removal of Pruning quiet learned client ports from a session The default value is Enabled e Time Enter the time in minutes after which quiet learned client ports can be automatically removed from a session The valid range in minutes is 1 to 1440 24 hours The default value is 60 minutes Perform one of
296. or the given source network on the indicated Forwarding Interface Forwarder Cost to Source Network Cost reported by the Designated Forwarder for the given source network Displaying the DVMRP Downstream Dependent Router s To view the DVMRP downstream dependent routers 1 In the DVMRP Display section of the Web Agent window click Route Table The DVMRP Route Table dialog box opens 2 In the Downstream Dependent Router s column for the appropriate source network click the number to view information on the downstream dependent routers The Downstream Dependent Router s dialog box opens 3 Use Table 7 26 for more information on Downstream Dependent Router s 7 38 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Table 7 26 DVMRP Downstream Dependent Router s Parameter Definition Router Network Address Displays the router network address of the downstream dependent router Found on Interface Displays the name of the interface on which the downstream router was found DVMRP Supported Major Minor Displays the DVMRP version supported Version Router Received Probe from Displays whether the router received a probe from this router This Router Router Supports Prune Function Displays whether this router supports prune functionality Router Supports Generation ID Displays whether the router supports generation ID function Function Router is SNMP Man
297. orate web server To access online documentation including HTML and PDF documents use Netscape Navigator version 4 5 or above or Internet Explorer version 3 x or above and enter the URL http pubs lucentctc com Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide xiv Preface Installing Online Documentation and Help Files Certain resources used by the Web Agent are located off the switch to preserve switch memory Setting up a help server location for the switch allows the switch to access O Online documentation O Bitmaps used as part of the interface logo wallpaper O Online help files for the Web Agent There are two ways to provide this information to the switch O Install the Lucent HTTP documentation server available on the Lucent user documentation CD CajunDocs O Add the files to an existing web server on your network Installing the Lucent HTTP Documentation Server Lucent provides HTTP server software that you can install to provide access to documentation and online help directly from the switch The server must be running a Win32 compatible operating system for example Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT To install the server you must perform one of the following O Run the Setup program from the CajunDocs CD ROM O Click on the latest released version of the CajunDocs CD from the Lucent Publications web site http pubs lucentctc com cdrom cajundocs html and double click setup exe This extracts the server a
298. ork number specifies the range of AppleTalk network numbers for extended networks Each number in the range must be an integer between 0 and 65279 Note If the Network Range Start value equals 0 Network Range End value must also equal O Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 10 3 Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 Table 10 1 AppleTalk Interface Parameters Continued Parameter Definition Network Number Enter the interface network number This number specifies the network number the interface is using Note This value must be within the Network Range or be equal to 0 Node Enter the interface node identification number This number must be between 1 and 253 Note Only if the Network Number is equal to 0 can the Node also be equal to 0 Admin State Select whether to enable or disable the administrator state The administrator state determines if the interface is operational from a management point of view Default Zone Select the default AppleTalk zone to be used by this interface Zone names may be up to 32 characters in length 5 Click CREATE to add the new AppleTalk interface or CANCEL to restore previous settings Editing AppleTalk Interfaces To edit an AppleTalk interface 1 In the AppleTalk Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Interfaces The AppleTalk Interfaces dialog box opens Note You must enable AppleTalk globally and create an AppleTalk int
299. ort Configuration dialog box for that port opens 4 From the Spanning Tree Mode pull down menu select Disable 5 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Using Hunt Groups to Aggregate Bandwidth between Switches Hunt groups allow you to aggregate multiple switch ports into a single group effectively combining the bandwidth into a single connection For example if you connect three gigabit ports each on a pair of switches into a hunt group the aggregated connection will have six gigabits of available bandwidth full duplex Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 12 11 Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Layer 2 and Layer 3 Hunt groups also provide fault tolerance If a port in a hunt group fails the remaining ports will continue forwarding the traffic on the link Hunt Group Considerations Considerations before creating hunt groups include O The switches do not yet have a link discovery protocol When creating a hunt group you have to verify that the ports in a group on one switch are physically connected to the ports in that group on the other switch If one end of a connection is in a hunt group the other end of the connection should also be in a hunt group If you don t do this the forwarding behavior of the hunt group will be unpredictable You should disable the ports in a hunt group until both ends of the link are configured All ports in a hunt
300. ort control 4 2 IPX datagram fields definitions 4 2 IPX datagram structure 4 2 IPX forward datagrams IPX global parameters 4 10 IPX global parameters 4 4 in max hops exceeded 4 10 IPX forward datagrams 4 10 IPX in checksum errors 4 10 IPX in delivery 4 10 IPX in discards 4 10 IPX in header errors 4 10 IPX in ping replies 4 10 IPX in ping request 4 10 IPX in receives 4 10 IPX in unknown sockets 4 10 IPX Netbios receives 4 10 IPX out discards 4 10 IPX out no routes 4 10 IPX out packets 4 10 IPX out ping replies 4 10 IPX out ping requests 4 10 IPX out requests 4 10 maximum number of services 4 4 IPX global parameters examining 4 10 IPX in checksum errors IPX global parameters 4 10 IPX in delivery IPX global parameters 4 10 IPX in discards IPX global parameters 4 10 IPX in header errors IPX global parameters 4 10 Index 19 IPX in ping replies IPX global parameters 4 10 IPX in ping request IPX global parameters 4 10 IPX in receives IPX global parameters 4 10 IPX in unknown sockets IPX global parameters 4 10 IPX interface admin state 4 5 frame type 4 5 interface 4 5 network address 4 5 node address 4 5 RIP 4 5 SAP 4 6 state 4 5 ticks 4 5 type 20 packet propagation 4 6 VLAN 4 5 IPX interface MIbs B 1 IPX interface parameters 4 5 IPX multinetting 4 4 IPX Netbios receives IPX global parameters 4 10 IPX out discards IPX global parameter
301. ort or device on the other end of the connection auto negotiates as well If you are having problems with auto negotiating connections try setting the modes manually using the command line interface For example set port auto 7 3 enable 12 From the Auto Negotiation Speed Advertisement and Auto Negotiation Duplex Advertisement pull down menus set Speed and Duplex Advertisement respectively The switch sends these values to the device on the other end of the connection at the start of the auto negotiating process In general the defaults are best but there may be situations when you want to fix one setting but allow the other setting to auto negotiate This feature is only available for 10 10 TX 13 From the Rate Limit Mode pull down menu select Enable if you want this port to limit the number of unknown unicast and multicast flooded packets it tries to forward a From the Rate Limit Rate pull down menu select the percentage of a port s traffic that can be unknown unicast and broadcast packets Lower this value if the port is having overflow problems b From the Rate Limit Burst Size pull down menu select a packet limit for the number of packets allowed in a single burst Valid values are 1 to 2048 For Fast Ethernet ports set this value lower than 1024 the output buffer s capacity Set this value lower if the port is experiencing overflow problems 14 From the Pace Priority Mode pull down menu select Enable if you wa
302. ottom switch management Smart Agent Smart Agent the software for the Supervisor Module has the following features Built in support for Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP and HTML Out of band from 10Base T or RS 232 In band from a defined VLAN Powerful alarm and event logging subsystem OQ Q l Point and click interface with Netscape Navigator V3 0 or later or Microsoft Internet Explorer V3 0 or later RMON for Traffic Analysis RMON Remote Monitoring for traffic analysis has the following features O Four groups implemented in hardware O Configurable mirror destination per switch fabric port Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 2 9 Overview of the P220 Gigabit Switch Family 2 10 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 This chapter and its procedures are common to both Layer 2 and Layer 3 configuration Included in this chapter O Terminal Settings Configuring the Supervisor Module Using the CLI Configuring the Switch Using the Web Agent Configuring Port Parameters Using the Web Agent Configuring System Information 0000 040 0 QU Managing Configuration Files Terminal Settings To complete initial switch setup you need a PC with a serial line connection It must have the following terminal settings to communicate with the switch Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Terminal Settings Baud Rate Stop Bits Data Bits o Party Con
303. ous settings Modifying RIP Interfaces To modify the RIP interfaces 1 In the RIP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Interfaces The RIP Interfaces dialog box opens 2 Use Table 8 2 to modify RIP interfaces Table 8 2 RIP Interface Parameters Parameter Allows you to Select Select the RIP interface to be modified Interface Displays an interface from a list of interfaces that you previously configured Network Address Displays an IP address to be associated with the displayed interface Mode Specify the RIP State Different states include e talk only send RIP information to the network e listen only receive RIP information from the network e talk listen both send and receive RIP information from the network Send Version Specify the version of RIP you want to use to send packets across your interface Selections include evi e V2 e V1I V2 8 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the RIP Routing Protocol Layer 3 Parameter Receive Version Table 8 2 RIP Interface Parameters Continued Allows you to Specify the version of RIP you want to use to receive packets Selections include evil V2 VI V2 Split Horizon Specify that IP routes learned from an immediate neighbor are not advertised back to the neighbor from which the routes were learned Split Horizon Routes are not advertised Split Horizon with Poison Re
304. parameters Table 15 12 LGMP Client Display per VLAN Parameters Parameter Definition Select Select the LGMP client to modify VLAN Displays the VLAN associated with the LGMP client LGMP Message e Report Displays the number of LGMP report Reception Statistics messages received per VLAN e Leave Displays the number of LGMP leave messages received per VLAN e End Session Displays the number of LGMP end session messages received per VLAN e Router Report Displays the number of LGMP router report messages received per VLAN e Router Leave Displays the number of LGMP router leaves messages received per VLAN e Invalid Displays the number of LGMP messages received with an invalid payload per VLAN Intelligent Multicast e New Client Ports Added Displays the number of Session Statistics new clients added by LGMP per VLAN e Existing Client Ports Removed Displays the number of clients removed by LGMP per VLAN Existing Sessions Removed Displays the number of sessions removed by LGMP per VLAN New Router Ports Added Displays the number of new routers added by LGMP per VLAN Existing Router Ports Removed Displays the number of new routers removed by LGMP per VLAN Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 15 17 Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 4 Click e CLEAR to reset selected row information e CLEAR ALL to reset all statistics e REFRESH to view t
305. parameters 10 8 AppleTalk zone filter parameters 10 10 access list name IP access list parameters 7 9 7 10 access list rules IP interface 7 9 access lists IP interface 7 8 access rule index IP access list parameters 7 9 7 10 access type IP access list parameters 7 9 7 10 active alarm table viewing 16 3 active alarms checking 16 3 active backpressure 3 11 add IP interface parameters admin state 7 2 ICMP redirect 7 3 interface 7 2 IP routing 7 3 MAC format 7 3 mask 7 2 multicast protocol 7 3 NetBIOS UDP rebroadcast 7 3 network address 7 2 OSPF 7 3 proxy ARP 7 3 RIP 7 3 VLAN 7 2 VRRP 7 3 adding a user 3 6 password 3 6 user logins 3 6 user name 3 6 adding address forward table entries manually 14 6 adding ports to a hunt group 12 14 addr owner override VRRP configuration parameters 7 44 address age time definition 14 1 address forwarding table 14 1 adding entries manually 14 6 capacity 14 4 MAC addresses 2 4 Index 1 address forwarding table parameters group 14 5 index 14 5 MAC address 14 5 persistence 14 5 port 14 5 priority 14 5 status 14 5 TblInst 14 5 valid 14 5 address forwarding table persistence parameters ageout 14 6 permanent 14 6 address mask DVMRP interface statistical parameters 7 33 address table configuring hash table auto increment 14 3 configuring hash table size 14 3 configuring instance IDs 14 2 address table
306. plays the number of LGMP router report messages received e Router Leave Displays the number of LGMP router leaves messages received e Invalid Displays the number of LGMP messages received with an invalid payload Intelligent Multicast Session Statistics 3 Click e New Client Ports Added Displays the number of new clients added by LGMP Existing Client Ports Removed Displays the number of clients removed by LGMP Existing Sessions Removed Displays the number of sessions removed by LGMP New Router Ports Added Displays the number of new routers added by LGMP Existing Router Ports Removed Displays the number of new routers removed by LGMP e APPLY to save your changes e CANCEL to restore previous settings e CLEAR to clear the statistics e REFRESH to refresh the contents of the table 15 16 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Modifying LGMP Clients Per VLAN To modify LGMP clients per VLAN 1 In the Intelligent Multicasting section of the Web Agent window click LGMP Client The LGMP Client Configuration dialog box opens Note You must enable intelligent multicasting on a global basis to make your LGMP client per VLAN configuration active 2 Inthe LGMP Clients column click the number The LGMP Client Display per VLAN dialog box opens 3 Use Table 15 12 for more information on clients per VLAN
307. porary link partitioning are eventually discovered by reception of their periodic unsolicited advertisements Enabling IRDP on an Interface To enable IRDP on an interface 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click IRDP The ICMP Router Discovery Protocol dialog box opens 2 In the Select column choose the interface on which to enable IRDP 3 Use Table 7 33 to enable parameters and enter necessary Internet addresses in the IRDP Interfaces dialog box Table 7 33 CMP Router Discovery Protocol Parameters Parameter Definition Select Selects the interface to be configured Interface Displays the IRDP interface Network Address Displays the network IP address of the IRDP interface IRDP State Select to enable or disable IRDP on the selected interface The default is Enable Preferences Enter the preference of the address as a default router address relative to other router addresses on the same subnet The minimum value 80000000 hex is used to indicate that the address should not be used by neighboring hosts as a default router address even though it may be advertised The default is 0 Adv Address Select an IP destination address used for multicast router advertisements sent from the interface Options include e Multicast Used on any link where listening hosts support IP multicast The default is 224 0 0 1 Broadcast Used on any link where listening hosts support I
308. protocol event log settings 16 5 fault tolerance 1 13 fault tolerant switch fabric designating 3 41 features crossbar 2 3 switch 2 1 2 2 files copying 3 49 startup txt 3 45 filter suppress IPX RIP filter parameters 5 3 IPX SAP filter parameters 6 4 IPX SAP network filter parameters 6 6 filtering index 14 5 MAC address 14 5 persistence 14 5 port 14 5 priority 14 5 filtering on the MAC address 14 4 filtering on the VLAN 14 4 filtering traffic between subnets 7 12 FIRE fabric port frame forwarding statistical parameters 11 4 flow control console serial port settings 3 25 flow control mode 10 100 port parameter 3 11 Fast Ethernet module 3 10 gigabit port parameters 3 9 flow source address DVMRP upstream source parameters 7 42 flow upstream interface DVMRP upstream source parameters 7 42 forward address LSA detail 9 16 forward delay spanning tree bridge level parameters 12 9 12 Index forward transitions spanning tree bridge port parameters 12 10 forwarder cost to source network designated forwarder s table parameters 7 38 forwarder network address designated forwarder s table parameters 7 38 forwarding cache configuring 11 1 displaying 11 5 forwarding cache FE parameters aged entries 11 6 current entries 11 6 duplicate add attempts 11 6 entries removed due to route changes 11 6 entries removed due to route deletes 11 6 failed add attempts 11 6 lookup hits 11 6 look
309. pstream Interface Local interface which is receiving this flow Upstream Neighbor IP address of the upstream neighbor router Router Address Invalid Flows From Number of invalid flows received from the upstream neighbor Upstream Packets Forwarded Number of packets successfully forwarded in the CPU Through Cache Entry supervisor module for this flow Upstream Interface is Router that is sending prunes to the upstream neighbor Allows Pruned you to open the DVMRP Upstream Prune Information dialog box Next Pruned Next interface that is currently pruned which will be grafted Downstream Interface to back Timeout Downstream Interface s Number of downstream interfaces Allows you to open the DVMRP Downstream Links dialog box Upstream Source s Number of upstream interfaces Allows you to open the Upstream Sources dialog box 4 In the Upstream Interface is Pruned field click on the number to view information on the upstream prune information The Upstream Prune Information dialog box opens 5 Use Table 7 28 for more information on upstream prunes 7 40 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Parameter Destination Group Address Table 7 28 Upstream Prune Information Displays the Destination group address of the multicast session Source SubNetwork Subnet on which the DVMRP interface exists DVMRP Upstream Interface Name of the upstream inter
310. put signals except for TXD It uses the DTR converted to DSR by the specified cable and connectors input connected to the modem DCD output to detect that the modem is connected It supports XON XOFF flow control or none To connect a modem 1 Attach a DB25M RJ45 P N 38210003 connector to the modem 2 Attach the DB9M RJ45 MDCE connector to the switch s serial console port on the front panel of the switch Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 25 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Figure 3 5 Typical Connection Between the Switch and a Modem Typical Connection between Cajun Switch and Modem DB25 M RJ45 Pin 2 TXD Pin2 TXD i P N 38210003 i Pin 3 RXD Pin 3 RXD i DB9M RJ45 iPin7 GND gt Pin 4 DTR in i MDCE Pin 8 DCD out Pin5 GND i pin20 DTRin pin 6 NC Modem Cajun Switch Configuring the Serial Console Port as a PPP Console You can reconfigure the console serial port as a PPP Console to support a dial in PPP connection using a modem Note The lack of an IP address for the PPP serial interface causes the switch to immediately return to sending the modem configuration string Typing TTY will re access the CLI login prompt To configure the console serial port as a PPP console 1 In the System Configuration section of the Web Agent win
311. r 47 Network Network number of the IPX service in question Node Node address of the service in question Socket Number associated with a running process on the end node for example RIP NLSP Interface Interface associated with the next hop to the service Source Method by which the service was learned For example SAP or static TTL Number of seconds before the service expires Hops Number of routers hops that the packet must pass through before reaching the network number associated with the service Next Hop MAC MAC address of the next destination through which the service is Address reached Examining IPX Service Table Statistics To examine the IPX service table statistics 1 In the IPX Display section of the Web Agent window click Service Table Statistics The IPX Service Table Statistics dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 2 Use Table 4 12 to review each statistic Table 4 12 PX Service Table Statistics Statistic Defines the Current Number of Indicates the current number of IPX services Services Peak Number of Lists the peak number of services Services Service Add Failures Indicates the number of failed attempts to add a service to the routing table Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 4 15 Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 4 16 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX RIP Prot
312. r HTTP is port 80 The default port number for telnetis 126 Adding the Document Files to an Existing Server If you decide to install your online help on a Web server other than the Lucent HTTP server bundled on the CajunDocs CD ROM transfer the help subdirectory to that Web server and enter the URL for that web server in the Server Location field For example if you transfer the CajunDocs help directory to your company server http www abc company com you would need to 1 2 Install the online help and documentation from the CajunDocs CD to a Windows95 or NT node in your network Transfer the entire help subdirectory located in C CajunDocsto the root directory of your Web server Launch your browser and connect to your switch Enter your user name and password at the respective prompts and click Login In the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Server Location The Online Help Configuration dialog box opens In the HTTP Server Location field enter the server location for example http www abc company com In the HELP Directory Location field enter the directory name of your help files For example help Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide xvi Preface Note The default for the help directory is help You do not need to change this unless you changed the name of your help directory prior to transferring it to your Web server Downloading an Updated CajunDocs CD from the Int
313. r Task Command Line Parser Powering up modules Module 1 Powered Waiting for power cycle to complete The 17 second power cycle option Module 2 Powered Initializing the module subsystem done System initialization complete Configuring system from Startup Config file nvram startup txt Boot process complete system is now operational 3 0 gt 4 0 conversion Creating Startup Config file nvram startup txt Copyright 1999 All rights reserved by Lucent Technologies Corporation This software is furnished under a license and may be used in accordance with the terms of such license and with the inclusion of the above copyright notice This software or any other copies thereof may 3 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 not be provided or otherwise made available to any other person No title to and ownership of the software is hereby transferred Contains software developed by Epilogue Technology Corporation Copyright c 1988 1996 Epilogue Technology Corporation TEC Technically Elite Concepts Inc Copyright c 1994 by Technically Elite Concepts Inc Hermosa Beach California U S A ISI Integrated Systems Inc Copyright 1991 1995 Integrated Systems Inc All other trademarks used herein are the property of their respectiv owners Lucent Technologies Cajun Switch Agent v4 0 0 Press Ctrl P for pre
314. r port configuration parameters 17 7 router port display parameters 15 6 spanning tree bridge port parameters 12 9 switch port parameter 3 13 VLAN switch port table parameters 12 4 port LED 10 100 module behavior 16 2 port LED gigabit module behavior 16 1 port mirror 17 6 port mirroring information parameters 17 6 configure source 17 7 max packets per second 17 7 mirror port 17 7 mirror port name 17 7 piggyback port 17 7 sampler type 17 7 source port 17 7 port mirroring parameters 17 8 port name configuring switch port parameters 3 14 gigabit port parameters 3 8 VLAN switch port table parameters 12 4 port PACE priority 10 100 port parameter 3 12 gigabit port parameters 3 9 port VLAN 3Com SuperStack parameters 3 21 Bay Networks System 5000 parameters 3 21 Cisco Catalyst 5000 parameters 3 20 configuring switch port parameters 3 14 switch port configuration parameters 3 15 switch port parameter 3 13 port VLAN parameters configuring 3 16 port VLAN selecting 3 14 port based VLANs 12 2 power supply power system statistical parameters 3 40 power system statistical parameters current power available 3 40 power supply 3 40 status 3 40 total system power 3 40 type 3 40 power system statistics displaying 3 40 PPP console configuring 3 26 configuring a network mask 3 30 configuring an IP address 3 30 PPP console configuration Layer 3 only 3 24 PPP console settings baud rate 3 25 flow
315. r that has the 4 0 version of the switch software In the File Name field enter the name of the file to download e Enter m2200 v4 0 0 bin to download version 4 0 for the Cajun P220 switch Layer 2 e Enter m5500 v4 0 0 bin to download version 4 0 for the Cajun P550 switch Layer 2 e Enter m5500r v4 0 0 bin to download version 4 0 for the Cajun P550R switch Layer 3 18 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Downloading New Operational Code to the Switch Layer 2 Layer 3 6 From the TFTP Target Section pull down menu select the download location For example select APP2 to download the new version to APP2 on the switch If version 3 0 or 3 1 is installed in APP1 download version 4 0 to APP2 Click Update in Perform Update Now Optional Click Status in Get Status of Most Recent Update to ensure that the new image downloaded properly To download the version 4 0 software image to an APP location on the switch through the command line on version 3 0 or 3 1 1 Recommended Find the location where you want to save the image by entering the following command at the system prompt fep get This command reads and displays information about the content stored in locations such as APP1 and APP2 on the switch If version 3 0 or 3 1 is installed in APPl install version 4 0 in APP2 Download the embedded software to the specified APP location by entering the following command at the system prompt
316. r to Creating a VLAN in Chapter 12 For information about enabling IP routing and assigning subnets refer to the following sections Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 1 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Creating an IP Interface By creating an IP interface you activate a location in the switch that communicates between the Internet Protocol IP and the embedded software of the switch To create an IP interface 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Interfaces The IP Interfaces dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE The Add IP Interface dialog box opens 3 Use Table 7 1 to configure the IP interface Parameter Interface Table 7 1 Add IP Interface Parameters Allows you to Enter a unique alphanumeric name for the interface Admin State Specify the administrative state of the interface Options include e UP The interface is active e DOWN The interface is inactive VLAN Specify the type of VLAN Options include e Default Selects the default VLAN e Discard Selects the VLAN to be discarded Ethernet Console Selects the Ethernet Console port as the VLAN e Serial Console Selects the Serial Console port as the VLAN Note The way that you configure a VLAN to a port determines the IP Routing option that you select for the interface Use the following options to configure the appropriate interface e If you select to create an IP interfa
317. ra VLAN traffic Layer 2 switching is supported The Cajun switch supports AppleTalk over Ethernet only Ethernet versions supported O Ethernet SNAP O Ethernet N The switch supports the following AppleTalk protocols AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol AARP Q Routing Table Maintenance Protocol RTMP Q Name Binding Protocol NBP Q AppleTalk Echo Protocol AEP Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 10 1 Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 O O Datagram Delivery Protocol DDP Zone Information Protocol ZIP Configuring AppleTalk Routing This section includes 00 0 0 0 0 0 Enabling AppleTalk Global Routing Creating an AppleTalk Routing Interface Editing AppleTalk Interfaces Deleting an AppleTalk Interface Creating an AppleTalk Static Route Editing AppleTalk Static Routes Deleting an AppleTalk Static Route Creating an AppleTalk NBP Filter Editing an AppleTalk NBP Filter Adding or Deleting Interfaces to NBP Filter Creating an AppleTalk Zone Filter Editing an AppleTalk Zone Filter Adding or Deleting Interfaces to a Zone Filter Enabling AppleTalk Global Routing To enable AppleTalk routing globally 1 In the AppleTalk Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Global Configuration The AppleTalk Routing Global Configuration dialog box opens From the AppleTalk Routing pull down menu select Enable Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL
318. rames from 3Com equipment are mapped to Lucent VLANs The default value is 3ComDefault Mirror Port Configuring Port V Port VLAN param when tagged and Displays whether the mirror port is enabled or disabled This is a Fast Ethernet only option LAN Parameters eters determine how a particular port s traffic is flooded to VLANs untagged packets are received on the port See the examples later in this section for recommendations on settings for particular trunk port connections Refer to VLAN Operation in Chapter 12 for more information on creating VLANs Refer to Viewing Switch Port Parameters earlier in this chapter for information on accessing the Switch Port dialog box To configure port VLAN parameters 1 From the Port VLAN pull down menu in the Switch Port Configuration for Port XX dialog box select a VLAN as the VLAN assignment for this port This causes all untagged frames arriving on this port to be assigned to the specified VLAN The port will still assign incoming tagged packets to the VLAN indicated by the tag 2 From the Trunk Mode pull down menu select the option excluding Clear to indicate that the port is a trunk and to select the appropriate VLAN trunking format if the port is connected to another switch Table 3 8 describes the VLAN Trunking Mode options Table 3 8 VLAN Trunking Mode Options VLAN Mode Applies the following format to packets
319. rce parameters destination group address 7 42 destination port number 7 42 flow source address 7 42 flow upstream interface 7 42 payload protocol type 7 42 source port number 7 42 DVMRP upstream sources 7 42 10 Index E echo reply rx AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 echo req rx AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 echo req tx AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 editing an AppleTalk static route 10 7 editing an AppleTalk zone filter 10 10 editing an NBP filter 10 8 editing AppleTalk interfaces 10 4 editing general system information 3 33 egress rules VLAN 12 2 enable spanning tree bridge port information parameters 12 10 enable state CGMP snooping parameters 15 18 enable state 15 5 IGMP snooping 15 12 LGMP client configuration parameters 15 16 LGMP server configuration parameters 15 13 enabling enabling IRDP 7 46 enabling AppleTalk global routing 10 2 enabling controller redundancy 3 42 enabling fast start mode for all ports on a module 3 22 enabling fast start mode for individual ports 3 22 enabling gigabit ports 3 7 3 9 enabling SNTP 3 34 enabling the rate limit mode Fast Ethernet module 3 10 enabling VRRP 7 43 encapsulation type AppleTalk interface parameters 10 3 end one time summer time hours configuration 3 37 summer time hours configuration 3 35 end network IPX RIP filter parameters 5 3 entries removed due to route changes forwarding cache FE parameters 11 6 entries removed due t
320. ree models O Single IEEE 802 1D spanning tree O Spanning tree per VLAN O Optimized per VLAN spanning trees using a scalable two layer spanning tree approach Note All models interoperate with legacy IEEE 802 1D bridges and switches Dual layer spanning trees provide two very important capabilities O Smaller spanning tree domains means much faster convergence during spanning tree reconfiguration O Per VLAN operation enables you to use more of the available bandwidth when you have redundant links A particular link can be blocked on one VLAN but still forward packets on another Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 2 7 Overview of the P220 Gigabit Switch Family Figure 2 4 Spanning Tree R STP Root X Blocked Path Single 802 1D Spanning Tree Multi layer Spanning_Tree One Spanning Tree Backbone terminates 802 1D STP Longer convergence One path to and from root for all VLANs Improper configuration can shut down Trunk Links Smaller STP Domains Quicker Convergence VLAN Load Balancing Interoperates w existing Bridge Routers Buffer and Queue Management Adding gigabit speeds to existing networks means that there can be a huge disparity between link speeds For example anything more than a 1 load on a gigabit link could easily overwhelm a 10 Mb s Et
321. rent OSPF interfaces and their associated neighbors To display the OSPF neighbors 1 In the OSPF Display section of the Web Agent window click Neighbl rr Agf1n22 3344 01 9 10 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 2 Use Table 9 8 to review the OSPF neighbors parameters Table 9 8 OSPF Neighbors Parameters Parameter Definition IP Address The IP address associated with the OSPF neighbor State The functional level of an interface States include e Down This is the initial state of a neighbor conversation It indicates that there has been no recent information received from the neighbor Attempt Indicates that no recent information has been received from the neighbor but that a more concerted effort should be made to contact the neighbor e INIT Indicates that the Hello packet has recently been seen from the neighbor However bidirectional communication has not yet been established with the neighbor e 2 Way Communication between the two routers is bidirectional e ExStart This is the first step in creating an adjacency between the two neighboring routers The goal of this step is to decide which router is the master and to decide upon the initial DD sequence number Neighbor conversations in this state or greater are called adjacencies e Exchange Router is describing its entire link state database by sending Database Description packets to the ne
322. rformance Using OSPF Statistics Configuring OSPF Configuring OSPF includes O OO OU Q OU U oO OU 0 U Configuring the OSPF Global Configuration Creating OSPF Areas Deleting OSPF Areas Modifying OSPF Areas Deleting OSPF Areas Creating OSPF Virtual Links Deleting OSPF Virtual Links Modifying OSPF Virtual Links Creating OSPF Summaries Deleting OSPF Summaries Modifying OSPF Summaries Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 9 1 Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 Configuring the OSPF Global Configuration The OSPF global configuration allows you to globally configure OSPF on your switch It also allows you to specify your router ID and whether or not you want the switch to be the Autonomous System AS border router To globally configure OSPF 1 In the OSPF Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Global Configuration The OSPF Global Configuration dialog box opens 2 Use Table 9 1 to configure your global setup Table 9 1 OSPF Global Configuration Parameters Parameter Allows you to OSPF Select to enable or disable OSPF globally on your switch Router ID Specify the Router ID on the switch The router ID is a 32 bit number assigned to each router running the OSPF protocol This number uniquely identifies the router within an Autonomous System If 0 0 0 0 is used the router uses the IP address of an interface AS Border Router Enable or disable the switch
323. rks A runt packet is an incomplete packet that is long enough to be detected by an Ethernet interface Indicates Actions Undersized Count of packets with a valid CRC Possible cause Device or Packets that violate the minimum Ethernet application creating non compliant packet size packets These malformed packets are most Possible action Use a network often the result of software errors analyzer to identify the transceiver which at the source of the problem If necessary replace transceiver network adapter or station Oversized Count of packets with a valid CRC Possible cause Device or Packets that violate the maximum Ethernet application creating non compliant packet size packets These malformed packets are most Possible action Use a network often the result of software errors analyzer to identify the transceiver which at the source of the problem If necessary replace transceiver network adapter or station Fragments Fragments or runts result from Possible causes e Interference on network cabling e A Transceiver attached to the Repeater is generating Signal Quality Errors SQE Possible actions respectively e Inspect cable runs to see if they are too close to noisy devices and check for problems with network devices e Disable SQE on the Transceiver 17 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Analyzing Network Performance Using RMON and Ethernet Statistics Layer 2 amp Layer 3
324. rmation Regaining Configuration Access to the PPP Serial Port Console If the PPP serial port console is configured incorrectly the command line interface CLI becomes temporarily unavailable for reconfiguration To regain access to the CLI when the console port is in PPP mode 1 In the console window enter TTY The CLI login prompt displays It may be necessary to press Enter several times to see the login prompt You may see the modem init command string 2 Atthe Login prompt enter your user name The password prompt displays 3 Atthe Password prompt enter your password The Cajun CLI prompt displays 4 Enter the PPP configuration commands necessary to start PPP Refer to Configuring the Serial Console Port as a PPP Console earlier in this chapter and Creating an IP Interface in Chapter 7 for more information on PPP configuration commands Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 27 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 5 After you complete your configuration settings enter exit at the CLI prompt to reinvoke the modem control software and exit CLI mode Note You do not need to exit from CLI if the serial port console has been configured as a TTY console or if you do not intend to re attempt connecting using PPP Configuring Dial Up Networking To configure your PC for dial up networking with a PPP serial port console 1 8 9 From My Computer double click Dial
325. rmation changing contact 3 33 location 3 33 name 3 33 system reset performing 3 45 T TACACS IP helper address parameters 7 51 tag LSA detail 9 16 TblInst address forwarding table parameters 14 5 TCP established IP access list parameters 7 11 TCP UDP destination port IP access list parameters 7 11 TCP UDP source port IP access list parameters 7 11 Technical Support contacting xx temperature status event class parameters 16 8 viewing 16 2 temperature system configuring 3 39 temperature threshold parameters high shutdown temperature 16 3 low shutdown temperature 16 3 lower warning temperature 16 3 upper warning temperature 16 3 temperature thresholds 16 3 terminal setup 3 1 TFTP IP helper address parameters 7 51 TFTP server copying 3 49 TFTP server IP address configuration file management 3 48 TFTP transfer status viewing 3 50 this router is group membership querier IGMP interface statistical parameters 7 29 throughput 1 6 2 3 ticks IPX RIP filter parameters 5 3 IPX route table parameter 4 12 IPX static route 4 6 TIME IP helper address parameters 7 51 time of state change VRRP statistical parameters 7 45 time stamp event and shutdown log entries 16 5 Index 35 times this VR became master VRRP statistical parameters 7 45 too long AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 too short AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 top change detection spanning tree bridge port information 12 11
326. ropped due to event system queue full 16 7 events dropped due to overload of event system 16 7 viewing 16 6 event table actions console 16 9 log 16 9 trap 16 9 events dropped due to event system queue full event statistics 16 7 events dropped due to overload of event system event statistics 16 7 examining DVMRP interface statistics 7 33 examining IP routing table statistics 7 26 example of routing with Layer 2 3 1 8 expansion module optional 2 1 2 2 expiration period DVMRP neighbor routers 7 35 expiration period in sec DVMRP route table parameters 7 36 external LSA detail 9 16 external LSA count OSPF statistical parameters 9 9 F fabric port buffers buffer management parameters 13 3 fabric ports 2 3 failed add attempts forwarding cache FE parameters 11 6 fan status event class parameters 16 8 Fast Ethernet module auto negotiation mode enabling 3 10 configuring 3 9 rate limit mode enabling 3 10 Fast Ethernet module configuring auto negotiation duplex advertisement 3 10 auto negotiation speed advertisement 3 10 duplex mode 3 10 flow control mode 3 10 pace priority mode 3 10 Index 11 port name 3 9 rate limit burst size 3 10 rate limit rate 3 10 service port 3 9 speed mode 3 10 user port 3 9 fast start switch port configuration parameters 3 15 fast start mode configuring 3 21 fast start mode all ports enabling 3 22 fast start mode individual ports enabling 3 22 fault
327. roup If you are adding ports to an existing hunt group disable the ports you are adding 5 On the first switch in the Switching Parameters section of the Web Agent window select Hunt Groups The first Hunt Group Configuration dialog box opens 6 Use Table 12 7 to configure your Hunt group Table 12 7 Hunt Group Configuration Dialog Box Button or Link Function Create Summons a screen that allows you to add new hunt groups Note This button is unavailable if you have read only privileges Delete Deletes hunt groups that have a check next to the hunt group name Members Lists port numbers of port that are members of the selected hunt group and opens the Hunt Group Members dialog box Redistribute Redistributes the hunt group learned addresses Click this button if you notice that a particular link has learned to many of the busiest ports The button causes the MAC addresses to be redistributed among the hunt group ports 7 Click CREATE The second Hunt Group Configuration dialog box opens 8 In the Name field enter a name for the end of hunt group 9 From the Load Sharing pull down menu select Enable to enable load sharing 10 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Viewing Hunt Group Members To view hunt group member details 1 From the Switching Parameters section of the Web Agent window click Hunt Groups The Hunt Group Configuration dialog box opens 2 In
328. routed in hardware Supports implementation of AppleTalk and DECnet that are not implemented in hardware The Layer 3 supervisor module requires a faster CPU and more memory Also unlike the Layer 2 supervisor the Layer 3 supervisor is part of the path that some packets take through the system To accomplish this the Layer 3 supervisor requires faster data transfer to and from the switching fabric Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 1 3 Cajun P550 Switch Overview Figure 1 2 illustrates a conceptual diagram of the Layer 3 supervisor module s functions Figure 1 2 Layer 3 Supervisor M odule Conceptual Operation Routing Table and Cache Management Multilayer Supervisor Conceptual Diagram Media Modules All Layer 2 and Layer 3 media modules have full non blocking performance Bridging and routing are performed on the input side of each media module Each media module features O IEEE 802 3z full duplex flow control This allows the switch ports to send a pause command before input buffers overflow Half duplex ports support active backpressure jamming O VLAN trunking or non tagged access modes This allows the switch ports to interoperate with popular tagged trunking schemes used by large networking vendors O Priority Queuing and Class of Service These features allow you to prioritize traffic between particular stations or sets of stations to support jitter sensitive applications Supported cl
329. rs 3 15 VLAN binding configuring Virtual LANs 3 17 VLAN bindings 3Com SuperStack parameters 3 21 Bay Networks System 5000 parameters 3 21 VLAN classification switch port parameter 3 13 VLAN configuration parameters auto increment HT size 12 4 initial hash table size 12 4 VLAN considerations 12 3 VLAN exchange parameters updater timestamp 3 19 VLAN operation ingress rules 12 1 VLAN spanning tree bridge level parameters bridge forward delay 12 9 bridge hello time 12 8 bridge max age 12 8 forward delay 12 9 hello time 12 9 max age 12 9 mode 12 8 priority 12 8 VLAN switch port table parameters binding type 12 5 frame format 12 5 port 12 4 port name 12 4 VLAN trunking definition 1 4 VR ID VRRP configuration parameters 7 43 VRRP statistical parameters 7 45 VRRP add IP interface parameters 7 3 enabling 7 43 IP global configuration parameters 7 4 IP interface parameters 7 7 VRRP authentication configuration 7 44 VRRP authentication key 7 44 defining 7 44 VRRP configuration overview 7 42 VRRP configuration parameters addr owner override 7 44 advertisement timer 7 44 auth key 7 44 auth type 7 44 interface 7 43 IP address 7 43 priority 7 44 VR ID 7 43 VRRP overview configuring 7 42 VRRP router creating 7 43 VRRP statistical parameters advertisements received 7 45 advertisements sent 7 45 bad advertisements received 7 45 interface 7 45 IP address 7 45 state 7 45 time of
330. rse the switching fabric to get to the supervisor module s software routing function O All unknown not learned traffic from Layer 3 modules must first be sent to the Layer 3 supervisor module where information on the frame is added to the supervisor module s master routing table and added to the appropriate address caches of Layer 3 media modules O Since Layer 2 modules have no routing capability packets that are received by a Layer 2 module and require routing are routed by sending the packet to the Layer 3 supervisor module The routing engine on the supervisor module then performs the routing operation for the Layer 2 modules and sends the packet back through the switching fabric to the destination port Figure 1 4 shows a conceptual example of how traffic is routed in a Cajun switch Figure 1 4 Layer 2 3 Routing with Cajun Switch L2 L3 Supervisor L2 L3 I O Module Oe L2 L3 I O Module L2 I O Module Loo Between L2 I O Modules Between L3 I O Modules Between L2 and L3 I O Modules L2 L3 Supervisor d L2 L3 I O Module L2 I O Module L2 L3 Supervisor C L2 L3 I O Module AA 22s Virtual Bridging Functions The switch design supports O Up to 24 000 MAC addresses in the switch address forwarding table This feature allows the switch to store forwarding information for hosts in very large networks O Segmented address tables qualified by address and VLAN membersh
331. rtisements Talk Only Send advertisements e Listen Only Receive advertisements 3 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Creating IPX SAP Filters This section describes O Creating IPX SAP Name Filters O Creating IPX SAP Network Filters Creating IPX SAP Name Filters To create IPX SAP Name filters 1 In the IPX SAP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Name Filters The IPX SAP Name Filters dialog box opens 6 2 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX SAP Protocol Layer 3 2 Click CREATE to create a new filter The Add IPX SAP Name Filter dialog box opens 3 Use Table 6 2 to complete your configuration Table 6 2 IPX SAP Name Filter Parameters Parameter Allows you to Select the interface to which this filter will be applied to SAP packets sent and or received on the interface Specify the filter precedence in order of importance with 0 equal to most important Note All SAP filters on the same interface must be assigned a unique precedence value Specify a service name For example FS_ENGOO1 A single asterisk may be present as the last character which will match all remaining characters of a service name Specify the service type that identifies the type of service the server provides Well known service types include Unknown 0 Print Queue 3 e File Server 4 Job Server 5
332. rtup configuration 3 46 viewing the TFTP transfer status 3 50 viewing VRRP statistics 7 44 virtual bridging functions 2 4 Virtual LAN binding options bind to all 3 17 bind to received 3 17 static 3 17 Virtual LAN trunking modes 3COM 3 16 IEEE 802 1Q 3 16 Virtual LANs 2 4 binding options 3 17 flood pruning overview 1 9 2 4 trunk mode configuring 3 16 virtual LANs creating a VLAN 12 3 parameters 12 4 Virtual LANs configuring assignment 3 16 automatic VLAN creation 3 17 frame tags 3 17 trunk mode 3 16 VLAN binding 3 17 virtual router VRRP 7 43 VRRP authentication 7 44 virtual routers enabling VRRP 7 43 VLAN 2 4 add IP interface parameters 7 2 AppleTalk interface parameters 10 3 ARP cache search parameters 7 27 configuring all ports 12 4 creating 12 3 egress rules 12 2 filtering 14 4 forwarding rules 12 2 intelligent multicast session search parameters 15 7 IP interface parameters 7 6 IPX interface 4 5 Layer 3 route cache search parameters 11 5 LGMP client display per VLAN parameters 15 17 LGMP server display per VLAN parameters 15 15 multicast session parameters 15 8 operation 12 1 router port display parameters 15 6 search 14 4 static multicast session configuration parameters 15 10 38 Index static multicast session parameters 15 10 VLAN association address table instance parameters 14 2 VLAN binding Cisco Catalyst 5000 parameters 3 20 switch port configuration paramete
333. ry Control Council for Interference by Data Processing Equipment and Electronic Office Machines aimed at preventing radio interference in commercial and or industrial areas Consequently when used in a residential area or in an adjacent area thereto radio interference may be caused to radios and TV receivers Read the instructions for correct handling CE Notice Class A Computing Device Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Achtung Dieses ist ein Ger t der Funkstorgrenzwertklasse A In Wohnbereichen k nnen bei Betrieb dieses Ger tes Rundfunkst rungen auftreten in welchen Fallen der Benutzer ftir entsprechende Gegenma nahmen verantwortlich ist Avertissement Cet appareil est un appareil de Classe A Dans un environnement r sidentiel cet appareil peut provoquer des brouillages radio lectriques Dans ce cas il peut tre demand l utilisateur de prendre les mesures appropri es Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide A 1 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide R 7 ah FS SCH ee Supported MIB Groups MIBs Supported by Layer 2 and Layer 3 Switches The following section lists by protocol public and private Management Information Bases MIBs supported by the Cajun P220 Cajun P550 and Cajun P550R switches Note that all MIBs supported by Layer 2 switches also ar
334. s Preference Specify a low or high routing preference 3 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Creating Static ARP Entries To create a static ARP entry in your switch s ARP cache 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Static ARP The IP Static ARP Entries dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE The Add IP Static ARP Entry dialog box opens 7 14 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 3 Use Table 7 7 to configure IP Static ARP Table 7 7 P Static ARP Parameters Parameter Allows you to IP Address Configure an IP address to associate with the Static ARP entry MAC Address Enter the MAC address of a node to which you want to create a static ARP entry Interface Select an interface to associate with the Static ARP entry 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Creating a BOOTP DHCP Server Entry The BOOTP DHCP Server Entry allows you to configure a Cajun Router as a BOOTP DHCP Relay Agent between a BOOTP DHCP server and the source client Only the locally attached clients will be able to find the BOOTP DHCP server if the BOOTP DHCP server entry is configured on your switch If you have a network with multiple switches and you want at least one client that is attached to each switch to be able to access the BOOTP DHCP server then you must configure each of those
335. s 4 10 IPX out no routes IPX global parameters 4 10 IPX out packets IPX global parameters 4 10 IPX out ping replies IPX global parameters 4 10 IPX out pint requests IPX global parameters 4 10 IPX out requests IPX global parameters 4 10 IPX overview 4 1 IPX RIP filter example of suppressing advertising of a network 5 4 suppress advertising of all networks example 5 4 IPX RIP filter parameters direction 5 3 end network 5 3 filter suppress 5 3 hops 5 3 interface 5 3 precedence 5 3 start network 5 3 ticks 5 3 IPX RIP filters creating 5 2 IPX RIP filters modifying 5 2 20 Index IPX RIP interface statistical parameters bad packets received 5 6 interface 5 6 network number 5 6 non triggered updates sent 5 6 requests received 5 6 state 5 6 triggered updates sent 5 6 updates received 5 6 IPX RIP interface statistics displaying 3 1 5 5 IPX route table examining 4 11 IPX route table parameters hops 4 12 interface 4 11 network 4 11 next hop MAC address 4 12 source 4 11 ticks 4 12 TTL 4 11 IPX route table search 4 10 IPX route table statistics examining 4 12 IPX router configuring 4 3 IPX routing IPX routing 4 4 IPX routing global statistics displaying 4 9 IPX routing table search parameters interface 4 11 network number 4 11 source 4 11 IPX routing table statistics current number of routes 4 12 peak number of routes 4 12 route add failures 4 12
336. s Change for example Description Displays a text string that describes the specific event 6 Click e SEARCH to view the event or shutdown logs The Event or Shutdown Log dialog box opens e CANCEL to restore previous settings e CLEAR EVENT LOG to clear the event log settings Note If you have write access you can clear the event log by clicking Clear Event Log If you have read access only this option is not available Viewing Event Statistics To view event statistics 1 In the Event Subsystem section of the Web Agent click Event Statistics The Event Statistics dialog box opens 16 6 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Monitoring the Cajun Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 2 Use Table 16 5 for more information on the event statistics Table 16 5 Event Statistics Parameters Parameter Definition Event Log wraps Displays the number of times the Event Log has wrapped This results in the oldest events being overwritten Depending on how many events have been sent to the Event Log and when it was last cleared the Event Log may or may not wrap When the event log wraps the old events are discarded and replaced with the newest events Events dropped dueto Displays the number of events the Event System has had to overload of event drop to prevent overloading The Event System paces system events being sent to it to prevent the switch from only processing events You can reduce the number of events bein
337. s Ethernet interface statistical parameters 17 2 bucket info address table instance parameters 14 3 buffer and queue management overview 1 14 2 8 buffer detailed configuration parameters memory 13 3 buffer management 1 14 2 8 buffer management parameters fabric port buffers 13 3 physical port buffers 13 3 buffer management table parameters age timer 13 3 congestion drops 13 4 high and normal overflow drops 13 4 high and normal stale drops 13 4 high priority allocation 13 4 high priority service ratio 13 4 priority threshold 13 4 buffer space 1 14 2 9 buffers managing 13 2 bytes Ethernet interface statistical parameters 17 2 C CajunDocs CD xvii category 10 100 port parameter 3 11 gigabit port parameters 3 8 CGMP packet reception statistics CGMP snooping parameters 15 18 CGMP snooper configuring viewing configuring CGMP snooper 15 18 CGMP snooping 15 3 CGMP snooping overview 15 3 CGMP snooping parameters CGMP packet reception statistics 15 18 enable state 15 18 intelligent multicast session statistics 15 18 checking active alarms 16 3 checksum IPX datagram fields 4 2 Index 5 LSA detail 9 16 OSPF link state database parameter 9 14 checksum error AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 Cisco Catalyst 5000 parameters port VLAN 3 20 Cisco Catalyst 5000 parameters automatic VLAN creation 3 20 trunk mode 3 20 VLAN binding 3 20 VTP snooping 3 20 CLI regaining access 3 27 CLI c
338. s Layer 2 and Layer 3 Parameter Defines Binding Type e Static when ports are added manually and can be removed Table 12 2 VLAN Switch Port Table Parameters Continued e Persistent when ports are bound to VLANs automatically but can not be removed e Dynamic when port is assigned to VLAN using automatic VLAN binding which causes ports to bind to VLANs using the Bind to Received switch port setting and can be removed Refer to Configuring Port VLAN Parameters in Chapter 2 for more information 4 Frame Format e From Port causes port to send frames using the frame format specified in the Trunk Mode attribute of the corresponding switch port Refer to Configuring Port VLAN Parameters in Chapter 2 for more information e Clear causes port to send untagged frames on this port for this VLAN Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Creating 3Com Mapping Tables The Default 3Com Mapping Table maps 3Com VLAN 1 to 16 to the Lucent Default VLAN and 3Com VLANs 2 through 16 to the Lucent Discard VLAN In a network with multiple 3Com devices it s possible that some parts of a network will use different VLAN mappings for incoming 3Com tagged packets The switch allows you to create additional 3Com mapping tables to use in situations where this occurs Note 3Com trunks do not work across hunt groups To create additional mapping tables 1 2 3
339. s and other events of the switch Set SNTP and Summer Time Hours before you set the system clock To set the system clock 1 In the System Information section of the Web Agent window click System Clock The System Clock dialog box opens 2 In the Current Time Setting fields enter the time using 24 hour time format for example 10 p m is 22 00 00 3 From the Time Zone pull down menu select your time zone 4 In the Current Date Setting fields enter the current month date and year 5 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Note The system clock does not automatically change with Daylight Savings Time Setting the Temperature System You can set the upper and lower temperature warning systems for your switch s backplane and slot 1 To configure the temperature warning systems 1 In the System Information section of the Web Agent window click Temperature The Temperature System dialog box opens 2 Enter the desired temperature warnings for the switch backplane and slot 1 sensors For Layer 3 switches also enter the desired temperature warning for the CPU sensor 3 Click on APPLY to save your changes or Defaults to restore the temperature defaults Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 39 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Note The supervisor modules shut down the switching modules if the temperature reaches the Shutdown temperature The mod
340. s in your Dial Up networking program group 15 Right mouse click on your new connection and select Properties The Properties dialog box opens 16 Click the Server Types tab and de select all advanced options except TCP IP 17 Click TCP IP Settings The TCP IP settings dialog box opens 18 Click Specify an IP Address and enter the IP address of the serial port interface 19 Click Server assigned name server addresses 20 De select Use IP header compression and Use default gateway on remote network 21 Click OK to close the TCP IP dialog box 22 Click OK to close the new connections properties dialog box Using Dial Up Networking with a PPP Serial Port Console To use TCP IP applications Telnet HTTP and SNMP over your PPP serial port interface 1 From My Computer double click Dial Up Networking The Dial Up Networking program group opens 2 Double click on the PPP modem previously created The Connect To dialog box opens 3 Enter your password and click Connect A Pre Dial Terminal Screen opens When the modem has successfully connected a Post Dial Terminal Screen opens 4 In the Post Dial Terminal screen login using your CLI user name and password It may be necessary to enter several carriage returns to view the Login prompt 5 At the CLI prompt go to configuration mode and enter set console transfer PPP ASCII characters display below the CLI prompt This is typical while the switch attempts to connect
341. s the IGMP Interface IP interface for these statistics IP Address IP address associated with the interface IP Address Mask Subnet mask associated with each listed interface State Current state of the interface For example if the interface was enabled and operating properly you should see a state of UP listed in this field IGMP Version Version of IGMP enabled on each interface This Router is Group Router that was configured or elected to be the designated Membership Querier group membership querier The switch queries hosts on each interface only when it is acting as the designated querier on that interface Robustness Variable Tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet If a subnet is expected to have more packet loss the Robustness Variable should be increased The Robustness Variable must not be set to 0 and should not be set to 1 Next Query Request in Remaining amount of time in seconds before the next group sec membership query is transmitted Neighbor Querier Amount of time in seconds remaining before this interface Timeout in sec assumes the role of designated querier This timer is reset to the value entered for the Neighbor Querier Timeout Interval each time an IGMP query is received from a neighbor with a lower IP address If no response is received in the allotted time the query will timeout and the Version 2 0 querier will begin Group J oin Requests Number of new groups that
342. s to the switch that you specify on this page IP Address Allows you to send SNMP responses only to a station with any or a particular IP address Access Helps provide security when you use SNMP to manage the network from a single workstation Refer to Table 3 15 for more information on Access options The default value is Read Write Security Level Allows you to select the security level for this community string Refer to Table 3 16 for more information on security level options The default value is Normal Trap Receiver Allows you to enable or disable the transmission of traps to the selected IP address The default value is Disable To set SNMP communities 1 In the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window select SNMP Administration The SNMP Community Management dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE The Create SNMP Community dialog box opens 3 In the Community String field enter a community name 4 From the IP Address pull down menu select Any for any IP address or Specific and enter an IP Address in the appropriate fields Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 23 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 5 From the Access pull down menu select a level for this community Table 3 15 Table 3 15 Access Levels Access Level Manager Can Manager Cannot Read Only View switch configuration settings View community strings and statistics Change swit
343. s used to troubleshoot a network problem 7 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Viewing the Event and Shutdown Logs To view the Event and Shutdown logs 1 In the Event Subsystem section of the Web Agent window click either Event Log or Shutdown Log An Event or Shutdown Log Search dialog box opens 2 In the Search By column click the Severity Level checkbox 3 From the Severity Level pull down menu select the severity level to filter on a particular severity level for events 4 From the Event Type pull down menu select an event to filter on a particular Event Type The selected event log entries open in the Event Log dialog box 5 Use Table 16 4 for a description of the entries in the event and shutdown logs Table 16 4 Event and Shutdown Log Entries Entry Definition LogID Displays the number of this event in the log FIFO First In First Out Event ID Displays an index that identifies the event class Time Stamp Displays the date and time the event was recorded in the log Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 16 5 Monitoring the Cajun Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 16 4 Eventand Shutdown Log Entries Continued Entry Definition Severity Displays the severity of the event The possibilities are Informative Warning e Error e Severe Error e Failure Type Displays a description of the event type System start Statu
344. sec 7 31 group address 7 30 group created on 7 30 group member interface 7 30 group multicast protocol 7 30 group reporter address 7 31 IGMP interface parameters always be group membership querier 7 17 IGMP version 7 17 interface 7 17 IP address 7 17 IP address mask 7 17 maximum groups 7 17 neighbor querier timeout interval 7 18 process leave packets 7 17 query request interval 7 17 query response interval 7 18 robustness variable 7 18 IGMP interface statistical parameters group join requests received 7 29 group leave requests received 7 29 group reports received 7 29 IGMP version 7 29 interface 7 29 IP address 7 29 IP address mask 7 29 neighbor querier timeout in sec 7 29 next query request in sec 7 29 number of current groups 7 30 query messages received 7 29 query messages transmitted 7 30 robustness variable 7 29 state 7 29 this router is group membership querier 7 29 unknown messages received 7 30 IGMP interface statistics viewing 7 28 IGMP interfaces configuring 7 17 IGMP local multicast forwarding cache displaying 7 31 IGMP local multicast forwarding cache parameters destination group address 7 31 downstream interfaces 7 31 invalid flows from upstream 7 31 packets forwarded through cache entry 7 31 source address mask 7 31 source subnetwork 7 31 upstream interface 7 31 upstream source 7 31 IGMP multicast group table displaying 7 30 IGMP Only Multicast Forwarding 7 16 IG
345. set ee eee 3 30 Configuring a Static Route for the PPP Console 0 20 0 eee ee eee 3 30 Hardware Requirements for Routing 0 0 cece eee eee 3 31 Configuring IP Routing on the Switch 0 0 cee eee 3 31 Minimum IP Routing Configuration Requirements 0000 8 3 31 v Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Routing Configuration Quickstart oooooooooror rr 3 31 Configuring System Information 0 0 ce ee eee eee tenes 3 32 Entering General System Information 0 0 cece ee een 3 33 Enablinge SNTP tl E AS iad eh nate Naan Se a 3 33 Setting Summer Time HODIS dereiran nne nee eee eens 3 34 Setting Recurring Summer Time Hours 0 0 eee eee ee eens 3 34 Setting One Time Summer Time Hours sarsan ensidan t ee eee ec ee eee 3 37 Setting the System Clock 24 4024 whee A BS Ge ed eds ER Ae ee ea 3 39 Setting the Temperature System o 3 39 Displaying the Power System Statistics 0 ce eee ene 3 40 Displaying Cooling System Statistics 0 ee ee ene 3 40 Configuring Redundant Hardware 0 cent eens 3 41 Installing Redundant Hardware oooooooor eee ees 3 42 Replacing the Primary Controller 0 0 eee nee 3 43 Replacing an Element dido cosa ale Mah CGR a rd La ae OA CIEE Se 3 44 Performing a Systemi RESETS ci ed Se ped arte ed aes ted bw vel dees Bae le eee alan 3 45 Managing Configuration Files 2 0 ee eee e nes 3 45
346. signated Routers and describe the set of routers attached to a particular network e Summary Network These summaries are generated by Area Border Routers and describe inter area routes to various networks Then can also be used for aggregating routes Summary AS border This describes links to Autonomous System Border Routers and are generated by Area Border Routers e AS external These packets are generated by Autonomous System Border Routers and describe routes to destination external to the Autonomous system They are flooded everywhere except stub areas e Multicast group These packets are generated by multicast groups e NSSA external These packets are generated by Area Border Routers and describe routes within the NSSA Not So Stubby Area Router ID Of the link state database for entries originated by this router Note If your search produces results the detailed information displays in the OSPF Link State Database dialog box 4 Click MORE to display more OSPF link state database search results Note If there are no other OSPF link state database search results to display the MORE button is not available Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 9 13 Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 5 Use Table 9 10 for a description of the OSPF Link State Database Search results Table 9 10 OSPF Link State Database Parameters Parameter Definition Detail Link Displays a link to
347. smitted upstream on this switch This Transmitted indicates the number of old branches removed from the multicast distribution tree Graft Messages Graft messages transmitted upstream from this switch This Transmitted indicates the number of new upstream branches added to the multicast distribution tree Graft Acknowledgments Graft acknowledgments sent downstream from this switch Transmitted This indicates the number of new downstream branches added to the multicast distribution tree 7 32 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Examining DVMRP Interface Statistics DVMRP interface statistics list active DVMRP interfaces and provide specific information on each interface To examine DVMRP statistics 1 In the DVMRP Display section of the Web Agent window click Interface Statistics The DVMRP Interface Statistics dialog box opens 2 Perform one of the following Click REFRESH to view the latest interface statistics Click CLEAR All to reset all statistics to zero Select one interface and click CLEAR to reset the selected interface 3 Use Table 7 20 to review the interface statistics Table 7 20 DVMRP Interface Statistical Parameters Parameter Defines the DVMRP Interface IP interface configured with the DVMRP multicast routing protocol Network Address IP address of the interface configured with the DVMRP multicast Address Mask
348. specify access lists to activate you must first configure access lists For information about configuring access lists refer to Configuring Access Lists earlier in this chapter Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 13 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 To activate an access list 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Access Control The IP Access Control dialog box opens 2 From the Enable pull down menu select Enable to filter inbound traffic 3 From the IP Access List pull down menu select the name of the access list to be used for filtering when IP access control is enabled 4 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Creating IP Static Routes To create IP static routes 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Static Routes The IP Static Routes dialog box opens 2 Use Table 7 6 to complete your static route configuration Table 7 6 P Static Route Parameters Parameter Allows you to Network Address Assign an IP network address for your IP static route Mask Assign an IP subnet mask for your IP static route Next Hop Address Assign an IP address for the gateway associated with the IP static route Next Hop Interface Select an interface that is associated with the IP static route Cost Specify the metric between this router and the destination Note that this overrides routing protocol metric
349. ss The IP Helper Address dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE 3 From the Interface pull down menu select the interface of the PC or server on which you want to create an IP helper address 4 In the Helper Address field type the IP Address of the server that will receive and pass along the broadcast from the switch 5 Use Table 7 36 to determine the fields to enable Table 7 36 P Helper Address Parameters Parameter Definition Interface Provides a list of interfaces associated with the switch configuration Helper Address Enables you to specify the IP Address of the server that receives and passes along broadcasts from the switch TFTP Enables the helper to route files via Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP The default value is Enabled DNS Enables the helper to route the domain names via Dynamic Naming Service The default value is Enabled TIME Enables the helper to route the system time of specified computers on the VLAN The default value is Enabled NETBIOS Name Service Enables the helper to route the name of a user ora computer on a VLAN via NETBIOS The default value is Enabled NETBIOS Date Service Enables the helper to route the current system date of a computer on a VLAN via NETBIOS The default value is Enabled BOOTP Server Enables the helper to route IP addresses assigned by a Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP to a receiving computer The default value is Enabled BOOTP Client En
350. ssion is Layer 2 multicast traffic within a VLAN The switch supports 60 sessions per VLAN A client port is a port with an attached host configured to receive be Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 15 1 Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 a client of a multicast session Router ports are ports that are attached to or in the path to multicast routers and must be treated specially All multicast traffic on a VLAN must be forwarded to the router You can manually create and delete multicast sessions through the user configuration The addition of client and router ports can also be performed manually Dynamic intelligent multicasting is achieved through IGMP snooping LGMP Lucent Group Membership Protocol or CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol snooping All of these mechanisms are based on the assumption that the client host is running IGMP requesting membership in the IP multicast session Note If there is no multicast session created for a multicast flow in a VLAN then that multicast flow will be flooded to all ports on the VLAN Intelligent multicasting must be enabled for any dynamic intelligent multicasting to be active Layer 3 Dynamic Intelligent Multicasting IGMP snooping is supported for VLANs that have IGMP interfaces enabled This is the recommended means of supporting dynamic intelligent multicasting in Layer 3 For all VLANs that do not have an IGMP interface enabled the Layer 2 dynamic
351. stics 7 23 ICMP in timestamp requests IP routing global statistics 7 23 ICMP out address mask reply IP routing global statistics 7 24 ICMP out address mask requests IP routing global statistics 7 24 ICMP out destination unreachable IP routing global statistics 7 24 ICMP out echo reply IP routing global statistics 7 24 ICMP out echo requests IP routing global statistics 7 24 ICMP out errors IP routing global statistics 7 23 ICMP out messages IP routing global statistics 7 23 ICMP out parameter problems IP routing global statistics 7 24 ICMP out redirects IP routing global statistics 7 24 ICMP out source quenches IP routing global statistics 7 24 ICMP out time exceeded IP routing global statistics 7 24 ICMP out timestamp reply IP routing global statistics 7 24 ICMP out timestamp request IP routing global statistics 7 24 ICMP redirect add IP interface parameters 7 3 IP interface parameters 7 6 IEEE 802 1d spanning tree 1 12 2 7 IEEE 802 3x full duplex flow control definition 1 4 IEEE 802 3X PAUSE 13 2 IEEE 802 1Q Virtual LAN trunking mode 3 16 IGMP configuring 7 16 Global statistics 7 27 overview 7 16 IGMP global statistic parameters group membership queries received 7 28 group membership queries transmitted 7 28 group membership reports received 7 28 unknown messages received 7 28 IGMP global statistics displaying 7 28 IGMP group membership table parameters entry expiration period in
352. stream prune information 7 41 interface metric DVMRP interface parameters 7 20 interface scope DVMRP interface parameters 7 20 interface type DVMRP downstream link parameters 7 41 DVMRP interface parameters 7 20 upstream prune information 7 41 interfaces adding to NBP filter 10 9 adding to zone filter 10 11 deleting from a zone filter 10 11 deleting from NBP filter 10 9 interpreting front panel LEDs 16 1 interpreting IPX SAP interface statistics 6 7 interval start Ethernet interface statistical parameters 17 2 intra area routes IP global configuration parameters 7 5 introduction 15 1 invalid entry permanent definition 14 5 invalid flows from upstream DVMRP multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 40 IGMP local multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 31 invalid routes received DVMRP interface statistical parameters 7 34 IP creating OSPF summaries 9 7 creating OSPF virtual links 9 5 creating RIP trusted neighbors 8 3 displaying OSPF links 9 10 displaying OSPF neighbors 9 10 displaying OSPF statistics 9 8 DVMRP configuration 7 18 global configuration 7 1 interface configuration 7 5 modifying OSPF areas 9 4 multicast forwarding 7 16 multicast routing 7 16 multicast statistics 7 27 multicast overview 7 15 OSPF area creation 9 3 OSPF global configuration 9 2 RIP configuring interfaces 8 2 RIP global configuration 8 1 RIP statistics 8 4 searching the OSPF link sta
353. sts Prune Message Specify the time in seconds between the transmittal of Retransmit Interval generated upstream prune messages on your network Graft Message Set the time in seconds between the transmittal of Retransmit Interval generated upstream graft messages 6 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Modifying DVMRP Interface Information To modify DMVRP interface parameters 1 In the DVMRP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Interfaces The DVMRP Interfaces dialog box opens Note If no DVMRP interfaces are enabled for your existing IP interfaces VLANs you must first enable a multicast protocol before you can configure DVMRP Refer to Creating an IP Interface earlier in this chapter for more information on how to select a multicast protocol Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 2 Use Table 7 10 to complete your DVMRP configuration Table 7 10 DVMRP Interface Parameters Parameter Defines the Select DVMRP interface to be configured Interface Interface that is configured with the DVMRP multicast protocol IP Address IP address of each interface Not configurable IP Address Mask Subnet mask of each interface Not configurable Interface Type Interface type for each interface You can configure the interface type as Broadcast All traffic is forwarded through the rout
354. switches with a BOOTP DHCP server entry To create a BOOTP DHCP entry 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click BOOTP DHCP Servers The IP BOOTP DHCP Servers dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE The Add BOOTP DHCP Server Entry dialog box opens 3 In the IP Address field enter the IP address of the BOOTP DHCP server on your network 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Note It is possible to create multiple BOOTP DHCP Server Entries if necessary IP Multicast IP Multicast enables a single host to distribute information to multiple recipients To do this multicast protocols use class D IP addresses to specify specific multicast groups to which information is sent The class D IP address used by multicast routing protocol ranges from 224 0 0 1 to 224 0 0 255 The class D IP addresses available for general use are 224 0 1 0 to 239 255 255 255 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 15 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 In addition IP multicasting distributes information to multicast groups in two specific ways O Multicast Forwarding allows a switch to forward multicast traffic from the local router to group members on directly attached subnetworks If a multicast packet is forwarded to multiple interfaces on one VLAN only one Forwarding Entry is added on the VLAN for the packet One copy of the packet is sent to the VLAN O Multicast Routing allows a sw
355. t User READ_ONLY View switch configuration View user accounts and community settings and statistics strings Change switch configurations Manager View and set switch View user accounts and community READ_WRITE configuration settings and strings view statistics Administrator View and set all switch N A ADMINISTRATOR parameters 8 Click APPLY save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Configuring Port Parameters Using the Web Agent The system has two levels of port settings O O Physical port parameters Allows you to set up rules that guide the system s physical layer interaction for example enable disable speed auto negotiation Switch port parameters Allows you to specify how the port participates in switching for example VLAN mode trunking The sections that follow explain how to configure these ports Configuring Physical Port Parameters on Gigabit Ports To configure ports on a gigabit module 1 In the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window select Modules amp Ports The Module Information dialog box opens In the Ports column click the number 2 or 4 for gigabit modules for the module you want to configure The Physical Port Configuration dialog box opens Click Enable to enable a port or if the check box is enabled click Enable if you want to disable the port Click APPLY to save your settings or CANCEL to restore previous se
356. t configuring 3 19 non VLAN switch port parameters configuring 3Com mapping table 3 20 allow learning 3 19 hunt group 3 19 known mode 3 20 spanning tree 3 19 N option OSPF neighbors parameters 9 12 normal SNMP security level 3 24 normal priority traffic 13 1 number of current groups IGMP interface statistical parameters 7 30 number of routes IPX routing table statistic 4 12 number of triggered routes DVMRP routing statistical parameters 7 36 number of valid routes DVMRP routing statistical parameters 7 36 O one time summer time hours configuration 3 37 day 3 38 end 3 37 hour 3 38 minutes 3 38 month 3 38 start 3 37 week 3 38 Online documentation xiv adding files to a Web server xvi getting updated online documentation xvii installing xv installing the HTTP server xv starting the HTTP server xv Online help xv accessing help files from the server xvi adding files to a Web server xvi getting updated help files xvii Open Trunk technology features 1 11 OpenTrunk features 2 6 technology 2 5 OpenTrunk technology overview 1 11 OPQ option OSPF neighbors parameters 9 12 optional expansion module 2 1 2 2 originate LSA count OSPF statistical parameters 9 9 OSPF add IP interface parameters 7 3 creating areas 9 3 creating summaries 9 7 creating virtual links 9 5 displaying links 9 10 displaying neighbors 9 10 event class parameters 16 9 IP interface parameters 7 6 monitoring s
357. t port Applications include Mgmt IGMP e LGMP e CGMP 4 Click DELETE to remove your selected multicast session client port or CANCEL to restore previous settings Note Static Mgmt client ports can only be removed through the Static Sessions dialog box Creating a Static Multicast Session To create a new Static multicast session 1 In the Intelligent Multicasting section of the Web Agent window click Static Sessions The Static Multicast Sessions dialog box opens Note You must enable intelligent multicasting on a global basis to make your static multicast session active See Configuring Global Intelligent Multicasting earlier in this chapter 2 Click Create New Session to create a new static multicast session The Static Multicast Session Configuration dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 15 9 Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 3 Use Table 15 6 to configure the new multicast session Table 15 6 Static Multicast Session Configuration Parameters Parameter Definition IP Address The IP address of the new static multicast session The range must be between 224 0 1 0 to 239 255 255 255 MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the new static multicast session Specifying the MAC address is not used for an IP multicast session VLAN Enter the VLAN associated with the new multicast session Click All to add all VLANs to the multicast sess
358. t the IPX static service to be modified 3 Use Table 4 5 to complete your configuration changes 4 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Monitoring Switch Performance Using IPX This section provides detailed statistical information on IPX and the use of IPX on your switch Examining IPX Global Statistics Searching the IPX Route Table Examining the IPX Route Table Examining IPX Route Table Statistics Searching the IPX Service Table Examining the IPX Service Table OQ 0 0 0 l Examining IPX Service Table Statistics Examining IPX Global Statistics All statistics only count IPX packets which are received by or sent from the Supervisor module not those packets routed in hardware To display the global IPX routing statistics 1 In the IPX Display section of the Web Agent window click Global Statistics The IPX Routing Global Statistics dialog box opens 2 To view or remove statistics perform one of the following steps e If you want to see the latest statistics available click REFRESH to update all statistics e If you want to reset all statistics currently displayed click CLEAR to reset all statistics to zero Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 4 9 Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 3 Use Table 4 6 to review the definition of each statistic Table 4 6 PX Global Parameters Parameter Defines the IPX In Receives Total number of IPX packets received including
359. tatic as your search value 3 Use Table 7 12 to determine your search parameters Table 7 12 P Route Table Search Parameters Parameter Allows you to perform a search Source Of your IP routing table using one of the following parameters RIP e OSPF e Static e Local Once you select one of these parameters the search attempts to find routes associated the parameter you chose Interface Based on the interface you select System default entries include e Default e Discard e Ethernet Console e Configured Interface IP Address Based on an IP address you specify 4 Click SEARCH to start the search If routes are available they are displayed in the IP Routing Table dialog box Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 25 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Note To delete a local entry from your IP routing table you must delete the local IP interface associated with that entry Examining the IP Routing Table Statistics To examine the IP Routing Table Statistics 1 In the IP Display section of the Web Agent window click Route Table Statistics The IP Routing Table Statistics dialog box opens 2 Use Table 7 13 to review each statistic Table 7 13 P Routing Table Statistical Parameters Parameter Definition Current Number of Displays the total number of active routes Routes Peak Number of Displays the peak number of routes Routes Total Routes Added Displays t
360. tch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Saving the Previous Configuration Before you upgrade your system save your previous configuration to a file or directory on a TFTP server To save your current configuration through the Web Agent 1 Q Aa W In the Memory Subsystems section of the Web Agent window click TFTP Update The TFTP Update dialog box opens In the TFTP Server IP Address field enter the IP address of the TFIP server to which you will save the previous configuration In the File Name field enter a file name for the configuration file From the TFTP Target Section pull down menu select Save Configuration Click Update in Perform Update Now Click Status in Get Status of Most Recent Update to ensure that the configuration file was saved properly To save your current configuration through the command line on version 3 0 or 3 1 Enter the following command to save your configuration to a file on a TFIP server download save_cfg lt IP address gt lt file name gt where lt IP address gt is the IP address of the TFIP server where you will save the software and lt file name gt is the name you provide for the configuration file Downloading the Image To download the version 4 0 software image from a TFIP server to an APP location through the Web Agent 1 In the Memory Subsystems section of the Web Agent window click TFTP Update In the TFTP Server Address field enter the IP address of the TFIP serve
361. te database 9 12 Searching the routing table 7 25 IP access list parameters access list name 7 9 7 10 access rule index 7 9 7 10 access type 7 9 7 10 destination subnet 7 10 protocol ID 7 10 TCP established 7 11 TCP UDP destination port 7 11 TCP UDP source port 7 11 IP access rules creating rules for filtering traffic between subnets 7 12 filtering traffic between subnets example 7 12 filtering web traffic example 7 11 IP address ARP cache search parameters 7 27 configuring SNMP communities 3 23 DVMRP interface parameters 7 20 IGMP interface parameters 7 17 IGMP interface statistical parameters 7 29 IP routing table search parameters 7 25 IP static ARP parameters 7 15 OSPF interface parameters 9 4 OSPF link parameters 9 10 OSPF neighbors parameters 9 11 RIP statistical parameters 8 4 SNMP communities parameters 3 23 static multicast session configuration parameters 15 10 static multicast session parameters 15 10 VRRP configuration parameters 7 43 VRRP statistical parameters 7 45 IP address mask DVMRP interface parameters 7 20 IGMP interface parameters 7 17 IGMP interface statistical parameters 7 29 IP ARP searching ARP cache 7 26 IP configuration 7 1 IP forward datagrams IP routing global statistics 7 22 IP fragmentation creates IP routing global statistics 7 23 IP fragmentation failures 7 23 IP fragmentation OKs IP routing global statistics 7 23 IP global configuration parameters BOOT
362. tems Incorporated Bay Networks and System 5000 are registered trademarks of Nortel Networks Cisco Catalyst 5000 is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems Incorporated ALL OTHER TRADEMARKS MENTIONED IN THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROPERTY OF THEIR RESPECTIVE OWNERS Contents Preface Documentation Feedback eiii as as xiv Online DOCUMENTATION ia AA A A OS A Sa ee ee xiv Installing Online Documentation and Help Files o o o oooooccooooooo eee XV Installing the Lucent HTTP Documentation Server 0020 XV Starting the Lucent HTTP Web Server 0 0 c eee eee xv Entering the Server Location at the Switch 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee xvi Adding the Document Files to an Existing Server 0 0002 xvi Downloading an Updated CajunDocs CD from the Internet xvii GONVEDUONS bh nee al Bae eet eed bo Peed aie ant bee dee a bean ste A ae ees xvii Using Note Caution and Warning etan ni nea aaea e eee eens xvii Audien CS S A e A E A a cad ae xviii Overview ot Th Contents raian A A OG A a et xviii Related DocunientS unnn sanesa A A A its xix Lucent Document Vta a a Bk Coca Sea dk ae dd dd aa xix Relerence Documenten eae aare e aya ae ae A E A A eae Pes xix TELM OLOGY sass tte ev Ria ote edn eda yl bth A A De dah E ED AS XX Contacting Lucent Technologies asri ee ie i a E aa ORT EA A EAE E EAE a eee ene XX Chapter 1 Cajun P550 Switch Overview SWCD Escription gt Ande is
363. ters 9 9 SPF suspend OSPF global configuration parameters 9 2 split horizon RIP interface parameters 8 3 stale drops 13 4 buffer management table parameters 13 4 STAP mode switch port parameter 3 13 start event class parameters 16 8 one time summer time hours configuration 3 37 summer time hoursu tial1 r t 7 19 49n 34 Index switch design definition MAC Address 1 8 optional per VLAN spanning tree 1 9 segmented address tables 1 8 switch fabric crossbar 2 2 designating 3 41 event class parameters 16 8 switch features 1 5 crossbar switch fabric overview 1 6 switch port configuring 3 14 switch port configuration enabling fast start mode 3 21 switch port configuration parameters 3Com mapping table 3 16 allow learning 3 15 automatic VLAN creation 3 15 fast start 3 15 frame tags 3 15 hunt group 3 15 known mode 3 16 mirror port 3 16 port VLAN 3 15 spanning tree mode 3 15 trunk mode 3 15 VLAN binding 3 15 VTP snooping 3 15 switch port parameters hunt group 3 13 links 3 13 MAC address 3 13 module configuring 3 14 name 3 13 port 3 13 port VLAN 3 13 STAP mode 3 13 trunk mode 3 13 viewing 3 13 VLAN classification 3 13 switch port parameters configuring port name 3 14 switch ports single command 3 22 system event class parameters 16 8 system entries failures Layer 3 cache configuration 11 3 system information editing 3 33 system info
364. the number of router ports that were created by the CGMP snooper and were then removed by CGMP snooping 15 18 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 3 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Or Click CLEAR to clear the statistics or REFRESH to refresh the contents of the table Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 15 19 Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 15 20 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 16 Monitoring the Cajun Switch Layer 2 Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures are common to both Layer 2 and Layer 3 configuration Included in this chapter O O O O Interpreting Front Panel LED Displays Checking Active Alarms Using the Event Subsystem Setting Log Size Interpreting Front Panel LED Displays Use Table 16 1 to interpret the state of the front panel LEDs Module All Modules Gigabit Modules Table 16 1 FrontPanel LED Display Interpretation LED Module Status Behavior Solid green Indicates Normal operation Flashing yellow Diagnostic failure Off Module not operational or not receiving power TX and RX Flashing yellow Port sending receiving traffic Off Solid green Port not sending receiving traffic Port enabled with link up Flashing green
365. the Web Agent window click Global Configuration The DVMRP Global Configuration dialog box opens 4 From the DVMRP Version 3 xFF pull down menu select Enable Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 5 Use Table 7 9 to set up your global configuration Table 7 9 DVMRP Global Parameters Parameter DVMRP Version 3 xFF Allows you to Globally enable or disable DVMRP Neighbor Router Probe Set the value in seconds that the switch probes the Interval network for available neighbor routers Neighbor Router Set the timeout in seconds that a neighbor stays up Timeout Interval without confirmation This is an important method used to timeout old routes Minimum Flash Update Interval Set the period in seconds between flash updates This represents the minimum time between advertisements of the same route Maximum Number of Routes Enter the maximum number of routes for this interface Route Report Interval Set the time in seconds that elapses between delivery of DVMRP routing table updates Route Replace Time Specify the amount of time in seconds before which a route entry will be removed if it is not refreshed Route Hold Down Time Set the time in seconds that the switch reports unavailable routes with a metric of infinity Prune Message Lifetime Set the time in seconds that a transmitted upstream prune message persi
366. the following e APPLY to save your changes CANCEL to restore previous settings e Delete All Learned Sessions to remove all learned multicast sessions e Delete All Learned Client Ports to remove all learned client ports from all multicast sessions e Display Configure Router Ports to display the router ports and configure your static router ports The Router Port Display Configuration dialog box opens Note Static sessions and client ports cannot be deleted using this dialog box Refer to Deleting a Multicast Session Client Port and Deleting a Static Multicast Session later in this chapter for more information Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 15 5 Managing Intelligent Multicasting Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Displaying Router Ports To display router ports 1 In the Intelligent Multicasting section of the Web Agent window click Global Configuration The Intelligent Multicast Global Configuration dialog box opens Note You must enable intelligent multicasting on a global basis to make your router ports active See Configuring Global Intelligent Multicasting earlier in this chapter 2 Click Display Configure Router Ports The Router Port Display Configuration dialog box opens 3 Use Table 15 2 for more information on router ports Table 15 2 Router Port Display Parameters Parameter Definition Port Displays the router port in the multicast session VLAN Displays the port VLAN o
367. the hunt group connection 12 From the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Modules amp Ports The Module Information dialog box re opens 13 In the Ports column click on the port number The Physical Port Configuration dialog box opens 14 For the selected port click the Enable checkbox to enable the ports in the hunt group The group begins functioning as a load sharing connection 15 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Note If thousands of addresses have been learned on a port and a link in the hunt group goes down the switch over of traffic between ports may take several seconds 12 14 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 13 Tuning Your Switch Performance Layer 2 Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures are common to both Layer 2 and Layer 3 configuration Buffer management features help you to optimize traffic throughput through the switch fabric Included in this chapter O How Queues Work O Managing Buffers and Queues How Queues Work Frames are buffered in the I O modules before and after traversing the switch Each queue can hold 256K bytes Architecturally they can support up to 1 MB each Each buffer is divided into two queues one for High priority Traffic and one for Normal priority Traffic The factory default is for the high priority queue uses 20 51K of the buffer The normal priority queue uses
368. the interface on which to enable VRRP authentication 3 From the VRRP Auth Type pull down menu select Simple 4 In the VRRP Auth Key field enter your authentication password The default is LUCENT 5 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Displaying VRRP Statistics To view VRRP virtual router statistics 1 In the IP Display section of the Web Agent window click VRRP Statistics The VRRP Statistics dialog box opens 7 44 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 2 Complete one of the following to modify your VRRP statistics e Click CLEAR to reset all the entries e Click REFRESH to receive the most up to date information on the entries 3 Use Table 7 32 to review your VRRP statistics Parameter Interface Table 7 32 VRRP Statistical Parameters Defines the IP interface name corresponding to the selected VRRP virtual router VRID Reporting virtual router s identification IP Address IP address that corresponds with the selected VRRP virtual router State State of the virtual router Values include e Inactive Disables the VRRP virtual router e Initialize Initializes the VRRP Virtual Router e Backup Defines the VRRP Virtual Router as a backup router to the master e Master The VRRP Virtual Router functions as the forwarding router Time of State Change Last state of transition This value
369. ther it should block or forward traffic e Learning The port is learning MAC addresses but not yet forwarding traffic e Forwarding This port has been selected by the Spanning Tree algorithm to forward traffic and is forwarding traffic currently e Down The port s physical port has no link detected Designated Root Displays the Root bridge for this spanning tree Designated Bridge The bridge identifier for the bridge considered to be the designated bridge for this segment Designated Port The port identifier of the port on the designated bridge for this segment of the spanning tree Designated Cost The path cost of the designated root of the segment connected to this port Forward Number of times that this port has transitioned from blocking to Transitions forwarding 4 In the Bridge Port column click on the Bridge Port number to configure bridge port parameters The Spanning Tree Port Configuration dialog box opens 5 Use Table 12 6 to configure Spanning Tree Bridge Port Information parameters Table 12 6 Spanning Tree Bridge Port Information Parameters Parameter Definition Enable Sets whether or not spanning tree is active on this bridge port Priority Sets the port s priority in the spanning tree algorithm A port with a higher priority lower priority number is more likely to be chosen as the primary path in the spanning tree 12 10 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation G
370. tic Routes To delete an IPX static route 1 From the IPX Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Static Routes The IPX Static Routes dialog box opens 2 Select the IPX static route to be removed 3 Click DELETE to remove the static route or CANCEL to restore previous settings Modifying IPX Static Routes To modify an IPX static route 1 From the IPX Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Static Routes The IPX Static Routes dialog box opens 2 Select the IPX static route to be modified 3 Use Table 4 4 to complete your configuration changes 4 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Creating IPX Static Services To create IPX static services 1 From the IPX Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Static Services The IPX Static Services dialog box opens 2 Click CREATE to create a new static service The Add IPX Static Service dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 4 7 Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 3 Use Table 4 5 to complete your configuration Table 4 5 PX Static Service Parameters Parameter Allows you to specify the Service Name Name of the IPX static service For example FS_ENGO1 Use SLIST NetWare 3 x or NLIST NetWare 4 x to list your current server names and types from your NetWare server Type Service type in hex that identifies the type of IPX static service the server provides
371. tion Access List Enter the access list number to be associated with the zone filter Valid values are 632 663 Name Enter the name of the zone to be filtered You can also leave this field blank for wildcarding Type Select the type of filtering Options include e Deny e Permit Interface Select the interface to apply this filter to 4 Click CREATE to add the new zone filter or CANCEL to restore previous settings Editing an AppleTalk Zone Filter To edit an AppleTalk zone filter 1 N w In the AppleTalk Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Zone Filter The AppleTalk Zone Filter dialog box opens Click the Select for the AppleTalk zone filter to be edited Use Table 10 4 to edit your zone filter Click CREATE to add a new zone filter The Add AppleTalk Zone Filter dialog box opens See Creating an AppleTalk Zone Filter earlier in this section for more information DELETE to remove the selected zone filter CANCEL to restore previous settings Edit If to add or delete this zone filter to from an interface The Add Delete Interface to Zone Filter dialog box opens See Adding or Deleting Interfaces to Zone Filter later in this section for more information 10 10 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 Adding or Deleting Interfaces to a Zone Filter To add or delete interfaces to a zone filter 1 In the AppleTalk Configuration secti
372. tion of the Web Agent window click IRDP The ICMP Router Discovery Protocol dialog box opens Select the IRDP interface you want to delete and click DELETE The IRDP interface is deleted and no longer displays in the interface list Configuring LDAP In the Web console you can configure Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP settings and view LDAP statistics On the Cajun P550 switch LDAP allows access control lists to be retrieved from a database on an LDAP server and applied to the Cajun P550 switch You can also view LDAP statistics for the switch You can configure a primary and secondary LDAP server as well as the search base for the switch to contact in response to an LDAP request Configuring a secondary server ensures that LDAP requests can be fulfilled if a primary server fails Configuring LDAP Settings To configure LDAP settings 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent click LDAP Configuration The LDAP Configuration dialog box opens 7 48 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 2 Use the following table to enter necessary information in the LDAP Configuration dialog box Table 7 34 LDAP Configuration Parameters Parameter Definition Primary Server IP Enter the IP address of your primary LDAP server for Address the access control list domain This address is used first when connecting to and downloading access lists from an LDAP server The default valu
373. tistics 10 16 network range end AppleTalk interface parameters 10 3 AppleTalk static route 10 6 network range start AppleTalk interface parameters 10 3 AppleTalk static route 10 6 new client ports added IGMP snooping 15 12 new router ports added IGMP snooping 15 12 new sessions created IGMP snooping 15 12 next hop AppleTalk route table statistics 10 14 next probe message in sec DVMRP interface statistical parameters 7 33 26 Index next pruned downstream interface to timeout DVMRP multicast forwarding cache parameters 7 40 next query request in sec IGMP interface statistical parameters 7 29 next hop address IP static route parameters 7 14 next hop MAC address IPX route table parameter 4 12 IPX service table parameter 4 14 next hop node IPX static route 4 6 IPX static service parameter 4 8 next hop VLAN IP static route parameters 7 14 no client AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 no route AppleTalk global statistics 10 12 node AppleTalk ARP cache table statistics 10 16 AppleTalk interface parameters 10 4 AppleTalk interface statistics 10 13 AppleTalk static route 10 6 IPX service table parameter 4 14 IPX static service parameter 4 8 node address IPX interface 4 5 none SNMP access level 3 24 non tagged access mode definition 1 4 non triggered updates sent IPX RIP interface statistical parameters 5 6 IPX SAP interface statistical parameters 6 8 RIP statistical parameters 8 4 non VLAN switch por
374. tive Alarms 11 APPLY CANCEL E 2 Inthe Name field enter a name for the switch 3 In the Location field enter the location for the switch for example floor and closet location 4 In the Contact field enter information about the person who should be contacted in the event of a problem 5 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Enabling SNTP The Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP ensures that you can automatically synchronize time on all computers switches and other devices connected to your Cajun P550 Switch By enabling SNTP you ensure that all devices connected to your switch reflect the same time Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 33 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 When you enable SNTP you are required to set your time zone and the rule or dates of Summer Time Hours followed by your location For information about setting your time zone refer to Setting One Time Summer Time Hours For information about setting Summer Time Hours refer to Setting Summer Time Hours To enable SNTP 1 In the System Information section of the Web Agent window click System Clock The System Clock dialog box opens 2 In the Clock Optionssection click Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP The SNTP Client Configuration dialog box opens 3 From the Enable State pull down menu select Enable 4 In the Server IP Address field enter the IP
375. to ignore Protocol ID A protocol ID to be filtered For example ICMP 1 IGMP 2 A single asterisk indicates all protocols 7 10 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 TCP UDP Source Port Specify a range of source ports that pass between two hosts or switches using the Transmission Control Protocol TCP or the User Datagram Protocol UDP Options include 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Example Filtering Web Traffic Using an Access Rule To configure your switch to filter Web traffic to or from a particular Web server 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Access Lists The IP Access List dialog box displays 2 Click Create Extended The IP Extended Access Rule Creation dialog box displays Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 11 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 NONA In the Access List Name field enter a number between 100 and 199 to identify your new access control list In the Access Rule Index field enter a number to identify the access rule From the Access Type pull down menu select Filter In the Source Address field enter an asterisk for the source address In the Dest Address field enter an IP address that represents the destination address of the Web server In the TCP UDP Destination Port field Entera Min of O HTTP e Enter a Max of 80 HTTP In t
376. to be an Autonomous System Border Router ASBR SPF Hold Time Specify the minimum number of seconds between SPF runs SPF Suspend Specify the number of nodes to process SPF runs before suspending Auto Creation of Virtual Links Enable or disable the function of automating the creation of virtual circuits based on network topology Maximum Number of Paths Configure the maximum number of paths used when running SPF Local Ext Type Specify whether imported local routes will be advertised in OSPF with type 1 internal or type 2 external metrics RIP Ext Type Specify whether imported RIP routes will be advertised in OSPF with type 1 internal or type 2 external metrics Static Ext Type Specify whether imported high preference routes will be advertised in OSPF with type 1 internal or type 2 external metrics Static Low Ext Type Specify whether imported low preference routes will be advertised in OSPF with type 1 internal or type 2 external metrics 3 Click APPLY to save changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 Creating OSPF Areas To create OSPF areas 1 In the OSPF Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Areas The OSPF Areas dialog box opens Note The Area ID 0 0 0 0 is a backbone area and always exists in an OSPF configuration 2
377. to the default VLAN Trunk Mode Multi layer causes the port to send frames using the multi layer format VLAN Binding Bind to All binds the port to all VLANs known to the switch Automatic VLAN Enable Disable if using VTP Snooping causes the Creation switch to learn new VLAN IDs that arrive at the port and then bind the port to these VLANs VTP Snooping Enable cause the switch to update its VLANs as they are created deleted or changed on the Catalyst 3 20 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Table 3 12 Example2 Trunk to 3Com SuperStack Parameter Recommended Setting Port VLAN Default This parameter is ignored when using 3Com VLANs Trunk Mode 3Com Allows the switch to read the incoming VLAN tags VLAN Binding Static This parameter is ignored when using 3Com VLANs Automatic VLAN Disable This parameter is ignored when using 3Com VLANs Creation Table 3 13 Example 3 Trunk to Bay Networks System 500 o Parameter Recommended Setting Port VLAN Default Causes untagged packets to be assigned to the default VLAN Trunk Mode IEEE 802 1Q Causes the port to send frames using the IEEE 802 1Q format This assumes that you have configured the Bay Networks switch to use IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagging as well VLAN Binding Bind to All Binds the port to all VLANs known to the switch
378. ttings In the Name field click the port name to set additional parameters The Detailed Physical Port Configuration dialog box opens Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 7 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 9 Refer to Table 3 4 for more information on the Gigabit port parameters In the Name field enter a port name If this is an end station port from the Category pull down menu select User Port For trunk ports select Service Port From the Flow Control Mode pull down menu select Enable to use flow control to prevent buffer overflows Disable this feature only when flow control is causing congestion in other areas of the network From the Pace Priority Mode pull down menu select Enable to recognize and use 3Com s PACE priority mechanism 10 From the Remote Fault Detect pull down menu select Enable to detect remote link errors Notes e The remote fault detection functionality should be enabled on both ends of a Cajun to Cajun link in two cases The first case is when two Cajun gigabit ports are connected that do not support auto negotiation The second case is when a Cajun gigabit port that does not support auto negotiation is connected to a Cajun gigabit port that does support auto negotiation If two gigabit ports that support auto negotiation are connected you should enable auto negotiation e Auto negotiation and remote fault detection cannot be enabled concurrently Auto n
379. uests Received The number of requests received on the SAP interface GNS Requests Received The number of GNS requests received on the SAP interface Bad Packets Received 3 Click on CLEAR to remove the statistics or REFRESH to access current interface Statistics The number of bad packets received on the SAP interface 6 8 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures are specific to Layer 3 configuration This chapter describes how to configure IP on your switch Configuring IP Global Routing In the Cajun P550 Switch capabilities that once were provided by additional hardware such as bridges switches and hubs are now provided as virtual configurations inside the router You can emulate bridging capabilities inside the chassis of the Cajun P550 Switch through Virtual Local Area Networks VLANs The ability to emulate bridging hardware through a virtual means is referred to as IP Routing High level tasks involved in creating and setting up IP Routing include O Oo oO U UO U UO U Q Creating an IP Interface Enabling IP Routing Assigning IP Interfaces to the VLAN Configuring Access Lists Activating Access Lists Creating IP Static Routes Creating Static ARP Entries Creating a BOOTP DHCP Server Entry Configuring IGMP Configuring DVMRP For information about creating and assigning physical ports to a VLAN refe
380. uide Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Layer 2 and Layer 3 Table 12 6 Spanning Tree Bridge Port Information Parameters Continued Parameter Path Cost Definition Sets the spanning tree path cost for this port The ports that you prefer be used by the spanning tree should have the lowest path cost Note Configuring the path cost for a link when the link is in the down state is not saved in the configuration NV memory Establish the link first before configuring the path cost Top Change Detection Allows you to enable or disable topology change detection Specifies whether a Topology Change Notification TCN packet is sent through the root port or if this switch is the root bridge whether or not Fast Aging occurs whenever the port enters the forwarding or blocking states This attribute should only be used on port which connect to no other switches Note A topology change occurs when you change a port mirroring piggyback port 6 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Disabling Spanning Tree Mode for the Port To disable spanning tree mode for the port 1 In the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Modules amp Ports The Module Information dialog box opens 2 In the Switch Ports column click the switch port number The Switch Ports dialog box opens 3 In the Name column click the port number to be disabled The Switch P
381. ules are restarted if the temperature goes below the Upper Warning Temperature The default Shutdown temperatures are conservative for the slot 1 sensor 50 C and backplane sensor 50 C They can be safely set to 60 C but settings higher than 60 C are not recommended You can set the shutdown temperature to a value lower than 50 C to ensure prompt notification if a fan fails Displaying the Power System Statistics To display the power system statistics 1 In the System Information section of the Web Agent window click Power System The Power System dialog box opens 2 Use Table 3 21 to review your power system statistics Table 3 21 Power System Statistical Parameters Parameter Definition Power Supply Identifies the power supply Status Identifies whether the power supply is detected Type Describes the type of power supply detected Total System Power Displays the total system power in Watts Current Power Available Displays the current power available Note The power system settings will only display 600W of available power with three power supplies installed This is because the switch uses a maximum of two power supplies The third power supply is held in reserve for redundancy in the event one of the other power supplies fails Displaying Cooling System Statistics To display the switch s cooling system status 1 In the System Information section of the Web Agent window click Cooling
382. up levels 11 6 lookup misses 11 6 memory use in bytes 11 6 mode 11 6 PRE 11 6 total entries 11 6 type 11 6 forwarding cache L3 searching the routing cache 11 4 forwarding cache statistics monitoring 11 3 forwarding interface designated forwarder s table parameters 7 38 forwarding rules VLAN 12 2 forwarding state spanning tree bridge port 12 10 found on interface DVMRP downstream dependent router 7 39 DVMRP neighbor routers 7 35 DVMRP upstream routers 7 37 fragments Ethernet interface statistical parameters 17 4 frame classification 1 9 2 4 frame format VLAN switch port table parameters 12 5 frame forwarding cache displaying statistics 11 3 frame forwarding statistical parameters FIRE fabric port 11 4 L2 frame count 11 4 L3 drop frames 11 4 L3 frame cache hits 11 4 L3 slow path frames 11 4 L3 total T2 11 4 percent cache hits 11 4 percent drops 11 4 percent slow path 11 4 RX frame count T2 11 4 frame tags switch port configuration parameters 3 15 frame tags configuring Virtual LANs 3 17 frame type IPX interface 4 5 front panel LEDs HD FD 16 2 interpreting 16 1 front panel LEDs 10 100 module port 16 2 front panel LEDs gigabit module port 16 1 G general system information setting device contact 3 33 device location 3 33 switch name 3 33 get nearest server reply IPX SAP interface parameters 6 2 get nearest server reply delay IPX SAP inter
383. uppressed Example Suppress Advertising of all Networks Except 10 To configure your switch to suppress the advertising of all networks except network 10 on the IPX interface named Backbone you must create two filters To create these filters Filter 1 1 In the IPX RIP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Filters 2 Click Create to create a new filter The Add IPX RIP Filter dialog box opens 3 Configure the following parameters b From the Interface pull down menu select the Backbone In the Precedence field enter O In the Start Network field enter 10 In the End Network field enter 10 From the Direction pull down menu select Outbound From the Filter Suppress pull down menu select Disable 5 4 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX RIP Protocol Layer 3 g In the Ticks and Hops fields enter O respectively This filter ensures that the advertising of network 10 on the interface Backbone will not be suppressed To suppress all other networks proceed with the creation of Filter 2 Filter 2 1 In the IPX RIP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Filters 2 Click Create to create a new filter The Add IPX RIP Filter dialog box opens 3 Configure the following parameters b g From the Interface pull down menu select the Backbone In the Precedence field enter 1 In the Start Network field enter O In the End Network fi
384. ured with a mix of Layer 2 and Layer 3 modules IP and IPX routing is performed by the Layer 3 media module or the Layer 3 supervisor module using special ASICs present on those modules These ASICs contain an address cache forwarding table that can hold a maximum of 20 000 address cache entries The entries consist of packet addressing information and next hop information that enable the switch to effectively route the packets to their destination The Layer 3 supervisor also maintains a master routing table The master routing table contains up to 24 000 entries This routing table enables the supervisor module to keep track of which entries are in each address cache As a result each time a change occurs in the master routing table the Layer 3 supervisor module updates the appropriate address caches For example if a unicast route is removed from the master routing table then all matching entries in forwarding tables are removed as well Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 1 7 Cajun P550 Switch Overview Consequently when you connect a Cajun switch to the network it begins to receive frames from the network and builds a master routing table in the supervisor module and forwarding tables in each media module based on those frames This process creates three distinct results O All known learned traffic from Layer 3 modules that requires routing is routed directly in hardware by the Layer 3 media module without a need to trave
385. ve entries Aged Entries The number of entries aged out Duplicate Add The number of attempts at adding some slow path entries Attempts Failed Add Attempts The number of failed attempts at adding a forwarding entry Entries Removed Due to Route Deletes The number of entries removed because of route deletions Entries Removed Due to Route Changes The number of entries removed because of route changes Lookup Hits Cache hits Lookup Misses Cache misses Lookup Levels Cache depth Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Layer 2 and Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures are common to both Layer 2 and Layer 3 configuration Included in this chapter O VLAN Operation Creating and Implementing VLANs O O Using Spanning Tree Setup and Monitoring O Using Hunt Groups to Aggregate Bandwidth between Switches VLAN Operation VLAN operation is based on three sets of rules O Ingress Rules O Forwarding Rules O Egress Rules Ingress Rules Every frame received by the switch is classified to one VLAN There are two ways in which frames are classified to VLANs O Untagged frames are classified to the VLAN associated with the port on which the frame is received Port based VLANs O Tagged frames are classified to the VLAN identified by the VLAN tag in the tag header of the frame Cajun P550 P
386. verse Routes are advertised with an infinite metric 16 Default Route Specify the mode for the default route Different states include e Disable Disables the default route Talk Only Send RIP information to the network e Listen Only Receive RIP information from the network e Talk Listen Both send and receive RIP information from the network Auth Type Specify the type of authentication available for use on a given RIP interface Authentication types include e None No authentication available e Simple Uses a clear text password for validation MD5 Uses a stronger encryption technique for passwords Auth Key Enter the authorization key value 3 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Creating Trusted RIP Neighbors Trusted RIP neighbors enable you to enhance a Cajun switch s security by enabling one or more neighbors to relay RIP information CAUTION Adding one or more trusted RIP neighbors ensures that your router accepts only information from these neighbors Consequently all other information is filtered Do not create trusted RIP neighbor s if you do not wish to filter RIP information from the network Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 8 3 Configuring the RIP Routing Protocol Layer 3 To create a trusted RIP neighbor 1 In the RIP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Trusted RIP Neighbors The Truste
387. via PPP 6 In the Post Dial Terminal screen click Continue F7 PPP verification completes and the Connected To dialog box displays a message that the modem connection has been successfully established Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 29 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Configuring the IP Interface for the PPP Console To configure the PPP console with an IP address and mask 1 2 Configure your console serial port as a PPP Console See Connecting a Modem earlier in this chapter Connect your modem cable to the Cajun s serial port From the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent click Interfaces The IP Interfaces dialog box opens Click CREATE The Add IP Interface dialog box opens From the VLAN pull down menu select Serial Console This specifies the interface for the PPP console In the Network Address field enter the IP address to be associated with the PPP console port Note If you do not enter a name for this interface the IP address is used as the interface name In the Mask field enter the network mask IP address for example 255 255 255 0 Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Configuring a Static Route for the PPP Console To configure a PPP Console static route 1 Configure your console serial port as a PPP Console Refer to Connecting a Modem earlier in this chapter From the IP Configuratio
388. vious command Ctrl N for next command for help Login Note Information you enter at the Login and Password prompts is case sensitive 4 Atthe Login prompt enter root The password prompt displays Password 5 At the Password prompt enter root as the default password The command line interface prompt displays 6 Enter the command enable 7 Enter the command configure This changes the command mode to configure mode so that you can use the setup command 8 Enter the command setup This initiates a series of queries Answer each query as follows a When prompted to change the super user password press Enter to accept the default answer of Yes b Enter your Old password The system then prompts you for a new password The default password is root C Enter your new password then re enter the new password to verify your choice d Enter the IP address for the switch manager s Ethernet console e Enter the subnet mask for the network s IP address f Enter the default gateway for the switch Figure 3 1 illustrates an example setup command session Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 3 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Figure 3 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 CLI Setup Command Display Welcome to Switch Setup The brief series of questions that follows will help you to configure this switch After completing this process you will be able to manage the switch using the switch b
389. w AppleTalk zone table statistics 1 In the AppleTalk Display section of the Web Agent window click Zone Table Statistics The AppleTalk Zone Table Statistics dialog box opens 2 Use Table 10 11 for more information on AppleTalk zone table statistics Table 10 11 AppleTalk Zone Table Statistical Parameters Current Number of Zones Displays the current number of AppleTalk zones Peak Number of Zones Displays the peak number of AppleTalk zones Viewing the AppleTalk NBP Table To view the AppleTalk NBP table 1 In the AppleTalk Display section of the Web Agent window click Zone Table The AppleTalk Zone Table opens 2 Use Table 10 12 for more information on AppleTalk NBP table statistics Table 10 12 AppleTalk NBP Table Statistical Parameters Parameter Definition Index Displays the index of the name binding protocol entry Name Displays the name of the NBP entry Type Displays the type of object named Interface Displays the Appletalk interface associated with the AppleTalk NBP table entry Zone Displays the zone field associated with the NBP table entry Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 10 17 Configuring AppleTalk Routing Layer 3 10 18 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Monitoring and Configuring the Forwarding Cache Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures are common to Layer 3 configuration Included in this chapter O Configuring the Foward
390. want to configure for example 10 for 100Base FX The Port Configuration dialog box opens Click All Module Switch Ports Configuration The All Ports Configuration dialog box opens Set port parameters as described beginning in Configuring Physical Port Parameters on Gigabit Ports and or Configuring Physical Port Parameters on Fast Ethernet Ports earlier in this chapter Click APPLY to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Viewing Switch Port Parameters To view switch port parameters 1 In the System Configuration section of the Web Agent window select Modules amp Ports The Module Information dialog box opens 2 In the Switch Ports column click the number for switch port information about the desired module The Switch Ports dialog box opens 3 Use Table 3 6 for more information on switch port parameters Table 3 6 Switch Port Parameters Parameter Definition Links Opens associated dialog boxes Port Displays the port associated with the selected module Name Displays the port name and opens the Switch Port Configuration dialog box for the selected module Port VLAN Displays the port VLAN for the selected module VLAN Classification Displays the port VLAN classification for the selected module Trunk Mode Displays the port s trunk mode for the selected module
391. warding Cache Displaying DVMRP Global Statistics Examining DVMRP Interface Statistics Displaying DVMRP Neighbor Router s Displaying DVMRP Routing Table Statistics Displaying the DVMRP Route Table Displaying the DVMRP Upstream Routers Displaying the DVMRP Designated Forwarder s Table Displaying the DVMRP Downstream Dependent Router s OQ 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y Displaying the DVMRP Multicast Forwarding Cache Note It is possible to use access rules to filter and prioritize multicast traffic Displaying IGMP Global Statistics The IGMP global statistics provides users with statistics on membership reports membership queries transmitted and received and unknown messages Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 7 27 Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 To display IGMP global statistics 1 In the IGMP Display section of the Web Agent window click Global Statistics The IGMP Global Statistics dialog box opens 2 To modify your global statistics perform one of the following e Click REFRESH to view the latest statistics e Click CLEAR ALL to reset all statistics to zero e Select one or more interfaces and click CLEAR to reset statistics on those interfaces to zero 3 Use Table 7 15 to review each IGMP statistic Table 7 15 IGMP Global Statistics Parameters Parameter Defines the Group Membership Number of reports received in response to a group Reports Received membership query Hosts respond to a Query by ge
392. ween two specified subnets via specific protocols such as the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the User Datagram Protocol UDP and specified ranges of ports Note Access rules are searched in order of priority from first to last During this search the first rule that matches the frame is applied If no rule is matched to a frame then the frame is forwarded with normal priority You can not use access lists to filter traffic destined to the switch s CPU 7 8 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IP Routing Layer 3 There is an implied implicit permit all at the end of the list Also you can only have one list active at a time Creating Standard Access Rules To create standard access rules 1 In the IP Configuration section of the Web Agent window click Access Lists The IP Access List dialog box opens Note The IP Access List dialog box displays all standard and extended access rules that have been created If no rules have been created the following statement displays No IP Access Rules are currently configured 2 Click Create Standard Valid numeric values are 1 99 3 Use Table 7 4 to configure your IP access rules to either filter or prioritize traffic Table 7 4 P Access List Setup Parameters Parameter Allows you to specify Access List Name The alphanumeric name assigned to the newly created access list Access Rule Index The sequence number for each new rule you creat
393. witch to a location on a TFIP server If you select File or TFTP Server also provide the path and filename of the destination file in the Source Destination field 5 In TFTP Server IP Address enter the IP address of the source or destination TFTP server if applicable 6 Click Copy Your source configuration or file is copied to your specified destination Note The Web Agent returns an Invalid operation error message if you attempt to copy e The current running configuration to the running configuration e The startup configuration to the same startup configuration e The specified TFTP server to a TFIP server Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 3 49 Configuring the Cajun P550 Switch Layer 2 amp Layer 3 Viewing the Status of a TFTP Transfer After you have copied the startup configuration or other files to a TFTP server you can check the status of the TFTP transfer to ensure that files copied correctly To view the status of a TFIP transfer 1 In the CLI Configuration section of the Web Agent click Config File Management The Configuration File Management dialog box opens 2 In the Get Status of Most Recent TFTP Copy field click Status 3 50 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Configuring IPX Routing Layer 3 Overview This chapter and its procedures are specific to Layer 3 configuration Included in this chapter O IPX Overview O Configuring the Cajun Switch as an IPX Router
394. witch Operation Guide Configuring the OSPF Routing Protocol Layer 3 Table 9 3 OSPF Interface Parameters Continued Parameter Definition Retransmit Interval Enter the number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to this interface This value is also used when retransmitting database description and link state request packets Hello Interval Enter the length of time in seconds between the Hello packets that the router sends on the interface This value must be the same for all routers attached to a common network Dead Interval Enter the number of seconds that a router s Hello packets have not been seen before it s neighbors declare the router down This should be some multiple of the Hello interval This value must be the same for all routers attached to a common network Poll Interval Enter the larger time interval in seconds between the Hello packets sent to an inactive non broadcast multiaccess neighbor Cost Enter the cost metric associated with this interface Authentication Select the type of authentication available for use on a given OSPF interface Authentication types include e None e Simple Password MD5 Authentication Key Enter the area s authorization key value MD5 Key ID Enter the MD5 authentication key ID as a decimal value Creating OSPF Virtual Links To create an OSPYF virtual link 1 In the OSPF Configuration se
395. witch performance 9 8 OSPF global configuration parameters 9 2 searching the link state database 9 12 OSPF area parameters area ID 9 3 area type 9 3 stub metric 9 3 translate 7 into 5 9 3 type 3 ASE filter 9 3 OSPF areas deleting 9 3 modifying 9 4 OSPF external routes IP global configuration parameters 7 5 OSPF global configuration configuring 9 2 OSPF global configuration parameters AS border route 9 2 auto creation of virtual links 9 2 local ext type 9 2 maximum number of paths 9 2 OSPF 9 2 RIP ext type 9 2 router ID 9 2 SPF hold time 9 2 SPF suspend 9 2 static ext type 9 2 static low ext type 9 2 OSPF inter area routes IP global configuration parameters 7 5 OSPF interface parameters area 9 4 authentication 9 5 cost 9 5 dead interval 9 5 DR priority 9 4 hello interval 9 5 interface 9 4 IP address 9 4 key 9 5 MD5 key ID 9 5 poll interval 9 5 retransmit interval 9 5 transit delay 9 4 OSPF interfaces modifying 9 4 OSPF link parameters area ID 9 10 BDR address 9 10 DR address 9 10 DR router ID 9 10 IP address 9 10 state 9 10 type 9 10 OSPF link state database parameter age 9 14 area ID 9 14 checksum 9 14 detail link 9 14 LS ID 9 14 router ID 9 14 sequence 9 14 Index 27 type 9 14 OSPF link state database search parameters area ID 9 13 router ID 9 13 type 9 13 OSPF neighbors parameters BDR choice 9 12 DD number 9 11 DR choice 9 12 DR priority 9
396. y is used to override the value in the RIP packet Entering O ensures that there is no override in the transmission of data on the network Hops Specify the number of routers hops that the packet must pass through before reaching the network number associated with the IPX interface This entry is used to override the value in the RIP packet Entering O ensures that there is no override in the transmission of data on the network 4 Click CREATE to save changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide 5 3 Configuring IPX RIP Protocol Layer 3 Example Suppress Advertising of Network 10 To configure your switch to suppress the advertising of network 10 on the IPX interface named Backbone 1 In the IPX RIP Configuration section of the Web Agent click Filters 2 Click Create to create a new filter The Add IPX RIP Filter dialog box opens 3 Configure the following parameters b g From the Interface pull down menu select the Backbone In the Precedence field enter O In the Start Network field enter 10 In the End Network field enter 10 From the Direction pull down menu select Outbound From the Filter Suppress pull down menu select Enable In the Ticks and Hops fields enter O 4 Click CREATE to save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings This filter ensures that all advertising of network 10 from the interface Backbone is s
397. y per VLAN parameters 15 17 LGMP server display per VLAN parameters 15 15 LGMP message Statistics LGMP server configuration parameters 15 13 LGMP message transmission statistics LGMP server configuration parameters 15 14 LGMP messages transmission statistics LGMP server display per VLAN parameters 15 15 LGMP server 15 3 LGMP server configuration 15 12 15 14 LGMP server configuration parameters enable state 15 13 intelligent multicast session statistics 15 14 LGMP message reception statistics 15 13 LGMP message transmission statistics 15 14 LGMP servers 15 13 proxy mode 15 13 robustness variable 15 13 router report time 15 13 server ID priority 15 13 LGMP server display per VLAN parameters intelligent multicast session statistics 15 15 LGMP message reception statistics 15 15 LGMP messages transmission statistics 15 15 state 15 15 VLAN 15 15 LGMP servers LGMP server configuration parameters 15 13 limit proxy ARP to same network IP global configuration parameters 7 4 link data LSA detail 9 16 link ID LSA detail 9 16 link state advertisement details viewing 9 15 link state database 9 12 link state database search parameters area ID 9 13 router ID 9 13 type 9 13 links switch port parameter 3 13 listening state spanning tree bridge port 12 10 local ext type OSPF global configuration parameters 9 2 local routes IP global configuration parameters 7 5 log event table actions 16 9 log ID
398. yer Spanning tree terminates at edge of the switch network Spanning Tree per VLAN within the switch network Disable Spanning tree not used 4 Click APPLY save your changes or CANCEL to restore previous settings 5 In the Bridge column click on a bridge name to set bridge parameters The Spanning Tree Bridge Configuration dialog box opens 6 Use Table 12 4 to select bridge level parameters Table 12 4 BridgeLevel Parameters Parameter Definition Mode Determines whether spanning tree is enabled or disabled for this bridge Priority STP Priority level for this bridge Bridge Max Age Sets the maximum amount of time that this bridge retains bridging information before discarding When the maximum age expires the bridge assumes it has lost connection to the network and sends out requests to be re added to the spanning tree Bridge Hello Time Time between generation of BPDUs by the root bridge 12 8 Cajun P550 P220 Switch Operation Guide Using VLANs Spanning Tree and Hunt Groups Layer 2 and Layer 3 Table 12 4 Bridge Level Parameters Continued Parameter Definition Bridge Forward Delay Amount of delay used when a port transitions to the forwarding state Set by the root bridge for the segment Note You must enter a value within the supported range or the configuration operation will fail The supported value range for this parameter is 10 30 Max Age Current maxi

Lucent Technologies P550 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents